0% found this document useful (0 votes)

259 views370 pages

Sap Bo100 en Col16 Bo-Bi 4.2 2016 Part NW

Uploaded by

Mangesh Kothuri

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

259 views370 pages

Sap Bo100 en Col16 Bo-Bi 4.2 2016 Part NW

Uploaded by

Mangesh Kothuri

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 370

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.

com

B0100
Reporting with SAP
BusinessObjects Bl Solutions for
SAP NetWeaver BW

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

PARTICIPANT HANDBOOK
INSTRUCTOR-LED TRAINING

Course Version: 16
Course Duration: 5 Day(s)
Material Number: 50136063

0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

SAP Copyrights and Trademarks

© 2016 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose
without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in
Germany and other countries. Please see http://globall2.sap.com /corporate-en/legal/
copyright/index.epx for additional trademark information and notices.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary
software components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational
purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated
companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only
warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are
set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if
any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of
business outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any
functionality mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE's
or its affiliated companies’ strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or
platform directions and functionality are all subject to change and may be changed by SAP
SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any reason without notice. The information in
this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal obligation to deliver any material,
code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to various risks and
uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations. Readers
are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which
speak only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing
decisions.

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Typographic Conventions

American English is the standard used in this handbook.

The following typographic conventions are also used.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Demonstration

Procedure

Warning or Caution
A
Hint
O
Related or Additional Information
»
Facilitated Discussion

User interface control Example text

Window title Example text

© Copyright. All rights reserved.

VLC About This Handbook

About This Handbook

This handbook provides you with basic information for attending your virtual live classroom session.

Adobe Connect Support Information

Web and audio support is available by:

• Pressing *0 from within the audio-conferencing

• Calling the support hotline numbers listed below

• Emailing the PGI support hotline below

Global PGI Support Hotline for SAP Education (24/7)

Tel: +1800-368-1945
Tel: +1719-234-7915
Note: After dialing in, press option 2 for technical support. You will then be presented with two options -
press 1 for Audio support, or press 2 for Web support.
Email: sapedsupport@premiereglobal.com

Setting up your Learning Environment

Ideally you want to be in a private room when participating in a synchronous (live) event. In reality, you
may not be able to arrange that. Here are some tips for maximizing your learning environment:

• Create an inspirational office/studio to work in

• Use a comfortable chair

• Use well designed and functional computer peripherals

• Keep a log or journal of notes and ideas you can use for future sessions

Before your online class:

• Tell co-workers you will be in class (send e-mail)

• Post a sign indicating when you will be free again (when class is over)

• Use a headset instead of your computer speakers to minimize disruption of others

• Ignore people who try to get your attention

• Turn off the ringers / alerts on telephone, pager, and cell phone

• Turn off e-mail and instant message alerts

• Remove other distractions lying on your desktop

• Keep a glass of water at your desk

Teleconferencing ground rules:

• Use the mute button or press *6

• Do not place call on hold

IV © Copyright. All rights reserved.

• Use the "Raise hand" icon in the Attendee List: My Status to indicate you want to ask a question

• Identify yourself before speaking, when not called on

• Charge the batteries for your cordless handset

• If possible use a land line instead of your cell phone

Minimum Hardware Requirements

• PC with 1 GHz processor or higher. Minimum 1 GHz processor recommended for screen sharing. You
may be asked to share their screen during hands-on exercise portion of virtual class.

• 17 inch or larger monitor is recommended, set at 1024 X 768. Larger monitor and 1024 X 768 setting
will make presentation and system screens easier to read.

• Phone with Headset/Microphone or Speakerphone feature - to maximize student listening and

comfort during presentation and demonstration portions of the course.

Software Requirement
A complete list of supported Operating Systems, browsers and additional requirements for Adobe®
Acrobat® Connect™ can be found at: www.adobe.com/products/acrobatconnectpro/systemreqs

Sample Email to Notify Others You Are in a Virtual Class

This is a sample of an email you can send to your colleagues and manager when you are taking an online
course.
Dear colleagues,
Today I will be participating in an online class from my desk. I will be online from approximately 9:30 a.m.
to 5:30 a.m. EST. I would appreciate it if you would not disturb me during this time. If you have an
immediate question, please contact Joe Smith at extension 123. If it can wait until after 11:00 a.m.,
please send me an email and I will follow up with you before the end of the business day. I appreciate
your consideration.
Best regards,

Getting the Most Out of Your Session

Session Guidelines

• Turn off email, phones, instant messaging tools, and clear other distractions away from your training
area.

• Participate and prepare to be called on by name.

• Use the “ Raise Hand" icon if you have an immediate question or comment.

• Be patient waiting for a response to your chat messages.

• If you leave the program, please use the “Step Away" status icon in the Attendee List pod to let your
instructor know when you leave and remember to clear it when you return.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

SAB
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

VI © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Contents

xi Course Overview

1 Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x

and SAP NetWeaver

2 Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

25 Exercise 1: Log on to and Navigate in the Bl Launch Pad

39 Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data

Connectivity

40 Lesson: Describing Semantic Layer Technology

41 Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool
55 Exercise 2: Create a Connection for a Relational Universe on top
of SAP BW
63 Exercise 3: Create a Universe on Top of a BEx Query

69 Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and

SAP NetWeaver BW

70 Lesson: Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis,

Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW
73 Exercise 4: Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects
Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW
81 Exercise 5: Define a Filter Value Using VBA

87 Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP

NetWeaver BW

88 Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis,

Edition for OLAP
99 Exercise 6: Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects
Analysis, Edition for OLAP
105 Lesson: Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis,
Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query
111 Exercise 7: Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects
Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query
117 Exercise 8: Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects
Analysis, Edition for OLAP with Variables and Hierarchies

© Copyright. All rights reserved. vii

123 Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

124 Lesson: Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver

BW
127 Exercise 9: Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW
(BICS)
133 Exercise 10: Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW
(Relational Universe)

141 Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

142 Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise
153 Exercise 11: Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for
Enterprise and SAP BW
161 Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016
171 Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016 and SAP
BW
173 Exercise 12: Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016 and
SAP BW

179 Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

180 Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects

Design Studio
193 Exercise 13: Create an Analytical Application with Tabstrip
Layout and Filter Panel
201 Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application with Scripting
205 Exercise 14: Create an Analytical Application
207 Exercise 15: Create an Analytic Application using the Design
Studio Ready to Run Template

213 Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

214 Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects

Dashboards
225 Exercise 16: Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel
Spreadsheet
233 Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query
235 Exercise 17: Create a Dashboard with a BEx Query Connection
via Query Browser

247 Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

248 Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

267 Exercise 18: Creating a Lumira Analysis on SAP BW Data
271 Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis
287 Exercise 19: Create a Predictive Analysis on SAP BW Data

© Copyright. All rights reserved.

293 Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

294 Lesson: Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information

Space
300 Lesson: Describing Data Connectivity between SAP
BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW
305 Exercise 20: Create an Information Space on top of SAP
NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW) using a Relational
Universe

315 Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

316 Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

326 Lesson: Creating Publications with SAP Crystal Reports and SAP
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence
328 Lesson: Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise
Portal
336 Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion
Management

© Copyright. All rights reserved. IX

X © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Course Overview

TARGET AUDIENCE
This course is intended for the following audiences:

• Application Consultant

• Business Analyst

• Business Process Owner/Team Lead/Power User

© Copyright. All rights reserved. xi

XII © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 1 Overview of SAP

BusinessObjects Business
Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP
NetWeaver

Lesson 1
Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x 2
Exercise 1: Log on to and Navigate in the Bl Launch Pad 25

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Describe user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the management tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the Bl client tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the components for integration with SAP NetWeaver BW

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

SAB4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 1
Lesson 1

Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson is an introduction to the components that make up the SAP BusinessObjects
Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x platform.
The platform supports user reporting, query and analysis, and performance management.
Use the platform to administer your reporting content.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Describe user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the management tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the Bl client tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the components for integration with SAP NetWeaver BW

One Suite for All Insight

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) platform provides flexible systems
management for an enterprise Bl standard that allows administrators to confidently deploy
and standardize their SAP BusinessObjects Bl implementations on a proven, scalable, and
adaptive service-oriented architecture.
The SAP BusinessObjects Bl solution consists of different client tools for specific use cases
and the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform server that provides functionality including a
central repository, user management, security, and reports scheduling.

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform

SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform is a flexible, scalable, and reliable solution for delivering
powerful, interactive reports to users via any Web application-intranet, extranet, internet, or
corporate portal. Whether it is used for distributing weekly sales reports, providing customers
with personalized service offerings, or integrating critical information into corporate portals,
SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform delivers tangible benefits that extend across and beyond
the organization. As an integrated suite for reporting, analysis, and information delivery, SAP
BusinessObjects Bl platform provides a solution for increasing user productivity and reducing
administrative efforts.

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Client Application by Role

SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform includes and/or interacts with most SAP BusinessObjects
client tools. Depending on the job role, different client tools are used. The major roles in SAP
BusinessObjects Bl platform are the following:•

• Business user and report designer

2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Data manager

• Administrator

SAP Business Intelligence Client Portfolio

Note:
The following are the different categories of client products. These categories are
now considered legacy because SAP BusinessObjects Bl Client tools have evolved
and SAP client tools strategy has changed to closely align with customer
requirements and consolidate tools. They are included here because these
products are still supported.

Reporting: How do I access and transform corporate data into highly formatted reports for
greater insights?

Dashboards and visualizations: How do I visualize data for better decision making?

Interactive reporting: How do I answer ad hoc questions and interact with information?

Analysis: How do I determine trends from complex historical data and possibly make
better forecasts?

Data exploration: How do I find immediate answers to business questions?

Bl application design: How can IT create centrally from simple to complex Bl applications
for a larger audience?

Business intelligence solutions provide business users with access to unified information
through a broad suite of business intelligence tools. This suite of business intelligence tools
enables business users to make confident decisions and align teams on a single and scalable
SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform.

Business Intelligence User Roles

Table 1: Business Intelligence User Roles

The following table illustrates different business roles as they pertain to a business
intelligence environment:
Roles Information Requirements

Middle Management • Analyze regional goals and strategic Key

Performance Indicators (KPIs).

• Analyze information to measure the prog

ress toward set goals and KPIs.

Business Analyst
• Leverage actual and historical data to cre
ate detailed planning scenarios.

• Base decisions on solid information, and

leverage data and tools to provide ad hoc
answers to the management and execu
tive team.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 3

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Roles Information Requirements

Executive • Oversee cross department/line of busi

ness performance and evaluate different
scenarios for planning and forecasting
purposes.

• Combine and review analytics with com

pany strategies and goals to continuously
improve company performance.

Individual Contributor • Review regular account statements to

control customer invoices and vendor ac
counts.

• Fulfill management requests for informa

tion as simply as possible.

Self-Service
Self-service Bl is an approach to data analytics that enables business users to access and
work with corporate information without the involvement of the IT department. However, the
IT department are required to set up the data warehouse and data marts underpinning the Bl
system and deploy the self-service query and reporting tools.
SAP BusinessObjects Explorer provides self-service and is a web-based search and
exploration application that enables business professionals to explore and search through
business information.

Dashboards and Apps

With SAP BusinessObjects Mobile, you can open SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence or
SAP Crystal Reports documents and SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards on your mobile
device. Therefore, define categories on the SAP Bl platform first. Every SAP BusinessObjects

4 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

Web Intelligence or SAP Crystal Report document that is made available on mobile devices is
saved in default categories.

Dashboards and Apps Default Categories

• Mobile (#default, #ipad, #androidphone)

This category allows the document to be displayed on a mobile device.

• MobileDesigned
This category allows the document layout on the device to be the same as in the report
design.

• Confidential
This category can only be accessed online and the document cannot be downloaded to the
mobile device.

When you open the SAP BusinessObjects Mobile app, a start page appears on which you can
see all available SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, SAP Crystal Reports, and SAP
Dashboards documents. Here, you can manage your connections, change your properties, or
search for documents.
When you open an SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence or SAP Crystal Reports document,
you can navigate and interact with the reports. Furthermore, you can drill in charts and tables
or restrict the shown data using filters and prompts. By opening an SAP BusinessObjects
Dashboards document, you can interact with the data following the path predefined by the
dashboard creator. To collaborate with your colleagues and partners, you can make notes
and distribute your analysis via e-mail or SAP StreamWork.

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

With the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer app, you have mobile access to your information
spaces created in SAP BusinessObjects Explorer. On the start page, you can choose between
three tabs in the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer app.

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Start Page Tabs

• Personal
In the Personal tab, you can save your explorations as personal views.

• Corporate
The Corporate View tab lists the available exploration view sets.

• Exploration
The Exploration tab lists the information spaces containing your data. You can use the
search query to filter the list of information spaces.

Mobile Dashboards
SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards can now be viewed on mobile devices running iOS or
Android.
Note that due to the smaller screen and lack of mouse-over capabilities, certain SAP
BusinessObjects Dashboards features and components are unsupported on mobile devices.
The Mobile Compatibility panel has been added to the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards
designer interface. If your dashboard contains features or components not supported on
mobile, the Mobile Compatibility panel displays a warning.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 5

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Dashboards can now be saved to an SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform deployment as mobile

objects. These objects can be viewed on the mobile device of the consumer and exclude any
components or features unsupported on mobile devices.
The following preview modes have been added:

• Mobile (fit to screen)

• Mobile (original size)

Reporting
Reporting tools in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence portfolio allow users to
create formatted reports with graphical elements on trusted data that can come from various
data sources.

Reporting Solutions from SAP

• Quickly build formatted reports on any data source.

• Securely distribute reports both internally and externally.

• Minimize IT support costs by empowering end users to easily create and modify their own
reports.

• Enhance custom applications with embedded reports.

Competitive Differentiators

• Self-service ad hoc reporting with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.

• Depth of Software Development Kit (SDK) and the ability to embed SAP Crystal Reports.

• Available everywhere-mobile, Web and desktop, online and offline.

Big data is a term for data sets that are so large or complex that traditional data processing
applications are inadequate. Challenges include analysis, capture, data curation, search,
sharing, storage, transfer, visualization, querying, updating and information privacy. The term
often refers simply to the use of predictive analytics or certain other advanced data analytics

6 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

methods that extract value from data, and seldom to a particular size of data set. Accuracy in
big data may lead to more confident decision making, and better decisions can result in
greater operational efficiency, cost reduction and reduced risk.
Analysis of data sets can find new correlations to spot business trends, prevent diseases,
combat crime and so on. Scientists, business executives, practitioners of medicine,
advertising and governments alike regularly meet difficulties with large data sets in areas
including Internet search, finance and business informatics. Scientists encounter limitations
in e-Science work, including meteorology, genomics,connectomics, complex physics
simulations, biology and environmental research.
Data sets are growing rapidly in part because they are increasingly gathered by cheap and
numerous information-sensing mobile devices, aerial (remote sensing), software logs,
cameras, microphones, radio-frequency identification (RFID) readers and wireless sensor
networks.

r \

New challenges for IT

V J

Data is getting Expectations have

BIG CHANGED
Figure 3: New Challenges

New Converged SAP BusinessObjects Bl Clients

With the release of SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.2, SAP announced the simplification of their
BusinessObjects toolset.

• Reporting
Reporting remains a fundamental Bl requirement. SAP Crystal Reports is a client for pixel
perfect operational reporting. SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is great for ad hoc
reporting use cases. SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP Crystal Reports are
not going away. In addition, SAP will continue to support desktop intelligence documents
on the Bl platform, too.

• Dashboards
SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio will be the go forward solution for dashboards and
application development. For further details on this, please check out the SAP
BusinessObjects Dashboards statement of direction.•

• Discovery and Analysis

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 7

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

SAP want to converge the experience for both the analyst and the business user. For the
analyst. According to their statement of direction, they want to bring together the ability to
mash and merge data, answer ad hoc business questions, create meaningful visualizations
and compose those visualizations into powerful stories that can be easily shared and
explored by business users. The idea is to not only look in the rear-view mirror at what has
happened in the past, but also look through the windshield at what's coming in the future,
embedding predictive capabilities to provide visual discoveries, automatic identification of
outliers, future values, and optimal outcomes delivered in a way that makes sense. These
experiences will come together in SAP Lumira.

• Office Integration
For those of you who live in Microsoft Office, SAP will continue with SAP BusinessObjects
Bl solutions directly into Excel, PowerPoint, Word and Outlook.

• Interoperability
SAP also wants to bring together different user personas: the IT administrator, the
developeror designer, the analyst and the decision maker, and the workflows between
them. It's often the analyst who fields the one-off, ad hoc queries from the business and
quickly needs to find an answer to specific a business question. That initial answer may
lead to additional questions and more back and forth to find the final answer. However,
when that question comes up time and time again, this drives the need to find a more
systematic way of solving the problem. That's where the developer/designer comes in,
creating a report, dashboard or application that can be administered, secured and scaled
to a large set of business users and enabling them to self-serve. Interoperability here is
key. Today, with a couple of clicks, an analyst can take an answer from SAP
BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office into SAP BusinessObjects Design
Studio and hand it over to a developer/designer to create a dashboarding application.
We'll be looking to support similar types of workflows from SAP Lumira to SAP
BusinessObjects Design Studio moving forward.
See more at: http://blog-sap.com/analytics/2014/06/25/run-simple-convergence-of-
the-sap-businessobjects-bi-product-portfolio/#sthash.DyRXBpS3.dpuf

Content Consumption
SAP BusinessObjects solutions provide business users with access to unified information
through a broad suite of Bl tools for confident decision making and alignment across people
and teams on a single, scalable platform. Bl Launch Pad, a Web application, allows users to
access SAP Crystal Reports, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence documents, SAP
BusinessObjects Dashboards documents, and other objects, and organize them to suit your
preferences.
The features that are available in Bl Launch Pad vary by content type. In general, you can view
information in your Web browser, export it to other business applications (such as Microsoft
Excel), and save it to a specified location. SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform also provides
access to a range of analytic tools to help you explore information in more detail.

Content Creation
For user interaction, the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform includes a large set of tools and
options. The most common user interface is Bl Launch Pad. Bl Launch Pad provides the user
with the complete set of capabilities to leverage all of the features and functions of the Bl
Client Tools. It also delivers functionality such as viewing, scheduling, and broadcasting of
reports and analytics to the user.

8 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

Content Creation Tools

• Bl launch pad (web client)

• SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office (Microsoft Excel and Microsoft
PowerPoint plug-in)

• SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) (web
client)

• Bl Workspaces (web client)

• SAP BusinessObjects Live Office

• Web service query tool

• SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence desktop

• SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence (web client)

• SAP Crystal Reports 2013

• SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

• SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

• SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

Data Sources
Customers benefit from an open and agnostic Bl platform, with access to all corporate
databases and applications. By leveraging a Common Semantic Layer (CSL), it enables a
consistent business user experience. The common semantic layer allows for heterogeneous
access over all data sources (for example, OLAP, and relational) and supports native
metadata such as OLAP hierarchies.

Data Sources that the Common Semantic Layer Can Access: Examples
• SAPHANA

• SAP Business Warehouse (BW)

• SAPERP

• Microsoft Structured Query Language (SQL) server

• Oracle

• IBM DB2

• IBM Netezza

• SAP IQ

• Teradata

• Apache Hadoop

For a complete list of supported data sources, see SAP Product Availability Matrix on SAP
Support Portal at: https://support.sap.com /content/dam /library/ssp/infopages/pam-
essentials7SB0P_BI_42.pdf.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 9

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

User Interaction
The regular administrative tasks associated with SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence
platform can be divided roughly into the following categories:

• User and group management-

- Creating and managing users and groups, including their rights to folders, objects, and
applications For example, an SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform Administrator needs to
give the appropriate rights to Data Managers and Report Designers who interact with
the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform. Data Managers build universes and export them
to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform. Report Designers design reports from these
universes using SAP Crystal Reports, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, or
Analysis and can then save the reports to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform.

• Content Management

- Adding, scheduling, and managing SAP Crystal Reports files, and SAP BusinessObjects
Web Intelligence files.

- Managing universes, universe connections, and universe restriction sets.

- Managing additional documents, and hyperlinks.

- Managing workspaces and analytics.

- Securing content.

• Server Management

- Installing, configuring, and managing servers.

In the area of the administration tools, the Bl platform delivers several options to manage the
system itself and manage the integration with other system landscapes.

The following administration tools are used to administer and maintain the Bl platform:

• Central Management Console (CMC)

• Central Configuration Manager (CCM)

• Translation Management Tool

10 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Upgrade Management Tool

Bl Tools and Clients

SAP Bl Clients

Windows based Web based

SAP Lumira Bl Launchpad

Web Intelligence Desktop Client

Design Studio Web Intelligence

Analysis for Office

Bl Workspaces
Crystal Reports

Predictive Analytics Analysis edition for OLAP

Dashboard

Web Service Query Tool Explorer

Figure 5: Bl Tools and Clients

The SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform includes a large set of tools and
options for user interaction. The most commonly-used user interface is BILaunch Pad, which
is discussed in the next concept.

SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Business Users and Report Designers

Table 2: Other Client Tools Used by Business Users and Report Designers
The following table summarizes some of the other client tools that are used by business users
and report designers:
Tool Description

Analysis, Edition for MS Office (Excel and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Mi
PowerPoint plug-in) crosoft Office, is a plug-in that integrates into
Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint
and serves as an online analytical processing
(OLAP) tool. It provides access to a range of
OLAP data sources, and also allows users to
combine information from different systems
within a single Workspace.
Analysis, Edition for OLAP (web client) SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for
OLAP (formerly Voyager), is an online analyti
cal processing (OLAP) tool for working with
multidimensional data. It provides access to a
range of OLAP data sources, and can also
combine information from different OLAP da
ta sources within a single Workspace.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 11

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Tool Description

Bl Workspaces (web client) Bl Workspaces (formerly Dashboard Builder)

helps you track business activities and per
formance using data templates called mod
ules. Modules provide the information you
need to adjust business rules as conditions
change. Bl Workspaces supports group deci
sion-making and analysis via integrated col
laboration and workflow capabilities. It ena
bles you to organize material in pages, create
mash-ups of content, and present informa
tion in a way that is tailored to the role of the
user, either for personal use or for sharing
with others.
Live Office SAP BusinessObjects Live Office integrates
with the Microsoft Office environment, allow
ing dynamically-updated data to be embed
ded within Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel, and
Word documents. In addition, it enables you
to share your documents with others over the
web for collaborative decision-making.
Web Service Query Tool The Web Service Query Tool (formerly Query
as a Web Service) allows Business Intelli
gence queries to be used in custom web ap
plications. Business users create their own
queries from a universe connection and pub
lish them as web services so they can be in
corporated into client applications.
SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desk
Desktop top is an ad hoc analysis and reporting tool
for business users with or without access to
the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelli
gence platform. It allows those users to ac
cess and combine data from relational, online
analytical processing (OLAP), spreadsheet,
or text file sources, using familiar business
terms in a drag-and-drop interface. Work-
flows allow very broad or very narrow ques
tions to be analyzed, and for further ques
tions to be asked at any point in the analysis
workflow. Web Intelligence Desktop users can
continue working with Web Intelligence docu
ment files (.wid) even when unable to connect
to a Central Management Server (CMS).

12 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

Tool Description

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence (Web SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is an

Client) ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for busi
ness users with access to the SAP Busines
sObjects Business Intelligence platform. It al
lows business users to access and combine
data from relational, online analytical proc
essing (OLAP), spreadsheet, or text file sour
ces, using familiar business terms in a drag-
and-drop interface. Workflows allow very
broad or very narrow questions to be ana
lyzed, and for further questions to be asked at
any point in the analysis workflow.
SAP Crystal Reports 2016 SAP Crystal Reports 2016 is a Windows-
based report design tool used to create pow
erful reports that can be published in the SAP
BusinessObjects Business Intelligence plat
form.
SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise is a Java-
based report design tool used to create and
integrate powerful reports in the SAP Busi
nessObjects Business Intelligence platform.
Design Studio SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio is the
premium alternative to BEx Web Application
Designer. With Design Studio power users
can create purpose-built OLAP analysis and
planning apps using customer- and SAP-de
livered content.
SAP Lumira Use SAP BusinessObjects Lumira data visual
ization tools to combine data, analyze trends,
and share valuable business intelligence (Bl)
in an engaging and visualizations.
SAP Predictive Analytics SAP BusinessObjects Predictive Analytics is a
statistical analysis and data mining solution
that enables you to build predictive models to
discover hidden insights and relationships in
your data, from which you can make predic
tions about future events.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 13

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Data Managers

Data Manager

Business Objects Clients

Web Clients Windows Clients

Information Design
Tool

Universe Design Tool

Figure 6: SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Data Manage

The following table summarizes some of the client tools that are commonly used by data
managers:
Tool Description

Information Design Tool The Information Design Tool is an SAP Busi

nessObjects metadata design environment
that enables a designer to extract, define,
and manipulate metadata from relational and
OLAP sources in order to create and deploy
UNX universes.
Universe Design Tool The Universe Design Tool (formerly Universe
Designer) allows data designers to combine
data from multiple sources in a semantic lay
er (UNV universe) that hides database com
plexity from users. It abstracts the complexi
ty of data by using business rather than tech
nical language to access, manipulate, and or
ganize data.

14 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Administrators

Business Objects Clients

Web Clients Windows Clients

Central Management Central Configuration

Console Manager

Translation
Management Tool

Upgrade Management
Tool

Figure 7: SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Administrators

Table 3: Tools Used by Administrators

The following table summarizes some of the tools that are commonly used by administrators:
Tool Description

Central Management Console (CMC) The Central Management Console (CMC) is

the main web interface for performing ad
ministrative tasks in the SAP BusinessOb
jects Business Intelligence platform, includ
ing user, content, and server management. It
also allows you to publish and organize con
tent, transfer BO Objects across your Bl Plat
form landscape and configure security set
tings.
Central Configuration Manager The Central Configuration Manager (CCM) is
a server troubleshooting and node manage
ment tool provided in two forms. In a Micro
soft Windows environment, the CCM allows
you to manage local and remote servers
through its graphical user interface (GUI) or
from a command line.
Translation Management Tool The Translation Management Tool defines
multilingual universes and manages transla
tion of universes as well as their SAP Busi
nessObjects Web Intelligence documents
and prompts.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 15

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Tool Description

Upgrade Management Tool The Upgrade Management Tool guides ad

ministrators through the process of import
ing users, groups, and folders from previous
versions of the SAP BusinessObjects Busi
ness Intelligence platform (formerly know as
SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise). It also al
lows you to import and upgrade objects,
events, server groups, repository objects,
and calendars.

Bl Launch Pad
The SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform includes Bl Launch Pad, a web
application that acts as a window to a range of useful business information about your
company. From Bl Launch Pad, you can access SAP Crystal Reports, SAP BusinessObjects
Web Intelligence documents, and other objects, and organize them to suit your preferences.
The features that are available in Bl Launch Pad vary by content type. In general, you can view
information in your web browser, export it to other business applications (such as Microsoft
Excel), and save it to a specified location. SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
also provides access to a range of analytic tools to help you explore information in more
detail.
Bl Launch Pad uses tabs to display the main navigation interfaces. Tabs display multiple
pages and documents in one web browser window. Bl Launch Pad has two default tabs, the
Home tab and the Documents tab. Applications such as SAP BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence, and any objects you choose to view or edit, also open in separate tabs

Figure 8: The Bl LaunchPad User interface

16 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

The Home Tab

The default Home tab contains modules that let you better manage the documents and Bl
Launch Pad features you work with most:

• My Recently Viewed Documents

• My Recently Run Documents

• Unread Messages in My Inbox

• Unread Alerts

• My Applications

Administrators can also specify custom Home tabs for different users and groups using
different objects. For example, a custom Home tab can be a customized dashboard, a Crystal
Report that the user views frequently, or a customer website. If you have the appropriate
rights, you can also override the custom Home tab that the administrator has set by editing
your Home tab setting in the preferences.

The Documents Tab

The Documents tab lets you view and manage repository objects. The toolbar contains menus
and controls that let you view and manage objects. The Navigation panel provides a top-level
view of the folders and categories in the system and lets you browse for specific objects.
Drawers are expandable panes in the Navigation panel that enable you to browse objects in
different ways. The List panel displays a list view of the objects in a folder or category. To view
the details for an object, select it and click the Details button in the toolbar. The Details panel
opens on the right side of the Documents tab and displays detailed information.

The Header Panel

The Header panel displays the logo and the user name of the account that you used to log on
to Bl Launch Pad.

Table 4: Header Panel Options

The Header panel also provides the options outlined in the following table:
Option Description

Applications Allows you to access various applications

that plug into Bl Launch Pad, such as Bl
Workspace. Depending on your rights and li
cense, the applications that you have access
to may vary.
Preferences Allows you to determine how your informa
tion is displayed.
Help Menu Allows you to access online help for Bl
Launch Pad, or the About Help page, which
contains information about the product.
Log Off Logs you off.

Setting Preferences in Bl Launch Pad

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 17

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Preferences determine how you log on to Bl Launch Pad and what view is displayed when you
do. They also determine specific settings for the various objects that you view, such as
viewers for SAP Crystal Reports, view formats for SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence
documents and Bl Workspaces, and preferences for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition
forOLAP.

Note:
Best practice is to set your preferences before you begin to work with objects in Bl
Launch Pad. However, depending on your deployment, your Bl platform
administrator may configure your system to use predetermined settings by
default. Depending on the rights that your system administrator has given you,
you may not be able to set your own user preferences.

Setting General Preferences

You can set your initial view by setting the general preferences.

Table 5: Home Tab Options

If you want the Home tab to be displayed when you first log on, you can choose from one of
two options, as described in the following table:
Option Description

Default Home Tab Displays the default view that your adminis
trator has configured. If your administrator
has not configured a default, the Home tab
provided with SAP BusinessObjects Business
Intelligence platform will be used.
Select Home Tab Displays a repository object that you select:
choose Browse Home tab . In the Select a
Custom Home tab window, select a reposito
ry object and choose Open .

If you want the Documents tab to be displayed when you first log on, choose Documents , and
then specify which drawer and node are open by default. Under Choose columns displayed in
Documents tab , you can select the summary information that you want to see for each object
in the List panel. Under Set document viewing location , you can determine if documents are
opened in new tabs or in new web browser windows.

Central Management Console

SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform also includes administrator tools. Besides Central
Management Console (CMC), the tools below are described in this lesson.

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) Platform Tools for Administrators

• Central Management Console

• Central Configuration Manager

• Bl Administrators' Cockpit

18 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

The CMC is the main web interface used to perform administrative tasks, including user,
content, and server management, in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform. It also allows you
to publish and organize content, transfer Bl platform objects across your SAP
BusinessObjects Bl platform landscape and configure security settings. As the CMC is a web-
based application, you can perform all of the administrative tasks in a Web browser on any
computer that can connect to the Web application server.
All users can log on to the CMC to change their own preference settings. Only members of the
administrators group can change management settings, unless a user is explicitly granted
rights to do so. Roles can be assigned in the CMC to grant user privileges to perform minor
administrative tasks, such as managing users in your group and managing reports in folders
that belong to your team.
Bl Administrators' Cockpit is a new application added in the Central Management Console
(CMC) in Bl Platform 4.2. The cockpit enables an administrator to collect basic data about the
Business Objects Bl 4.2 system. It essentially means deriving business intelligence from
within the data in your business intelligence environment. With Bl Administrators' Cockpit,
you can obtain high level information about Servers, Scheduled Jobs, Content Usage, and
Applications.

Central Configuration Manager

The Central Configuration Manager (CCM) is a server troubleshooting and node management
tool, provided in two forms. In a Microsoft Windows environment, the CCM allows you to
manage local and remote servers through its GUI or from a command line. In a Unix
environment, the CCM shell script (ccm.sh) allows you to manage servers from the command
line.
You can use the CCM to create and configure nodes and, if it is the default bundled Apache
Tomcat Web application server, to start or stop your Web application server. On Microsoft
Windows, it also allows you to configure network parameters, such as Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) encryption. These parameters apply to all servers within a node.
Note that most server management tasks are now handled through the CMC, not through the
CCM. The CCM is now used for troubleshooting and node configuration.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 19

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

SAP Crystal Reports

SAP Crystal Reports 2016 is a Microsoft Windows-based report design tool used to create
powerful reports that can be published in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform. You can
create legal or form-based reports such as a tax report or a customer invoice. SAP Crystal
Reports also provides you the flexibility to create complex reports, such as financial reports
with hierarchies.
SAP Crystal Reports also provides the functionality to create reports with charts and other
visualization elements and includes user interactivity such as drill-down and interactive
filtering.

SAP Crystal Reports Overview

Access nearly any data source directly or via the universe semantic layer.

Build reports that look exactly the way you want through pixel-perfect positioning, layout,
and templates.

Create invoices, purchase orders, receipts.

Powerful Application Programming Interface (API) to embed reports into applications.

Optimized for high-volume reporting and publishing.

SAP Crystal Reports Key Benefits

Convert data into formatted, easy-to-read reports.

Schedule, secure, and share in any format.

Add formatted reporting to custom applications with modern Web APIs and standards.

Act from within your reports for closed-loop operational reporting.

20 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

Target Groups for SAP Crystal Reports

Report designers

Business users

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is an ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for business
users with or without access to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform. It allows business users
to access and combine data from relational, Online Analytical Processing (OLAP),
spreadsheet, or text file sources, using familiar business terms in a drag-and-drop interface.
Workflows allow broad or narrow questions to be analyzed, and for further questions to be
asked at any point in the analysis workflow. SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence desktop
users can continue working with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document files (.wid)
even when unable to connect to a CMS.

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Overview

• Market-leading self-service reporting solution for rapid report creation.

• Support for multisource semantic layer to bring together different sources of information,
without having to know the database structure or Structured Query Language (SQL).

• Content available from anywhere: mobile, Web, desktop.

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Key Benefits

• Quick, self-service answers to unpredictable questions.

• Universe semantic layer makes it easy for business users to access data.

• Secure sharing of interactive reports.

• Online and offline access.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 21

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

• Ability to combine corporate data with local spreadsheets.

Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

• Middle management

• Business analysts

• Individual contributors

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards is a tool for data visualization and the creation of dynamic,
interactive dashboards. Data can be updated dynamically from the SAP BusinessObjects Bl
platform, and exported to various different formats that can be viewed by data consumers in
standard formats, such as Microsoft PowerPoint, Adobe PDF, or Adobe Flash.

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards Overview

• Build rich, interactive dashboards and visualizations.

• Broad visualization library to support Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) and executive
dashboards.

• Leverage enterprise Bl infrastructure with support for the semantic layer.

• Recommended for use on third party data sources.

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards Key Benefits

• Monitor KPIs.

• Perform what-if scenario analysis.

22 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Consume dashboards over the Web or embedded in Microsoft PowerPoint or Adobe PDF
documents.

• Use consistent data access with other Bl solutions.

• Act on the insights in the dashboard.

Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

• Executives

• Managers

• Information consumers

• Business analysts

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, is a plug-in that integrates into
Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint to be used as an OLAP tool. It provides access to a
range of OLAP data sources, and also allows users to combine information from different
systems within a single workspace.
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP is an OLAP tool for working with
multidimensional data. It provides access to a range of OLAP data sources, and can also
combine information from different OLAP data sources within a single workspace.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Overview

Recommended for OLAP analysis scenarios (multidimensional analysis).

Quickly leverage your existing SAP investments with support for Business Warehouse
(BW) and HANA.

High productivity for analysts through both Web and Microsoft Excel-based interfaces.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 23

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

• Premium alternative for SAP Business Explorer (BEx) customers.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Key Benefits

• Access, slide, and pivot cubes in SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP HANA.

• Access non-SAP data in Microsoft Analysis Services, with the OLAP edition.

• Share analysis workspaces with SAP Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence.

Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

• Power user/IT

• Business analyst

• Business user

Semantic Layer
A semantic layer represents corporate data in common business terms. It helps that business
users can access data autonomously without being familiar with the structure and technical
characteristics of the respective data source. The semantic layer is created by a designer who
understands the structure of the data source. The objects are named and classified by data
type. For example, you can create familiar business objects like Customer, Product and
Revenue, which represent database structures in the data source. The complexity of the data
source is hidden and so the business user can use these objects for analysis without having to
know the underlying tables of the database where the data is stored. The objective of a
semantic layer is to provide a semantic or common adaption layer that allows business users
to have a common experience across the different clients, sources, and types of information.
It enables organizations to easily reach and work with the broadest set of information
sources. Ideally, it brings together all forms of data for consumption, which means relational,
dimensional, and unstructured sources and can be used in all the different analysis and
visualization tools.

The Mission of the Semantic Layer in SAP Bl

• To make business users autonomous

• To enable single user experience over all data

• To provide trust and consistency

• To enable consumption by all applications and Bl tools

• To allow IT to keep control and ensure security of information

Semantic layers in SAP BusinessObjects are represented by universe objects that are created
with the Information Design Tool and stored in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform
repository.

24 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 1
Exercise 1

Log on to and Navigate in the Bl Launch Pad

Business Example
Before performing any task using the SAP systems and SAP BusinessObjects servers, you
need to be able to log into the software using the correct credentials.

>
Note:
In this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number that your instructor assigned you.

1. Open SAP GUI shortcut from the Start menu to log in to the SAP BW system using the
credentials provided by the instructor.

Table 6:
Field Value

System name RWB

Client 800

Username USER## (Replace # # with your number)

Password INITIAL (Change at first log on)

2. Open and login to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl Launch Pad.

3. Ensure that the Home tab is set as the Bl Launch Pad start page.

4. Set the following columns to display in the Documents tab: Type, Last Run, Instances,
Created By, Received (Inbox), and From (Inbox).

5. Open the Sales Analysis Sample document and view the report.

6. Create a shortcut in your Favorites for the World Sales Report.

7. Log off the Bl Launch Pad by choosing Log Off.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 25

SAR.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 1
Solution 1

Log on to and Navigate in the Bl Launch Pad

Business Example
Before performing any task using the SAP systems and SAP BusinessObjects servers, you
need to be able to log into the software using the correct credentials.

Note:
In this exercise, when the values include ##, replace the characters with the
number that your instructor assigned you.

1. Open SAP GUI shortcut from the Start menu to log in to the SAP BW system using the
credentials provided by the instructor.

Table 6:
Field Value

System name RWB

Client 800

Username USER## (Replace # # with your number)

Password INITIAL (Change at first log on)

a) Choose Start and then choose the SAP GUI icon.

b) Double-click RWB and enter the information from the table.

c) Choose OK.

d) Change your password.

2. Open and login to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl Launch Pad.

a) Choose Start —»Bl Launchpad —><your assigned server> Shortcut.

b) Enter the credentials provided by your instructor and choose Log On. Make sure that
SAP Authentication is selected.

3. Ensure that the Home tab is set as the Bl Launch Pad start page.
a) Choose Preferences —>General.

b) Ensure that the Use Default Settings checkbox is deselected.

c) Under the heading Set Bl Launch Pad start page, ensure that the Home tab and the
default Home tab radio buttons are selected.

26 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

d) Choose Save and close the screen.

4. Set the following columns to display in the Documents tab: Type, Last Run, Instances,
Created By, Received (Inbox), and From (Inbox).
a) Choose Preferences —>General.

b) Under the heading Choose Columns to Display on the Documents tab , select:

■ Type

• Last Run

. Instances

• Created By

• Received On (Inbox)

. From (Inbox)

c) Choose Save and close the screen.

5. Open the Sales Analysis Sample document and view the report.
a) Choose Documents —>Folders.
The Public Folders display.

b) Navigate to the Web Intelligence Samples folder and choose Sales Analysis Sample.

c) From the context menu choose VIEW to open the document.

d) Click on the Refresh icon on the top toolbar to refresh the document.

e) Close the Sales Analysis Sample document.

6. Create a shortcut in your Favorites for the World Sales Report.

a) On the Documents tab, choose Folders —►Public Folders —►Web Intelligence Samples.

b) From the context menu of the Sales Analysis Sample, choose Organize —*• Create
Shortcut In My Favorites.

c) On the Documents tab, choose My Documents —* My Favorites to verify that the

shortcut has been created.

7. Log off the Bl Launch Pad by choosing Log Off.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 27

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

Data Connectivity
There are two different ways how to access SAP BW Data with SAP BusinessObjects Bl front
end tools:

• Direct dimensional access to your BEx Queries (BIOS)

- No need to create a Universe

- Support of hierarchies and dimensional metadata

• Relational Universe (multi-source) accessing SAP NetWeaver BW

- Authored with the information design tool

- Create a data foundation and a business layer based on multiple SQL connections

- Create multi-source joins and derived tables

- Federate different database vendors, OLTP and DWH, SAP BW, SAS, flat files

There are advantages and disadvantages to both approaches.

Advantages and Disadvantages of Data Connectivity Approaches

The advantages of a direct BICS connection are as follows:

• Re-uses existing BEx queries

• Connectivity is shared across all Bl client tools

• Provides hierarchical metadata

• One connection can point to multiple BEx queries

• Allows connection to ERP via Transient Provider (ECC 6 EhP05)

28 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Support for BEx query elements, such as structures, variables, restricted and calculated
key figures

The disadvantages of a direct BICS connection are as follows:

• No customization of objects is possible

• No option to create your own objects outside the BEx query

• No connection limits, such as a time-out after a given period, are possible

• No manual input for prompting based on SAP variables

• All prompts based on variables are configured with 'delegated search'

The advantages of a multi-source universe are as follows:

• Direct link to Infoprovider level

• Allows multiple sources to be combined in a single connection

• Allows object customization

• Allows you to create your own objects and calculation

The disadvantages of a multi-source universe are as follows:

• No support for external BW hierarchies

• No support for restricted key figures

• No support for calculated key figures

• No support for SAP variables

• No support for structure

You should use a direct BICS connection when you have invested in cube and query design
and elements such as hierarchies, variables or calculated/restricted key figures.
You should use the relational Universe option when you want to combine SAP BW with other
sources (SAP or non-SAP) and elements such as hierarchies are not required, or when you
want to access DSO (fine-grained reporting).
For a complete list of supported and unsupported BW elements, please refer to SAP Note
1869560. Supported and unsupported BEx query elements will be addressed individually in
the section for each reporting tool.

Recommended Bl Tools for SAP BW Customers

Table 7: Data Access Matrix

This table shows BW data access by client.

SAP BW Access

Data Universe Mashup Ac- Access Mashup SA Essbase,

Prep Access Flat- cess BW Data Hierarchi- P MS Anal-
ara- tened Flat- Hierarchi- cal BW HA- ysis
tion BW Data ten- cally Data us- NA Services,
with Oth- ed ing BW Oracle
er Data BW Workspa- OLAP
Data ces

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 29

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

SAP BW Access

SAP
Lumi-
ra Desktop Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
SAP Browser Yes View on- Yes Yes
Lumi- iy
ra
Server
Analy- Excel Yes Yes Yes Yes
sis Of- and (Essbase
fice Power- and
Point MSAS)
Add-In
Design Desktop Yes Yes Yes
Studio and
Browser

Office Integration

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Office

For Financial Analysts and other business users
Microsoft Office addin enables financial professionals and other business users to
rapidly access, visualize, and analyze hierarchical data within Excel and
PowerPoint.

Data Discovery Applications & Dashboards Reporting

Distribute Formatted
Discover, Analyze and Share Build Engaging Experiences
information
SAP Lumira SAP BusinessObjects SAP BusinessObjects Web
For Business Analysts and Design Studio Intelligence
other business users For business users, power SAP Crystal Reports
Mashup relational data, users and IT professionals • Securely distribute
rapidly create Create sophisticated, information across your
visualizations and build dynamic analytic organization
applications like planning Answer new questions
simple storyboards
front ends.
with predefined interactive
• Use the included
reports
templates to rapidly deploy
Publish high volumes of
self service analytics
personalized reports via
email

Figure 15: General Product Recommendations

Analysis and Design Studio

There are three front-end tools which are recommended for SAP BW customers:

• SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for MS Office -Excel-based OLAP analysis and live
PowerPoint presentations

• SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP - Web-based OLAP analysis

30 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• SAP Design Studio - creation of purpose-built OLAP-analysis and planning apps

Analytical Applications Ad Hoc OLAP

O
T>
3 It mm* mimi
+*
V) Design Studio Analysis, Edition for OLAP
E Premium Alternative to BEx Web • Dedicated ad hoc OLAP client for
U) App Designer business users to analyze OLAP
'</> -Q Design Studio for power users to data and share it with others
a>
a t create purpose-built OLAP
analysis & planning apps
• Enabled for 3rd party OLAP
• Seamless interoperability
O6
V)
Customer- and SAP-delivered between designer and ad hoc
*■> content client
c
a> Mobile support HANA support
HANA support
o
(/) 9) Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office
’(/> 0 • IT / Developers, Data Analysts, Business Users
>
OJ 1 • Excel-based OLAP analysis
• Excel-based Bl applications
W
• Live PowerPoint presentations
• HANA support
Figure 16:1. Analysis and Design Studio

Best Practices for BEx Query Design

• BEx queries are recommended as data sources for all SAP BusinessObjects Bl products.

• BEx queries offer significant functionality to create customized data sources that meet
end-user requirements, such as Calculated Key figures, Restricted Key figures and SAP
Variables.

• Focus implementation strategy on limiting the number of Bl queries by sharing common

elements.

• The Bl Client tool and report definitions are the primary influencing factors on how much
data is being retrieved from SAP NetWeaver BW.•

• In some situations extremely large queries and universes can adversely affect
performances.

Remember that because there is no universe on top of a BEx query, the query must contain:

• All changes to descriptions.

• All variables/prompts.

• All necessary calculations.

SAP Authentication
SAP authentication enables SAP users to log on to the Bl platform using their SAP user
names and passwords, without storing passwords in the Bl platform. SAP authentication also
allows you to preserve information about user roles in SAP and to use role information in the
platform to assign rights for performing administrative tasks or accessing content.
Accessing the SAP Authentication Application
Accessing the SAP authentication application You must provide the Bl platform with
information about your SAP system. A dedicated web application is accessible through the

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 31

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

main Bl platform administration tool, the Central Management Console (CMC). To access it
from the home page of the CMC, choose Authentication .

E n title m e n t S yste m s

Entitlement Systems Role Import SNC Settings Options User Update

Logical system name RWBCLNT800

System [r w B Client |soo

Disabled I-

Load b a la n cin g A p p ic a tio n h o s t

Message Server | Application Server |wdflbmt2281

Logon Group | System Number |40

User name |user27

Password ! • • • • • • • •

Language [en

New | Deletel Update |

Figure 17: SAP Authentication

Authenticating SAP Users

Security plug-ins expand and customize the ways in which the Bl platform authenticates
users. The SAP Authentication feature includes an SAP security plug-in (secSAPR3.dll) for
the Central Management Server (CMS) component of the Bl platform.
This SAP security plug-in offers several key benefits:

• It acts as an authentication provider that verifies user credentials against your SAP system
on behalf of the CMS. When users log on to the Bl platform directly, they can choose SAP
Authentication and provide their usual SAP user name and password. The Bl platform can
also validate Enterprise Portal logon tickets against SAP systems.

• It facilitates account creation by allowing you to map roles from SAP to Bl platform user
groups, and it facilitates account management by allowing you to assign rights to users
and groups in a consistent manner within the Bl platform.

• It dynamically maintains SAP role listings. So, once you map an SAP role to the platform,
all users who belong to that role can log on to the system. When you make subsequent
changes to the SAP role membership, you need not update or refresh the listing in the Bl
platform.•

• The SAP Authentication component includes a web application for configuring the plug-in.
You can access this application in the "Authentication" area of the Central Management
Console (CMC).

BW Publisher
The BW Publisher allows you to publish Crystal Reports (.rpt files) individually or in batches
from BW to the Bl platform.

32 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

3 Apache Tomcat for BI4 1.0.10.0 Running

9 1 - A ' J M. l . 2.1121 § Starting Mar*
3 Server Intelfcgence Agent (wdflbmt2065) 1.0.10.0 ^R u nn in g Mar*
3 World Wide Web Publishing Service 6.1.7600.16385 j4 Running Prov

/V Figure 18: BW Publisher

On Windows, you can configure the BW Publisher in one of two ways:

• Start the BW Publisher using a service on a machine hosting the Bl platform. The BW
Publisher service will start instances of the BW Publisher as required.

• Start the BW Publisher using a local SAP Gateway to create BW Publisher instances.

You must select the configuration method based on the requirements of your site, after
considering the advantages and disadvantages of each configuration. Once you have
configured the BW Publisher in the Bl platform, you must configure publishing in the Content
Administration Workbench.

Content Administration Workbench

C on ten t A dm in istratio n W orkbench

Operations Content
- |CJ Enterprise system
• □ Add new system
► CD Available systems
- CDPublish reports
• Select reports and roles to pubksh
• 9 Delete pubUshfig jobs
► CDSAP system settngs
• CDScheduled jobs
* CDReport mantenance
• Update status
• Delete reports
• Post-miration

Figure 19: The Content Administration Workbench

The Content Administration Workbench is used to administer report publishing functionality

from within SAP BW. You can identify roles from the SAP BW system with particular Bl
platform systems, publish reports, and synchronize reports between SAP BW and a Bl
platform deployment. Once you have set up SAP authentication, and have configured the BW
Publisher, you can enable publishing.

With publishing enabled, you:

• Set appropriate authorizations for different users of the Content Administration

Workbench.

• Set up connections to the Bl platform where content is published.

• Define which roles can publish to each Bl platform.

• Publish content from BW to the Bl platform.

There are three types of users who may access the Content Administration Workbench:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 33

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

• Content consumers, who belong to content-bearing roles and who can view reports. They
do not have authorization to do anything other than view reports.

• Bl platform content publishers, who can view, publish, modify, and (optionally) delete
reports from BW.

• Bl platform administrators, who are able to perform all tasks within Content
Administration Workbench. These tasks include defining Bl platform systems, publishing
reports, and performing report maintenance.

SAP NetWeaver Portal - Knowledge Management

Using SAP NetWeaver Portal, organizations can give their employees, customers, partners,
and suppliers a single point of access to the company applications, services, and information
needed for conducting daily work.
In addition, the portal offers business users the capability to easily create and manage portal
pages and to generate their own portal content.

SAP NetWeaver Portal - iView Templates and Sample iViews

For portal users, a portal desktop defines the structural layout and the design of the portal
workspace that is displayed on the screen. It is a structured collection of iViews, pages,
themes, and layouts, which can be personalized at runtime.

Figure 20: The SAP NetWeaver Portal desktop

34 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Describing SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

A portal theme defines the overall look-and-feel of user interface elements in a portal desktop,
such as color, contrast, and font usage.
A portal desktop may contain more than one portal theme. The administrator responsible for
configuring the portal desktop object sets the default portal theme.
The System Landscape Directory
The System Landscape Overview can be found by navigating to System
Administration —>System Configuration .
It has two primary purposes:

• Displaying all the systems comprising the system landscape.

• Associating systems with system aliases to provide back-end connectivity.

The System Landscape Overview also provides alternative access to the system editors and
utilities that are available from the Portal Catalog context menu.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 35

Unit 1: Overview of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x and SAP NetWeaver

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Describe user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the management tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the Bl client tools in SAP BusinessObjects 4.x

• Describe the components for integration with SAP NetWeaver BW

36 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 1

Learning Assessment

1. Which tool is part of the SAP BusinessObjects management suite?

Choose the correct answer.

□ A Central Management Console

□ B Information Design Tool

□ C Adaptive Processing Server

□ D Central Management Server

2. Which client tool is best for creating pixel-perfect reporting?

Choose the correct answer.

□ A Web Intelligence

□ B Design Studio

□ C Crystal Reports

□ D Explorer

3. What functionality does CTS+ provide?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Control delivery of software

B Transport objects created by different developers in one transport

I C Provide version control for development objects

D Provide change control logs of development objects

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 37

SAB4
0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 1

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Which tool is part of the SAP BusinessObjects management suite?

Choose the correct answer.

|~X~| A Central Management Console

B Information Design Tool

C Adaptive Processing Server

D Central Management Server

2. Which client tool is best for creating pixel-perfect reporting?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Web Intelligence

B Design Studio

|~X~| C Crystal Reports

D Expl orer

3. What functionality does CTS+ provide?

Choose the correct answer.

□ A Control delivery of software

a B Transport objects created by different developers in one transport

□ C Provide version control for development objects

□ D Provide change control logs of development objects

38 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 2 Semantic Layer in SAP

BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and
Data Connectivity

Lesson 1
Describing Semantic Layer Technology 40

Lesson 2
Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool 41
Exercise 2: Create a Connection for a Relational Universe on top of SAP BW 55
Exercise 3: Create a Universe on Top of a BEx Query 53

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Explain the semantic layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x

• Create a universe with the Information Design Tool

• Create a relational data connection for SAP BW

• Create a universe on top of a BEx query

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 39

SAR4
0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 2
Lesson 1

Describing Semantic Layer Technology

LESSON OVERVIEW
Use the semantic layer technology in SAP BusinessObjects Bl to manage complex data for
business users.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain the semantic layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Explain the semantic layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x

40 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 2
Lesson 2

Creating a Universe with the Information

Design Tool

LESSON OVERVIEW
Use the Information Design Tool to extract metadata from data sources. Create an accessible
universe with the metadata for your business users.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a universe with the Information Design Tool

• Create a relational data connection for SAP BW

• Create a universe on top of a BEx query

Information Design Tool

Note:
This course will cover Information Design Tool in the context of SAP BW only. The
course, BOIDIO, covers comprehensive training for Information Design Tool.

The Information Design Tool is an SAP BusinessObjects metadata design environment that
enables a designer to extract, define, and manipulate metadata from relational and Online
Analytical Processing (OLAP) sources to create and deploy SAP BusinessObjects universes.
The role of the universe is to provide the business user with semantically understandable
business objects. The user is free to analyze data and create reports using relevant business
language regardless of the underlying data sources and structures. A universe is an organized
collection of metadata objects that enables business users to analyze and report on corporate
data. These objects include dimensions, measures, hierarchies, attributes, predefined
calculations, functions, and queries.
The metadata object layer, called the business layer, is built on a relational database schema
or an OLAP cube, so the objects map directly to the database structures via Structured Query
Language (SQL) or Multidimensional Expressions (MDX) expressions. A universe includes
connections that identify the data sources. Universes created with the information design tool
can be used by the following SAP BusinessObjects data analysis and reporting applications,
among others:

• SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

• SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

• SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

• SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 4-1

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

The metadata modeling for Business Intelligence (Bl) 4.x universes is a task that will typically
be assigned to a user with enough technical skills in information design tool and knowledge
about the respective data sources. This can include database administrators, application
managers, developers, or report creators. However, the information design tool is not
intended as a design environment for typical business users. Connections or universes are
provided for this user group by the information design tool users.

The Information Design Tool Resources

Table 8: The Information Design Tool

The information design tool provides the following resources that a designer uses to extract
metadata from relational or OLAP data sources and uses to build a business layer of objects
targeted to a specific user group:_______________________________________________
Resource Description

Project A project is a named local workspace. A

project contains one or more resources that
are used to build one or more universes. A
project can be shared so that multiple de
signers can work on the same resources.
Connection A connection defines how a universe can ac
cess a relational or OLAP data source. A uni
verse is always associated with at least one
connection.
Data foundation A data foundation is a schema that defines
the relevant tables and joins from one or
more relational data sources. The designer
can enhance the data foundation with con
texts, prompts, calculated columns, and oth
er SQL definitions. The data foundation be
comes the basis of one or more business lay
ers.
Business layer A business layer is a collection of metadata
objects that map to SQL or MDX definitions
in a data source. Definitions include columns,
views, or database functions. The metadata
objects include dimensions, hierarchies,
measures, attributes, and predefined condi
tions. To return data, each object corre
sponds to a unit of business information that
can be manipulated in a query. Business lay
ers can be created directly on an OLAP cube,
or on a data foundation that is built on a rela
tional database. You can build any number of
business layers on the same data foundation.
In this case, the data foundation becomes
the basis for multiple universes.
Query A query is a set of objects that define a re
quest to the data source. A query can only be
used to test objects in the business layer.

42 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

Resource Description

Parameters and lists of values A parameter is a variable in the universe that

requires a value in a query. Parameters are
often defined to prompt the user to supply a
value; in this case, they are referred to as
prompts. A list of values is a collection of da
ta values that can be associated with an ob
ject in the universe, allowing the user to
choose values for a prompt. Parameters and
lists of values can be defined in the data
foundation. They are inherited by all business
layers based on that data foundation. Param
eters and lists of values can also be defined in
the business layer.
Universe A universe is an object that includes all re
sources used in the definition of the metada
ta objects built in the design of the business
layer.

Components of an SAP BusinessObjects Bl Suite Universe

In the information design tool, which is installed as a local client tool, the designer first has to
create a new project. Within this project, a connection to a data source is defined. For
relational data sources, a data foundation is created based on this connection. For OLAP data
sources, a data foundation is not necessary. The business layer provides the metadata
objects (dimension and measure objects, etc.) that will be used by business users in the
reporting tools. These resources are part of a universe that can be published and made
available via SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform

Projects
To create resources in the information design tool, the first step is to create a local project in
the local projects view. You create and edit all resources (except secured connections and

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 43

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

security profiles) in a local project. The resources and folders in a local project are stored as
physical files and folders in the local file system.

Local Project Population

Create resources using the wizards available in File —> N ew.

Convert an SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform (.unv) universe that was created using the
universe design tool.

Retrieve a published universe from SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform or from a local folder.

Figure 22: Local Projects in the Information Design Tool

Making changes to a resource, such as deleting it from a local project, moving it to another
local project, or updating it, may impact other resources that depend on it. For example,
deleting a connection has an impact on a data foundation or business layer that is built on top
of it. Before you delete or move a resource, you are warned of the impact. To view local
dependencies, in the context menu of a resource, choose Show Local Dependencies . For
shared projects that have been saved in SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform, in the context
menu of the resource, choose Show Repository Dependencies .

Shared Projects
When you work with multiple users on one project, for example, if you create different
business layers with sales data in your project, you can create a shared project.
You can save shared projects in a repository and make them available to other designers by
synchronizing resources between local and shared projects.

Synchronization View for Shared Projects

Project Synchronization View Panels

• The Shared Project panel lists the resources in the shared project on the server. If a
resource is locked, a lock icon appears next to it.

44 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

The Shared Project panel also provides information about the resources, such as the user
who last modified the resource, and on what date, and the user who locked the resource,
and on what date.

• The Synchronization Status panel lists the status of each resource. The status is
determined by comparing the resources in the local and shared projects. The
Synchronization Status panel provides information about whether resources have been
added, changed, or deleted and not yet synchronized.
The status can be set to Conflicting if there are inconsistencies, for example, if a resource
was unlocked and has been changed locally and at the same time deleted on the server by
someone else.

Si ,______________________________________________________________________________________________________ ° P
' Select Project
S e *w ^ 0 0 Sfcarod Project: (sotoD oU 3 S* X

Bet Changes Save Changes Revert Lock Resource

from Server to Server Changes

Figure 23: Synchronization View for Shared Projects

Connections

Data Management
Layer
BAP I
BICS*
x SQL _______
o o
CO

&
4. . 1 SAP NetWeaver BW

Non-SAP OLAP Relational Source

SAP HANA
*For direct access without a universe
Figure 24: Connectivity with Universe Design Tool and the Information Design Tool

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 45

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

A connection is a named set of parameters that define how one or more SAP BusinessObjects
applications can access relational or OLAP data sources. The connection is represented by a
local file, or an object in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository that is referenced by
a local shortcut in the information design tool. Note that you cannot use SAP NetWeaver BW
BIOS connections as a source for business layers. This kind of connection cannot be part of a
universe. It is only intended to provide direct access to SAP Business Explorer queries in SAP
NetWeaver BW.
All connections created in the local project are called local connections (.cnx files) before
being published to a repository. Local connections have limited or no security as they can be
used by any user with access to the machine running the information design tool. They are
primarily used in the authoring phase of data foundation and business layer development.
To publish a connection to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository, in the context
menu of the connection, choose Publish connection to a repository. After the connection has
been published, in the local project, a local shortcut (.cns file) is created for the connection.
You can use the shortcut in the same way as a local connection, but the target connection is
secured and subject to security restraints in the repository. The connection shortcut is
available locally, but editing a published connection can only be done with the appropriate
repository system authorization.

Data Foundations

Figure 25: Data Foundation on a Relational Data Source

A data foundation contains a schema of relevant tables and joins from one or more relational
databases that are used as a basis for one or more business layers. You reference relational
connections in the data foundation. You insert tables and joins from the databases referenced
in the connections. To enhance the data foundation, using the data foundation editor, you can
add derived tables, alias tables, calculated columns, additional joins, contexts, prompts, and
lists of values. You can build any number of business layers on the same data foundation. In
this case, the data foundation becomes the basis for multiple universes.

Data Foundation Types

Single-source

46 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

• Multisource

As the name implies, single-source data foundations support only one connection and can be
published locally or in the repository. Single-source data foundations support database-
specific SQL syntax for derived tables, calculated columns, and join expressions. They are
recommended for the following situations:

• You want to work exclusively with database-specific SQL syntax.

• You want to publish the universe locally and work outside of a repository.

Once the data foundation is created, use the data foundation editor to insert the necessary
tables and joins from the database referenced in the connection. Use the Insert Tables
command to insert several tables at one time and ask for keys, joins, cardinalities, and row
counts to be detected and inserted automatically. Tables and joins can also be inserted and
edited manually.

Multisource Data Foundation on an SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube

- [3 |______________________________________________________________________________________________° P |
Data foundation Matter

Figure 26: Multisource Data Foundation on an SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube

Multisource data foundations support one or more connections. You can add connections
when you create the data foundation and any time after that. Multisource-enabled data
foundations only support secured connections. Multisource data foundations are always
created in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository. Universes with this kind of data
foundation can only be published to the repository. Multisource data foundations support
connections to SAP NetWeaver BW and Statistical Analysis System (SAS), so a relational
connection can be created on the fact tables and the related master data tables of an
InfoCube. Multisource-enabled data foundations are required in the following situations:

• You want to insert tables and joins from more than one relational data source.

• You want to use SAP NetWeaver BW connections.

• You want to use SQL-92 standard syntax and SAP BusinessObjects SQL functions.

A multisource join can be created between tables from different connections. As in single
source data foundations, you can let the information design tool detect joins between tables

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 47

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

automatically, or explicitly define them manually. For SAP NetWeaver BW connections, tables
and joins are inserted automatically and a large amount of tables can be involved in the
database schema of an SAP BW InfoCube.

Business Layers
Business layers can be created on single-source or multisource data foundations using a
relational database connection and can be built directly on OLAP connections, such as
Microsoft Analysis Services, without a data foundation. The principle role of the business
layer is to define and organize metadata before it is published as a universe. In the business
layer, you define the dimension objects and attributes representing master data, measures,
and filters. The user who opens the universe in one of the SAP BusinessObjects tools, then
only sees the objects that have been created in the business layer and does not have to deal
with the complex structure of the data source.

Business Layer Objects: Examples

Dimensions (for example, Customer)

Measures (for example, Sales Volume)

Filters (for example, Customers in Europe)

The objects in the business layer can also be renamed as familiar business terms; for
example, a database field Amount sold could be renamed to Sales Volume. You can also
select certain table fields from the data foundation that are relevant to this universe and leave
others out.

Figure 27: Business Layer on a Database Foundation with a Relational Data Source

Query Panel in the Information Design Tool

Use the Query Panel to build, test, and preview queries. You insert result objects into the
Result Objects pane. Users of SAP Crystal Reports, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, or
SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards will have a similar view of the Query Panel. The result
objects are shown in the executed query. You can add filter objects to filter the returned
results by criteria such as a date range, results greater than a given value, and selected

48 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

ranges. You can preview the results to verify that the query returns the expected results and
you can also view the query syntax that forms the query.

EQuery Panel E
IT ^ J |1 3 | Pl View s ir** |

Universe: Sales Business Layer Rel... 0 j Result Objects for Query #1

„ ®* 0 t * X $1
S li_j Sales Data
Article No. j «• Sales Volume
©•{l j Shop Facts

Query Filters for Query #1

* X RS 59

Data Preview

Max rows: | 200 • | : $ Refresh

Figure 28: Query Panel in the Information Design Tool

SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform

Publishing is the last step in the universe creation process. When business layers have been
published locally or into SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform, they are represented by a universe
(.unx) file and are available for all users with necessary user rights.

Publishing Universes

Locally
This can only be done with business layers that use local connections. If the connection is
published to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository, the universe is also
published there.

To a repository
A universe that has been published to SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform; data and
metadata of the universe are secured by the security profiles that have been assigned in
the security editor of the information design tool. It is not possible to publish a universe to
SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform if the connection is local. All resources of a business
layer have to be either local or published and secured in the repository.

To edit universes, you always have to retrieve them from the repository and open the
respective resources in information design tool. After editing, the resources are published
again to be available for users.

Direct Access to SAP NetWeaver BW Using Business Intelligence Consumer

Services (BICS)
Within the Information Design Tool, you can use the following options to access SAP BW data:

• Create relational connections on the tables of an InfoProvider and use these connections
in multi-source data foundations and business layers.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 49

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

• Use direct BICS (Bl Consumer Service) access without having to create a universe

• Use a universe built on an SAP BEX query, also known as BEX Universe

A general recommendation is to use the direct access with BICS on a Business Explorer
query. The advantage here is that no universe has to be created and maintained and that all
elements of the Business Explorer query can be used to prepare data for the needs of
reporting users. Examples of query elements are filters, restricted key figures, calculated key
figures, variables, and hierarchies.
If you use relational connections on an InfoProvider, these elements are not available.

Table 9: Workarounds for Unavailable Elements

The following table provides some workarounds:

Business Explorer query feature Relational Universe workaround

Calculated key figures, restricted key figures, Use SQL expressions in measure definition in
formulas the Universe.
BW variables Define prompts in dimension definition in the
Universe. There are limitations, for example,
for exit variables.
Filters Create filters in dimension definition in the
Universe.
Hierarchies No workaround available.

• For information on the authorizations needed to allow users of query and

reporting applications to access multisource-enabled universes on SAP BW,
see SAP Note #1465871.

• Relational connections to SAP BW are managed by the data federation service.

For information about optimizing queries, see the Data Federation
Administration Tool Guide.

• To see the InfoProviders supported for relational connections to SAP BW, see
the Data Access for the Semantic Layer section of the SAP Business Objects Bl
Platform 4.1 Supported Platforms (PAM) at h ttp :// service.sap.com/pam.

Relational Access to SAP BW

A use case for relational connections on SAP BW is when you want to combine several data
sources, one of which is SAP NetWeaver BW. Here it is useful to create multi-source
universes. Be aware that when you use an InfoCube in a relational data foundation it can easily
get confusing. An InfoCube can have a fact table, up to 16 dimension tables and each
dimension can contain up to 248 characteristics which are connected with master data
tables.
When you add an SAP BW connection to a multisource-enabled data foundation, tables and
joins are automatically inserted.

50 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

When using BW as a data source, the multisource universe will:

• Based on the InfoProvider specified in the SAP BW connection parameters, insert the fact
table and its related master data and text tables.

• Create families for each type of table:

Prefix the fact table name by the letter I (InfoCube) and assign it to family "InfoProvider
Fact Table” .

Prefix master data tables by the letter D (Dimension) and assign them to family
“ Dimension Table” .

Prefix text tables by the letter T (Text) and assign them to family “Text Table” .

The automatic insertion helps you to create all necessary joins for the tables of the InfoCube.
However, you can turn off automatic detection when you are adding a connection to a multi
source universe - for example, if you want to use only a few tables of the InfoProvider and join
them with another data source.

InfoProvider Objects Mapping in a Universe

When you add an SAP BW connection to a data foundation, by default tables and joins are
automatically inserted. When you create a business layer on the data foundation, by default
objects are automatically inserted into the business layer.
The following table describes how the objects in an InfoProvider map to the objects that are
automatically inserted into the data foundation and business layer in the information design
tool. The naming convention for the automatically generated data foundation tables are as
follows:

• 1-Table: A table with a name prefixed by I (InfoCube) that maps to the InfoProvider fact
table.

• D-Table: A table with a name prefixed by D (Dimension) that maps to an InfoProvider

master data table.

• T-Table: A table with a name prefixed by T (Text) that maps to an InfoProvider text table.

InfoProvider Object Data Foundation Business Layer

Fact table • Inserts an 1-Table mapped

to the fact table.

• Inserts D-Tables mapped

to each master data table.

• Inserts T-Tables mapped

to each text table.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 51

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

InfoProvider Object Data Foundation Business Layer

□ Inserts a folder in the busi

Dimension
ness layer for each InfoPro
vider dimension (except for
the Data Package and Unit di
mensions).
Business layer objects for the
characteristics in the Unit di
mension are inserted into the
folder for the related key fig
ure. The Data Package di
mension is not mapped.

Inserts a column in the data

Characteristic Inserts a dimension ob
foundation fact table that
maps to the master data val ject in the dimension folder
ue. associated with the 1-Table
column.

A characteristic of data type

^ Inserts attribute objects
DATS or TIMS has no associ
ated text table because date under the dimension for each
and time characteristics do column in the T-Table.
not have descriptions.

If a characteristic contains at □ Inserts a folder under the

Display attribute*
least one display attribute, in dimension named for the pa
serts an alias of the D-Table. rent characteristic.
Inserts a column in this table
mapped to the display attrib Inserts dimension ob
ute. The D-Table contains a
jects in this folder for each
column for each display at
column in the D-Table.
tribute of the characteristic.

Inserts an alias of the T-Table

£ Inserts attribute objects
for each display attribute.
under the dimension object
for each column in the T-Ta
ble.

52 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

InfoProvider Object Data Foundation Business Layer

Inserts a column in the l-Ta-

Navigation attribute* Inserts a dimension ob
ble and a column in the D-ta-
ble mapped to the navigation ject in the dimension folder
attribute. associated with the 1-Table
column.
T-Tables are linked directly to
1-Table for both the parent The dimension object for the
characteristic and its naviga navigation attribute is at the
tion attributes. same level as the dimension
for the parent characteristic
but not necessarily adjacent.

Hint:
Filters on the
object for the
navigation at
tribute are
more efficient
than filters on
the display at
tribute object.
When filtering a
navigation at
tribute, the fact
table is filtered
directly.

Inserts a column in the l-Ta-

Key figure j^""| For a key figure without
ble with the technical name of
the key figure. unit or currency, inserts a
measure in the Measures
folder.
Q For a key figure with unit or
currency, inserts a sub-folder
in the Measures folder.

Inserts a measure in the

sub-folder for the key figure.

Inserts a dimension in
the sub-folder for each unit or
currency characteristic.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 53

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

InfoProvider Object Data Foundation Business Layer

Time-dependent data If the InfoProvider contains The business layer inherits

time-dependent data, creates the key date parameter.
input columns in the appro
priate data foundation tables
to handle time-dependent da
ta.
Creates a parameter in the
data foundation called key
date for each input column.
By default, at query time, the
key date parameter is not
prompted. It is automatically
assigned the current date.
You can change this behavior
by editing the key date pa
rameter. For more informa
tion on input columns and ed
iting parameters, see the re
lated topics.

Note:
* If the flag Attribute only is checked for a display or navigation attribute in the
InfoProvider, it is not exposed in the data foundation.

54 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 2
Exercise 2

Create a Connection for a Relational Universe

on top of SAP BW

Business Example
In your organization you want to make all data sources - OLAP or relational - available for
reporting in the semantic layer that can be used by all SAP BusinessObjects reporting tools.

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Create a new project called u##_BW_Universe.

2. Create a new session, using the information in the following table:

Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

User user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

3. Create a new relational connection to SAP BW using the SAP Java Connector (SAP JCo).
Use the information in the following table to provide parameters for the SAP connection:
Field Name Value

Client Number 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Language EN

System ID RWB

Application Server <your assigned application serv-

er>

System Number 40

InfoProvider IP_CUSTOM

4. Create a new data foundation and create tables and joins automatically. Enter
u## b w d a t a f o u n d a t i o n as the Resource Name.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 55

SAR4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

5. Create a new business layer called u##_BW_Business_Layer and create folders and
objects automatically.

6. Update the necessary object types and ensure that the characteristic descriptions are
available as dimensions.

7. Publish the new business layer.

56 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 2
Solution 2

Create a Connection for a Relational Universe

on top of SAP BW

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Create a new project called u##_BW_Universe.

a) Start the Information Design Tool by following the menu Start —*■Information Design
Tool.

b) Select the menu File —*■New —>Project to create a new project for your universe.

c) Enter u##_BW_Universe as the name the new project and choose Finish.

2. Create a new session, using the information in the following table:

Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

User user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Select your new project in the Local Projects window.

b) Ensure that the Repository Resources window is visible. If it is not, choose Window
—>Repository Resources .

c) Choose Insert Session from the Insert menu.

d) In the Open Session dialog box that appears, use the information in the table above to
log on.

3. Create a new relational connection to SAP BW using the SAP Java Connector (SAP JCo).
Use the information in the following table to provide parameters for the SAP connection:
Field Name Value

Client Number 800

User Name user##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 57

SAB.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

Field Name Value

Password <your password>

Language EN

System ID RWB

Application Server <your assigned application serv-

er>

System Number 40

InfoProvider IP_CUSTOM

a) Expand server Connections node for your assigned server in the Repository Resources
window.

b) From the context menu of the Connections node choose Insert Relational Connection.

c) In the Resource Name field of the New Relational Connection enter

U##_BW_Universe.

d) Choose Next.

e) Select SAP —>SAP BW —►SAP Java Connector (SAP JCo).

f) Choose Next.

g) Use the information in the table above to provide parameters for the SAP BW
connection.

h) Choose Finish.

i) When you are asked if you would like to create a shortcut for your connection, choose
Yes.

j) Select your project, u##_BW_Universe.

k) Choose OK.

4. Create a new data foundation and create tables and joins automatically. Enter
u # #_b w _ d a t a _ f o u n d a t io n as the Resource Name.
a) Choose File —►New —>Data Foundation.

b) Enter u ##_b w _ d a t a _ f o u n d a t i o n as the Resource Name.

c) Choose Next.

d) Select the Multi-Source-Enabled radio button.

Note:
The connection to SAP NetWeaver BW is not available using the Single
Source option.

e) You will be asked to logon to your SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise system. Your
credentials should already be entered.

58 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

f) Choose Next.

g) Select your project, U##_BW_Universe.

h) Choose Next.

i) Select the shortcut which was created earlier, U##_BW_Universe.cns.

j) Choose Advanced.

k) Ensure that the Automatically create tables and joins (recommended) checkbox is
selected.

l) Choose Finish.
You are presented with a default generated star schema for the selected InfoProvider.

5. Create a new business layer called u##_BW_Business_Layer and create folders and
objects automatically.
a) Choose File —>New —>Business Layer.

b) Choose Relational Data Foundation.

c) Choose Next.

d) Choose U##_BW_Universe.

e) Choose Next.

f) Enter u##_BW_Business_Layer as name for the business layer.

g) Choose N ext.

h) Select BW_Data_Foundation.

i) Ensure the option Automatically create folders and objects for SAP NetWeaver BW
connections (recommended) option is activated.

j) Choose Finish.

6. Update the necessary object types and ensure that the characteristic descriptions are
available as dimensions.
a) On the U##_BW_Business_Layer.blx tab, expand the
U##_BW_Business_Layer -► U##_BW_UNIVERSE -► node.

b) From the context menu of Customer —►Sold to Party —>Sold to party (Medium
description) , choose Turn into Dimension.

c) From the context menu of Customer —►Region —>Region (Short description) , choose
Turn into Dimension.

d) From the context menu of Customer —►Country —►Country (Short description) ,

choose Turn into Dimension.

e) From the context menu of Material —>Material (Medium description) , choose Turn into
Dimension.

f) From the context menu of Material —>Material Group (Short description) .choose Turn
into Dimension.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 59

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

g) From the context menu of Sales area data —>Distribution Channei(Short description) ,
choose Turn into Dimension.

h) From the context menu of Sales area data —*• Sales Organization (Long description) ,
choose Turn into Dimension.

7. Publish the new business layer.

a) In Local Projects, from the context menu of U##_BW_Business_Layer.blx, choose
Publish -^T o a Repository.

b) Select the resource.

c) Choose Next.

d) If you wish to check the universe's integrity before publishing it, select rules in the pane
on the left and choose Check Integrity.

e) Choose Next.

f) Choose a destination folder by selecting Universes —►Training.

g) Choose Finish.

h) Choose Close.

60 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

BEx Query Universe

When working with SAP BW data sources, you have the following possibilities to access your
data depending on the type of connection:

• Direct access to BEx Queries

SAP BusinessObjects query and reporting applications can use direct access to access
data in a single BEx Query. You do not need to build a universe.

• Business layers on BEx Queries

You can create a business layer directly on a BEx Query using SAP BICS Client and publish
the business layer as a universe available to Web Intelligence. Creating a universe based on
a BEx query has a major advantage over using direct access to a BEx query as you can
organize and customize the query dimensions, measures, and hierarchies in the business
layer.

• Universes on SAP BW
To build a universe on SAP BW, you must create a multisource-enabled data foundation
based on a secured relational connection to SAP BW. You then build the business layer on
this data foundation.

Authored BW Universe

• Provide access to SAP BEx queries in a user-friendly way

• Utilize the fast BICS Connector to fully leverage SAP BW performance

• Auto-generated Business Layer with ability to rename, regroup and delete objects from
SAP BEx

Authored SAP BEx Universe

• Drive easier adoption by user-friendly and meaningful objects and grouping

• Universe Security applies

• Updated SAP BEx queries require refresh to adopt changes Information Design Tool
Security option only

• SAP BEx Business Security Rules supported

• Set presentation layer for universe dimension from available presentations of a BW

Characteristic

• Set aggregation projection for measures, that is set to sum instead of delegated

• BEx Variables translated as Universe Prompts

Business layers on BEx Queries You can create a business layer directly on a BEx Query using
SAP BICS Client and publish the business layer as a universe available to Web Intelligence.
Creating a universe based on a BEx query has a major advantage over using direct access to a
BEx query as you can organize and customize the query dimensions, measures, and
hierarchies in the business layer. Although you can edit certain components of the business
layer, the data foundation is built automatically on the query and is read only.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 61

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

G2 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 2
Exercise 3

Create a Universe on Top of a BEx Query

Business Example
You want to create a business layer directly on a BEx Query using SAP BICS Client so that you
can organize and customize the query dimensions, measures, and hierarchies in the business
layer.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Open the Information Design Tool and create a new project with the file name
u ##_b e x q u e r y _ p r o j e c t in the standard project location.

2. Create a new OLAP connection called u ##_b e x q u e r y _ c o n n using the Bex Query
P_ANALYSIS_DIVISION. Use the following data:
Field Value

Authentication Mode Use specified username and password

Client 800
Username USER##
Password <your bw password>
Language English
System ID RWB
Application Server Selected
Server Name Wdflbmt2281
System Number 40

3. Create a business layer and organize the dimensions and measures.

4. Organize the measures by creating a new folder.

5. Test the Universe by creating a query in the Query section of the universe.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 63

Unit 2
Solution 3

Create a Universe on Top of a BEx Query

1. Open the Information Design Tool and create a new project with the file name
u ##_b e x q u e r y _ p r o j e c t in the standard project location.

a) Choose Start —»Information Design Tool.

b) In the Local Projects screen area, right click and select New —>Project. Name the new
project U##_BEXQUERY_PROJECT.

2. Create a new OLAP connection called u ##_b e x q u e r y _ c o n n using the Bex Query
P_ANALYSIS_DIVISION. Use the following data:
Field Value

Authentication Mode Use specified username and password

Client 800
Username USER# #
Password <your bw password>
Language English
System ID RWB
Application Server Selected
Server Name Wdflbmt2281
System Number 40

a) Right click in the Local Projects screen area and choose New —>OLAP Connection.

b) Enter u ##_b e x q u e r y _ c o n n as the name.

c) On the next window, choose SAP —>SAP BW 7.x —►SAP BICS Client.

d) Choose Next.

e) Enter the values from the corresponding table.

f) Choose Next.

64 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Universe with the Information Design Tool

g) Select Specify a cube in the connection and search for the P_ANALYSIS_DIVISION
query.

h) Select the query and choose Finish.

3. Create a business layer and organize the dimensions and measures.

a) In the Local Projects screen area, right click U##_BEXQUERY_CONN and create a
business layer by choosing an New Business Layer.

b) Choose Next.

c) In the Select an OLAP Connection window, choose Next.

d) In the Select Objects window, select All and choose Finish.

4. Organize the measures by creating a new folder.

a) Right click U##_BEXQUERY_CONN and from the context menu select New then
Folder.

b) Give it a name. Measures.

c) Drag Sales Volume and Incoming Orders into the Measures folder.

5. Test the Universe by creating a query in the Query section of the universe.
a) Click Queries then create a new query by click on the +.

b) Add Sold to Party, Material, and Sales Volume to the Result Objects for QueryUl.

c) Choose Execute.

Note:
Look at the hierarchies under Material, which can be used for testing.
Optionally, you can also hide away the attributes which should not be
available in the universe.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 65 r

Unit 2: Semantic Layer in SAP BusinessObjects Bl 4.x and Data Connectivity

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a universe with the Information Design Tool

• Create a relational data connection for SAP BW

• Create a universe on top of a BEx query

G6 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 2

Learning Assessment

1. What is one of the advantages of using the BICS connector?

Choose the correct answer.

I A Allows for object customization

B Support for BEx query elements, such as structures, variables, restricted and
calculated key figures

I C Allow you to create your own objects and calculations

D Allows multiple sources to be combined into a single connection

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 67

SAR4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 2

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. What is one of the advantages of using the BICS connector?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Allows for object customization

[X] B Support for BEx query elements, such as structures, variables, restricted and
calculated key figures

C Allow you to create your own objects and calculations

D Allows multiple sources to be combined into a single connection

68 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis,

Edition for Microsoft Office and
SAP NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW 70
Exercise 4: Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for 73
Microsoft Office and SAP BW
Exercise 5: Define a Filter Value Using VBA 81

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and
SAP BW

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 69

SAB4
0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 3
Lesson 1

Creating a Workbook with SAP

BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for
Microsoft Office and SAP BW

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson describes the way that SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft
Office, can connect to data stored in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW).
Create a Workbook to display and analyse data from SAP NetWeaver BW.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and
SAP BW

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for

Microsoft Office

Note:
This lesson covers SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office only
in the context of SAP BW. The courses BOANIO and BOAN20 cover
comprehensive training for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft
Office.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office can connect to BW, HANA and BW
Workspace sources. Please refer to the SAP Product Availability Matrix for the most up-to-
date connection information: http://service.sap.com

70 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW

Analysis

BICS
BW Application

Universe

BW-managed schema Any schema

Figure 29: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office connectivity

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office: Supported and

Unsupported SAP NetWeaver BW Elements

Table 10: SAP BW Element Support

This table summarizes SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office's support
for various SAP BW elements:
BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for
Microsoft Office (Direct Access) Support

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 71

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for

Microsoft Office (Direct Access) Support
Hierarchy Version Variables Yes
Key Date Variable Yes
Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) Yes
Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) Yes
Exceptions (from BEx Query) Yes
Exception Aggregation Yes
Zero Suppression Yes
Local Calculations (defined in BEx Query) Yes
Scaling Factor Yes
Number of Decimals Yes
Display Options for Characteristics (Key, Key Yes
& Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, Suppress) Yes
Placement of Subtotal (above or below no Yes
des)

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

72 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 3
Exercise 4

Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP
BW

Business Example
As an analyst you want to learn some features to enhance your report in Analysis, edition for
MS Office. Use the Microsoft Excel client to create some more advanced workbooks.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

2. Remove Incoming Orders Eur from the analysis.

3. Visualize your data with a pie chart.

4. Replace the row Division with Country.

5. Save your workbook on your local drive with the name u## Workbook with chart.

Enhance the Layout of a Workbook using Formulas and Adding Additional Information

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

2. Move the result table so that it starts in cell Dl.

3. Provide some additional text information. Add Data Source Name in cell A1 and 61.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 73

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

4. Add InfoProviderName in cell A2 and B 2 . This time type in the formulas manually. Check
the previous used formulas to understand the syntax, using InfoProviderName instead
of DataSourceName.

5. Add a filter element in cells A4 and B4 that allows the users to select the month they want
to see. Use the filter element to filter on all months in 2004 and 2005.

6. It makes more sense to select consecutive months as a range rather than as individual
values. Change the existing filter element in cells A4 and B4 to select a start month and
create a second filter element in cells A5 and B5 to select an end month.

7. Check your defined formulas for the start month and end month. Filter on all months in
2004 and 2005 again.

8. Save your workbook and distribute it in the Business Intelligence platform.

Create a New Workbook on a BEx Query and Work with Conditional Formatting

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

2. Add Country to the Rows area above Division.

3. Define a Conditional Formatting setting to highlight the values of Sales Volume EUR that
are greater than 1.000.000 in green.

4. Edit the Conditional Formatting setting so that it applies only to Germany and does not
include the result of the Division.

5. Save your workbook on your local drive with the name u## Workbook Conditional
Formatting.

74 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 3
Solution 4

Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP
BW

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —*■Analysis for Microsoft Excel.

b) In the Analysis ribbon, choose Insert Data Source —>Select Data Source.

c) In the Logon to SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform dialog box, choose Skip.

d) In the Select Data Source dialog box, choose RWB[SPACE].

e) Choose Next.

f) In the Logon to System RWB[SPACE] dialog box, enter the Client, User, and Password
details supplied in the table above.

g) Use the Search For field on the Search tab, to search for Analysis of Division
[P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] .

h) In the search results list, select Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

i) Choose OK.

2. Remove Incoming Orders Eur from the analysis.

a) In the Field Explorer for Analysis of Division section of the Design panel, expand the
Measures node.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 75

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

Note:
If the Design Panel is not visible, choose Display from the Design Panel tab
of the Analysis ribbon.

b) Drag the Incoming Orders Eur measure outside the Design Panel to remove it.

3. Visualize your data with a pie chart.

a) In the Analysis ribbon, choose Chart.

b) Right-click the chart and choose Change Chart Type.

c) Choose Pie on the left side of the window and choose OK.

4. Replace the row Division with Country.

a) Drag the Division dimension outside the Design Panel to remove it.

b) In the Field Explorer tor Analysis of Division drag the Country dimension from the Field
Explorer to the Rows area.

5. Save your workbook on your local drive with the name u## workbook with Chart.
a) Choose File —►Save /As.

b) Choose My Documents.

c) In the File name field, enter u## workbook with chart, where # # is your user
number.

d) Choose Save.

Enhance the Layout of a Workbook using Formulas and Adding Additional Information

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —>Analysis for Microsoft Excel.

b) In the Analysis ribbon, choose Insert Data Source —*■Select Data Source.

c) In the Logon to SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform dialog box, choose Skip.

d) In the Select Data Source dialog box, choose RWB[SPACE],

e) Choose Next.

f) In the Logon to System RWB[SPACE] dialog box, enter the Client, User, and Password
details supplied in the table above.

76 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW

g) Use the Search For field on the Search tab, to search for Analysis of Division
[P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

h) In the search results list, select Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

i) Choose OK.

2. Move the result table so that it starts in cell Dl.

a) Choose the Components tab in the Design Panel.

b) Expand the Analysis of Division node.

c) Right-click Crosstab 1 and choose Move To.

d) In the Cell field of the Move to dialog box, enter sheetl ! $D$l.

e) Choose OK.

3. Provide some additional text information. Add Data Source Name in cell A1 and Bl.
a) Choose the Information tab in the Design Panel.

b) Data Source Name is the first entry in the Information view. Drag the information into
cell Al.
Cell A i now contains the formula: =SAPGetInfoLabel ("DataSourceName"). Cell Bl
now contains the formula: =SAPGetSourceInfo ("DS_1" ,"DataSourceName").

4. Add InfoProviderName in cell A2 and B 2 . This time type in the formulas manually. Check
the previous used formulas to understand the syntax, using InfoProviderName instead
of DataSourceName.
a) Choose cell A2 and enter the following formula:
=SAPGetInfoLabel("InfoProviderTechName").

b) Choose cell B2 and enter the following formula: =SAPGetSourceinfo ("DS_1",

"InfoProviderTechName").

5. Add a filter element in cells A4 and B4 that allows the users to select the month they want
to see. Use the filter element to filter on all months in 2004 and 2005.
a) Select cell A4 , and on the Analysis ribbon choose Filter —>Cal. year/month.
Formulas are added to cells A4 and B4. Note their syntax.

b) Select the filter icon beside cell B4.

c) Select all the months is 2004 and 2005, then choose OK.

Hint:
Speed the process up by deselecting the Select All checkbox before you
make your selections.

d) Choose the Information tab in the Design Panel. Here you can see the active filter.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 77

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

a) Remove the existing filter for 2004 and 2005 by selecting the Select All checkbox in
the existing filter element.

b) Change the text in cell A4 to start Month.

c) Select cell B4 to change the formula. You can use the Insert Function button ( fx ) and
enter l o w e r b o u n d a r y as Selection Type . Or you can edit the formula directly so it
reads as follows: =SAPSetFilterComponent ("DS_1" , "OCALMONTH", "ALL" ,
"LOWERBOUNDARY") .

d) To create the second filter element select the cells A4 and B4 and copy the content to
A5 and B5.

e) Change the text in cell A5 to read End Month.

f) Click cell B5 to change the formula. You can use the Insert Function button ( fx ) and
enter u p p e r b o u n d a r y as Selection Type . Or you can edit the formula directly so it
reads as follows: =SAPSetFilterComponent ("DS_1" , "OCALMONTH", "ALL" ,
"UPPERBOUNDARY") .

7. Check your defined formulas for the start month and end month. Filter on all months in
2004 and 2005 again.
a) Use the Filter icon next to Start Month and select 01.2004.

b) Use the Filter icon next to End Month and select 12.2005.

8. Save your workbook and distribute it in the Business Intelligence platform.

a) In the Analysis section of the File menu, choose Save Workbook —►Save workbook to
the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform.

b) If prompted, enter your password.

c) In the Save Documents dialog box, navigate to Training —>User Area —>User ##.

d) Enter u## workbook with Formulas in the Name field and choose Save.

Create a New Workbook on a BEx Query and Work with Conditional Formatting

1. Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the query Analysis of
Division [P ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

Field Name

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —*■Analysis for Microsoft Excel.

b) In the Analysis ribbon, choose Insert Data Source —>Select Data Source.

c) In the Logon to SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform dialog box, choose Skip.

d) In the Select Data Source dialog box, choose RWB[SPACE].

e) Choose Next.

78 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW

f) In the Logon to System RWB[SPACE] dialog box, enter the Client, User, and Password
details supplied in the table above.

g) Use the Search For field on the Search tab, to search for Analysis of Division
[P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] .

h) In the search results list, select Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

i) Choose OK.

2. Add Country to the Rows area above Division.

a) Drag Country from the Field Explorer into the Rows area. Place it above Division.

3. Define a Conditional Formatting setting to highlight the values of Sales Volume EUR that
are greater than 1.000.000 in green.
a) On the Analysis tab, choose Conditional Formatting —>New...

b) In the Name field, enter High Sales Volume Germany.

c) In the Based On drop-list, select Sales Volume EUR.

d) In the Format drop-down list, choose Value.

e) On the Definition tab, choose a green color, select Greater Than and enter the value
1000000.

f) Choose Add.

g) Check the result by choosing OK. Note that all countries are affected by the
Conditional Formatting.

4. Edit the Conditional Formatting setting so that it applies only to Germany and does not
include the result of the Division.
a) On the Analysis tab, choose Conditional Formatting —>High Sales Volume Germany
—►Edit ...

b) Choose the Selection tab.

c) From the Country drop-down list, select Members.

d) Choose the icon at the end of the row, select the Germany checkbox and choose OK.

e) From the Division drop-down list, select Members.

Note:
If you do not change this setting, the result for all Divisions in Germany wil
be colored as well.

f) Choose OK.

5. Save your workbook on your local drive with the name u## workbook Conditional
Formatting.
a) Choose File —>Save As.

b) In the File name field, enter u## workbook Conditional Formatting , where # #
is your user number.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 79

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

80 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 3
Exercise 5

Define a Filter Value Using VBA

Business Example
Your sales data is clustered in three business areas and your users want to select one of
them. Unfortunately, the clustering is not maintained in your BW master data, so you need to
define it manually in your workbook. Create a workbook showing the query Analysis of
Special Countries [P_QD_COUNTRY_SPEC_ANALYSlS]. Add a dropdown box showing
your three business areas and enable the filter action when your user selects a business area.

1. Create a workbook showing the query Analysis of Special Countries

[p _ qe >_c o u n t r y _ s p e c _a n a l y s i S ]. Give Sheet 2 the name Background and populate it
with the data provided in the following table:
Column A Column B Column C Column D Column E

Business Area Business Area <Blank> Selected Item Selected Keys

Keys
Business Area 1 FR; DE; IT
Business Area 2 NO: GB
Business Area 3 CA; US

2. On Sheet 1 of your workbook, add the query Analysis of Special Countries

[ P_QD_COUNTRY_SpEC_ANALYSiS ] starting at cell Dl. Do not choose a country in the
variable dialog.

3. Add the dropdown box and map the predefined entries from the Background sheet to it.

4. Define a macro that reads the value of cell E2 on the Background sheet and sends it as a
filter of the characteristic Country [t _ s o l d _ t o _COUNTr y ] to data source d s _1. Assign
that macro to the dropdown box you just created. Use the following code:
Sub BusinessAreaPrompt()

Dim varOKCode As Variant

Dim value As String
value = Worksheets("Background").Range("E2").value
varOKCode = Application.R u n ("SAPSetFilter", "DS_1",
"T_SOLD_TO__OCOUNTRY", value, "INPUT_STRING")
End Sub

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 81

Unit 3
Solution 5

Define a Filter Value Using VBA

1. Create a workbook showing the query Analysis of Special Countries

[p _ qe >_c o u n t r y _ s p e c _a n a l y s i S ]. Give Sheet 2 the name Background and populate it
with the data provided in the following table:
Column A Column B Column C Column D Column E

Business Area Business Area <Blank> Selected Item Selected Keys

Keys
Business Area 1 FR; DE; IT
Business Area 2 NO; GB
Business Area 3 CA; US

a) Choose Start —*■Analysis for Microsoft Excel.

b) Choose the New Sheet icon at the bottom of the worksheet.

c) Change the name Sheet 2 on the Excel spreadsheet to Background.

d) In the Background sheet, enter the data provided in the table above, starting on the
first row.

2. On Sheet 1 of your workbook, add the query Analysis of Special Countries

[p _ q d _ c o u n t r y _ s p e c _a n a l y s i s ] starting at cell Dl. Do not choose a country in the
variable dialog.
a) Select Sheet 1 in your workbook.

b) Select cell Dl.

c) On the Analysis tab, choose Insert Data Source —>Select Data Source.

d) If prompted, enter your password.

e) Choose RWB System Connection and choose Next.

f) In the Select Data Source dialog box, use the Search For field on the Search tab, to
search for p q d c o u n t r y s p e c a n a l y s i s .

82 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP BW

g) Select P_QD_COUNTRY_SPEC_ANALYSIS and choose OK.

h) Do not select any countries in the Prompts for Analysis of special countries dialog box -
just choose OK.

3. Add the dropdown box and map the predefined entries from the Background sheet to it.
a) In cell AI , enter Business Area.

b) Activate the Developer Ribbon , if it is not activated already. Choose File —>Options
—>Customize Ribbon and select Developer checkbox in the Main Tabs section. Choose
OK.

c) On the Developer ribbon, choose Insert —>Combo Box.

d) Resize the combo box to fit in cell Bl.

e) From the context menu of the dropdown box, choose Format Control....

f) In the Input Range field, enter Background! $a $2 : $a $4 and choose OK.

g) In the Cell Link field, enter Background! $d $2.

h) Choose OK.

i) In cell E2 of the Background sheet, enter the formula = i n d e x (B2: B 4 , D2 ).

Now when you choose a business area with the dropdown box on Sheet 1, the
corresponding item and keys appear in cells D2 and E2 on the Background sheet.

4. Define a macro that reads the value of cell E2 on the Background sheet and sends it as a
filter of the characteristic Country [t _ s o l d _ t o _COUNTRY] to data source d s _1. Assign
that macro to the dropdown box you just created. Use the following code:
Sub BusinessAreaPrompt()

Dim varOKCode As Variant

Dim value As String
value = Worksheets("Background").Range("E2").value
varOKCode = Application.R u n ("SAPSetFilter", "DS_1",
"T_SOLD_TO__OCOUNTRY", value, "INPUT_STRING")
End Sub

a) Choose ALT + F ll to open the VBA Editor. Select This Workbook and choose
Insert —>Module.

b) Enter the corresponding code.

c) To close the VBA Editor, choose the Microsoft Excel button in the top left corner.

d) Right-click the dropdown box and select Assign Macro....

e) Click on the macro name BusinessAreaPrompt and choose OK.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 83

Unit 3: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a Workbook with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office and
SAP BW

84 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 3

Learning Assessment

1. What is not a functionality in Analysis for Microsoft Office?

Choose the correct answer.

I A Integration with Design Studio

B Integration with PowerPoint for live embedded analysis

| C Create pixel-perfect reporting

D Allows for consumption of many BEx query elements

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 85

Unit 3

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. What is not a functionality in Analysis for Microsoft Office?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Integration with Design Studio

B Integration with PowerPoint for live embedded analysis

[~xj C Create pixel-perfect reporting

D Allows for consumption of many BEx query elements

86 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 4 SAP BusinessObjects Analysis,

Edition for OLAP and SAP
NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP 88
Exercise 6: Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP 99

Lesson 2
Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query 105
Exercise 7: Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP 111
Based on a BW Query
Exercise 8: Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP 117
with Variables and Hierarchies

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

• Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP based on a BW

query

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 87

Unit 4
Lesson 1

Creating a Workspace with SAP

BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

LESSON OVERVIEW
Access SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP, from the Bl launchpad in a web
browser.
Display OLAP data in an analysis window with crosstabs and charts. Create a workspace and
add crosstab and chart objects to the analysis window. Connect the objects to OLAP data
sources to analyse your data.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Workspace Use Cases and Target Groups

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
Functionality

• Leveraging SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW) and SAP HANA data sources

• Leveraging Microsoft Structured Query Language (SQL) server analysis services data
source plus leveraging Oracle Essbase data sources

• Performing web-based OLAP analysis

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) has the
following functionality:SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP is the premium web-based
OLAP analysis client for business analysts to run ad hoc OLAP analyses.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Main Use Cases

• Run ad hoc OLAP analyses, and create OLAP workspaces for private use or for sharing
with others.

• Analyze data from different data providers. For example, you can view sales data from a
Microsoft Analysis Services cube on the same sheet as finance data from an SAP
NetWeaver BW cube.

Multidimensional Data Analysis

• Analyze and interact with data through a dedicated web client to find answers to business
questions.•

• Create workspaces for private use or to share business insights across the enterprise.

88 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

• Run the OLAP edition with other business analytic solutions integrated on the same Bl
platform.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Target Groups and Use Cases

Table 11: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Target Groups and Use Cases
The following table outlines the SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP target
groups and use cases:
Target Group Use Cases

Power user/IT
• Creation of reusable advanced analysis
workspaces

• Not necessarily an expert for sophisticat

ed Bl application design

Business analyst • Ad hoc data access and data analysis,

slicing and dicing

• Creation of advanced analysis workspa

ces for personal use

Business user • Can use predefined web workspaces

• Need to operate between SAP Busines

sObjects Analysis and more Bl consumer
tools such as SAP BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence or SAP Business Explorer

Basic Functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP is a powerful, web-based OLAP analysis tool
that can help you to gain insight into business data and make intelligent decisions that impact
corporate performance.
OLAP data is displayed in the SAP BusinessObjects Analysis window with crosstabs and
charts. You create a workspace, add crosstab and chart objects to the window, connect those
objects to OLAP data sources, and then interactively define analyses to explore your data.
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP is intuitive and easy to use, while providing
unique analysis capabilities, including the ability to simultaneously view data from different
cubes and providers.
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP is accessed from the SAP BusinessObjects
Bl launch pad in a web browser. All you need is a connection to an SAP BusinessObjects Bl
system that has SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP installed. You do not need to
install SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP on your local machine.
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP enables you to perform the following tasks:

• Define conditional formatting

• Define filter by measure

• Define simple and dynamic calculations

• Create custom calculations

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 89

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

1 o &■' H - l
Tabbed Toolbars Analysis Area
| i ftl ^ a x u
layout

njmim *eu»
Task Panel t/i.w i.m a tx M or
2*1.37* S3 C l* 373,10S.Q2 C l*
47,457.232*1 OR 47,**0,*0*.I4 Cl®
Layout Panel OOOCl* 350 1 4 0 *
t2 2.ltt.000.MCU lK O t0 .t« 2 07CU
•..*53.033 7 0 0 * 2.302,04! 32 CUR Crosstab
70,577.40 CUR 70,577.40 CUU
344,000 00 tU t 800,000 00 tU»
20,717,050.07 OR 0 00 CU»
000 CU! 2,17! ,000 00 (U)

Metadata
Explorer

Figure 30: The User Interface for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Terms in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Table 12: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Terms

The following table outlines some SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP terms:
Term Description

Cube A multidimensional or OLAP database in

which data is summarized, consolidated, and
stored in dimensions, each representing in
formation such as customer, or product line.
Dimension A collection of hierarchies, or a collection of
measures.
Hierarchy A collection of related data members, usually
organized in a hierarchical structure. Forex-
ample, in a Geography hierarchy, countries
would comprise one level in the hierarchy,
and cities would comprise a lower level.
Member A base unit of data, representing an entity in
a multidimensional OLAP database. For ex
ample, in a Geography hierarchy, some
members could be Antarctica, Stockholm,
and Tibet. A member in a hierarchy can have
parent and child members. Sweden would be
the parent member of Stockholm. Members
are represented in a crosstab by columns
and rows, and in a chart by pie slices, risers,
lines, or other visualizations.
Member dimension A dimension that represents the actual data,
that is, the numbers. For example, a meas
ures dimension could contain measures such
as Sales, Cost, and Profit.

90 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Term Description

Fact dimension A dimension that represents a characteristic

of the data and not the data itself. For exam
ple, Customers or Products could be fact di
mensions.
Workspace An SAP BusinessObjects Analysis data analy
sis document.
Analysis A specific subset of OLAP data, which may
contain hierarchies, measures, and filters, as
well as visual highlighting and user defined
calculations.
Analysis view A saved navigation state of an analysis. The
saved information includes applied filters, hi
erarchies, and available metadata. An analy
sis view can be shared among applications
such as SAP BusinessObjects Analysis (both
the OLAP edition and the edition for Micro
soft Office), SAP Crystal Reports, and SAP
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.
Data source An OLAP cube or query. Typically, data sour
ces are located on remote servers. When you
add a data source to your workspace, your
workspace can access the data within that
cube or query.
Analysis window The main window, containing your crosstab
and chart components.
Crosstab component A two-dimensional table object that you add
to the Analysis window to begin analyzing
your data.
Chart component A bar, line, or other type of chart object that
you add to the Analysis window to visualize
your data.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 91

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

Term Description

Task panel The panel at the left side of the Analysis win
dow, containing the Data, Properties, and
Outline panels. The Task panel also displays
task-specific panels such as the Calculation,
Filter, and Conditional Formatting panels. The
Task panel can be hidden to maximize the
analysis window size, and automatically ap
pears when required, for example, when add
ing a calculation. The Data panel is used to
add or remove data sources from the analy
sis. It also contains the metadata explorer,
which you use to perform navigation func
tions such as adding a hierarchy to the rows
or columns, adding a background filter
(sometimes called a "slice"), or adding a fa
vorite grouping. The Properties panel dis
plays configurable properties for the selected
component, such as column width, or chart
style. The Outline panel provides an overview
of the current workspace, which can be use
ful when the workspace contains many
sheets. It can also be used to quickly switch
to another analysis in the workspace, and to
remove any superfluous analyses.
Metadata explorer The area within the Data panel that displays
the metadata (measures, dimensions, and hi
erarchies) contained in a data source.
Layout panel The panel to the left of the Analysis window,
containing the definition of the selected anal
ysis. You can drag hierarchies and measures
into the Layout panel. You can also perform
navigational operations on the hierarchies
and measures in the Layout panel, including
filtering, reordering, and swapping objects.
The Layout panel duplicates functionality
that is available on the crosstab or chart, but
the Layout panel also indicates the members
that are part of the background filter. The
Layout panel can be hidden to maximize the
analysis window size.

92 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Term Description

Background filter A computer monitor can display only two

spatial dimensions, but in SAP BusinessOb
jects Analysis, you can work with many data
dimensions simultaneously. You place the di
mensions and hierarchies that you want to
actively analyze on the rows and columns of
a crosstab, but you can also narrow the
scope of your analysis by selecting members
of other hierarchies to filter the crosstab da
ta. These unseen hierarchies represent back
ground filters. For example, if your data cube
contains the three hierarchies Product, Mar
ket, and Year, and you want to analyze how
your products performed in all markets, but
only in the year 2010, you could use the Year
hierarchy as a background filter, selecting
only the 2010 member from the Year hierar
chy. Then, only the Product and Market hier
archies would be shown on the view axes for
analysis on the crosstab.
Header, or member header The first cell of a member row or column in a
crosstab. The member header contains the
member text or key.
Axis Any of the spatial axes on an analysis cross
tab or chart component. For example, a
crosstab appears as a two-dimensional table,
similar to a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. The
crosstab has two "view" axes, similar to the
vertical and horizontal axes in Microsoft Ex
cel. The two view axes are called the row axis
and column axis.
Sheet Any of the screen pages of an analysis work
space. New workspaces contain three
sheets, but a workspace can contain any
number of sheets. An analysis can be added
to any sheet, and an existing analysis can be
moved from one sheet to another. New
sheets can be added, and sheets can be re
named or deleted. Sheets are useful for cate
gorizing analyses. For example, the first
sheet could contain four summary charts,
with other sheets containing details of each
analysis.

Analysis Workspace from Bl Launch Pad

You access SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP from within Bl Launch Pad.
When starting SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP, the Open Data Source dialog
box appears automatically. It shows all data sources available for you to access data. A data

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 93

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

source is a repository object created by the system administrator, that contains all the
information that is required for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis to connect to an OLAP server.*•

Figure 31: Using OLAP Connections in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Available Data Sources

• Cube
The data source object points directly to a single OLAP cube on the OLAP server.

• Query
The data source object points directly to a single OLAP query on the OLAP server.

• System
If you select a system, you see the cubes and queries available from that system.

You can add a single data source if you need to analyze data from just one database, or you
can add several data sources, and use a different data source with each analysis in your
workspace. However, once you begin to design your analysis, the analysis and its crosstab
and chart components are fixed to the data source. You cannot add metadata from one data
source to an analysis that already contains metadata from another data source.
Once you connect to a data source, your next step is to define an analysis, and work with your
data in the Analysis window.
An analysis is a specific subset of data from the OLAP cube. You create an analysis by adding
OLAP data to the crosstab, and then manipulating the data, for example, by sorting and
filtering.

Crosstabs
The crosstab component is a grid, similar to a spreadsheet, that displays data from a cube.
You will usually perform most of your data analysis tasks using crosstabs. For example, you
can sort data in a crosstab, add calculations, add conditional formatting, and filter out data
that is irrelevant to your analysis.

Table 13: Crosstab Axes

The crosstab comprises the following three axes, although only two can be displayed on the
screen:

94 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Axis Position

Row axis The vertical axis that displays rows of data.

Column axis The horizontal axis that displays columns of
data.
Background filter axis, or slice axis The axis that is perpendicular to the two-di
mensional crosstab displays. Hierarchies
that are placed on the row axis are called row
hierarchies. Similarly, you also use column
hierarchies and background filter hierarchies
in your analyses. With row and column hier
archies, you can see several members simul
taneously on the crosstab. However, with the
background filter hierarchy, you fix a slice of
the data in the crosstab at any one time. The
member you select in the background filter
hierarchy is called the background filter
member or slice member. For example, if
Week is a background filter hierarchy, you
can select any week as the background filter
member. With some OLAP providers, for ex
ample SAP BW and Microsoft Analysis Serv
ices, you can select multiple members of a
hierarchy as a background filter. However,
you cannot select multiple members of a
measures dimension as a background filter.
You can also display more than one dimen
sion or hierarchy on a row or column axis. For
example, you can place both a Measures di
mension and a Years hierarchy on the same
axis to show data from the Measures dimen
sion over several years. This is called nesting
hierarchies.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Charts

You can add charts to your workspaces to present your data graphically. Charts can often
emphasize irregularities or trends in your data, and help you to focus your business analysis
on those areas.
Chart and crosstab components are linked to analyses. A common analysis scenario is to first
create a crosstab component, and then add a chart component as a sub-analysis, linked to
the main analysis. Both components display the same data, and both components update
simultaneously whenever you make changes to either component. This interaction allows you
to repeatedly define and refine your analyses, and see the graphical results of your changes in
real time.
You can also unlink, or disconnect, a chart sub-analysis from its current analysis, converting it
to a new, separate analysis.
Charts can be easily customized. You can change the chart type, or change the appearance of
the chart to increase clarity. You can also expand data in the chart to examine the data in
more detail. Swapping the chart axes can also sometimes improve the presentation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 95

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

Sub-Analysis
When you analyze data, a crosstab component is typically the main focus of your analysis.
Other components, such as a chart, support your analysis, helping to visualize the data in a
different form. Additional crosstab components can also support your analysis, allowing you
to focus on specific areas of your analysis while your original crosstab presents a broad view
of the data.
These supporting components represent sub-analyses. When you add sub-analyses, they are
linked to a main analysis. For example, if you add a chart sub-analysis, the chart represents
the same data as the main analysis. Changes that you make to the main analysis are reflected
in the chart. Therefore, if you remove members from an analysis, those same members are
automatically removed from the chart sub-analysis.
However, changes that you make to the sub-analysis are not reflected in the main analysis.
For example, if you swap the rows and columns in a sub-analysis, the rows and columns in the
main analysis do not change.

Filters

Figure 32: Filtering By Member

In SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, you will often want to enhance your analysis workspace by
using filters, adding calculations or adding conditional formatting.
In SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, you will often want to narrow the scope of your analysis to
focus on important data, by only including in your crosstabs and charts those members that
are relevant to your analysis. This action is called filtering.
You can filter members by manually selecting and deselecting them from a list. This is called
filtering by member. Or, you can filter members by specifying filter conditions, for example, by
specifying a condition such as Greater than 1000. This is called filtering by measure.

Workspace Calculations
Crosstabs that contain raw multidimensional data are not always easy to read or understand.
The data may hide trends, which can be revealed only when new information is derived from
it. Calculations provide a way to reveal these trends.
You can add multiple calculations, to enhance your analysis further or to highlight different
aspects of the data.

96 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

When you add a calculation to your analysis, the calculation is added as an additional
member. The calculation also behaves like a member. For example, you can filter or apply
conditional formatting to all types of calculated members, except for dynamic calculations.

Table 14: Calculation Types

The following calculation types are available:

Calculation Type Definition

Simple calculations Simple calculations are calculations involving

two or more members and one of the four
basic arithmetical operators: Add, Subtract,
Multiply, and Divide. Simple calculations can
involve just two members and an operator,
for example, Product Price - Product Cost,
but you can also add multiple members, for
example, Price * Sales Tax * Quantity. If you
select more than two members or measures,
only the addition and multiplication calcula
tions are enabled.
Custom calculations Custom calculations are calculations that
you define by creating formulas in the Calcu
lation panel. Custom calculations can be as
simple as an addition of two members, or can
be a complex combination of functions and
members.
Dynamic calculations Dynamic calculations are a special type of
calculation that recalculates when the data
changes in its associated members. For ex
ample, if you add a Rank Number calculation,
members are assigned a numerical rank. If
you then remove the member ranked third,
the member that was previously ranked
fourth is now ranked third. Note that dynamic
calculations can be initially applied only to
visible measures on an axis. However, re
moving the measure from the axis does not
remove the dynamic calculation.

Workspace Conditional Formatting

You can apply formatting to the cells in a crosstab to highlight important differences or
unexpected results. For example, you can add background colors to cells that are greater
than or less than a particular value.

Workspace Saving and Sharing

If you want to share your SAP BusinessObjects Analysis workspaces on the web with other
analysts and users, you have the following possibilities:

• Save a workspace to a public folder in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository.

• Send a workspace to another user.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 97

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Export a workspace to Microsoft Excel.

• Export a workspace to an Adobe PDF file for printing.

98 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Exercise 6

Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Business Example
Analysts in your company need to access Order and Sales data from SAP NetWeaver BW to
answer complex questions in a very short space of time and share the results with an easy-to-
use reporting application.

Note:
Replace # # with the group number assigned to you by your instructor.

Create a New Workspace on Top of a BEx Query

1. Open SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and log on with the following
credentials:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB
SAP Client 800
User name user##
Password <your password>
Authentication SAP

2. In the RWB system, choose the query Order and sales values 2 (0D_SD_C03_Q009_2) as
your data source.

3. Create a query to only display data from January to December 2001 and to only display
data for internet sales. Do not close the Prompts dialog box.

4. Create a public variant for your prompt values and save it as u##_variant. In the
Prompts dialog box, choose OK.

5. Replace Sold-to party with Calendar year/month.

6. Add distribution channel 12 (Internet Sales) as a background filter.

Add a Calculation to your Workspace

1. In your workspace, replace Calendar year/month with Sold-to party.

2. Add a calculation to display the percentage of orders that was returned for each
customer.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 99

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

3. Name this calculation % Returns.

4. Rank the % Return with a number.

Apply Conditional Formatting to your Workspace

1. Conditional formatting allows you to define rules and bring attention to cells that satisfy
those rules, an example of which is to highlight good, critical and bad values in a report.
Define a conditional format Returns Percentage, based on the key figure % Returns, to
highlight the values based on the following rules:
Definition Field Value
Green 6 Less Than 5
Yellow 4 Between 5-10
Red 2 Greater Than 10

2. Save the Workspace in your Favourites as u##_workspace.

100 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Solution 6

Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Note:
Replace # # with the group number assigned to you by your instructor.

Create a New Workspace on Top of a BEx Query

1. Open SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and log on with the following
credentials:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB
SAP Client 800
User name user##
Password <your password>
Authentication SAP

a) Choose Start —*■Bl Launch pad <your assigned system>.

b) Log on with the credentials provided in the table above.

c) Choose Applications —>Analysis edition for OLAP.

2. In the RWB system, choose the query Order and sales values 2 (0D_SD_C03_Q009_2) as
your data source.
a) In the Open Data Source dialog box, choose RWB System Connection. Choose Next.

b) In the Find tab, in the Search field, enter Order and sales values 2 and choose
the Find button.

c) Choose Order and sales values 2 (0D_SD_C03_Q009_2) and choose OK.

3. Create a query to only display data from January to December 2001 and to only display
data for internet sales. Do not close the Prompts dialog box.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 101

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

a) In the Prompts dialog box, in the Prompt Summary, choose Calendar Month/Year.

b) Enter the Start and End values as 01.2001 and 12.2001 respectively. You can enter
these manually or to choose the values, choose the Display Member Selector button.

c) In the Prompts dialog box, choose Distribution channel.

d) To set the range to only include the value that equals 12: Internet Sales, choose Include
and Equal from the Distribution channel menus and you can enter 12 manually or
choose the Display Member Selector button.

e) Do not close the Prompts dialog box.

4. Create a public variant for your prompt values and save it as u##_variant. In the
Prompts dialog box, choose OK.
a) In the top right corner of the Prompts dialog box, choose the Variants menu.

b) Choose Save as.

c) In the Description field, enter u##_variant as the name of your variant.

d) Select the Save as public variant checkbox.

e) In the Technical Name field, enter u##_variant. Choose Save.

f) Choose Variants —> Public Variants —*■ u##_variant. If the variant you created is not
listed in the first 10 variants, choose More....

g) To close the Prompts dialog box, choose OK. You are presented with the query view
definition as defined in the BEx Query Designer.

5. Replace Sold-to party with Calendar year/month.

a) In the Layout Panel, in the Rows panel, right-click Sold-to party.

b) Choose Swap with —►Calendar year/month —> Calendar year/month. Notice that only
data for 01.2001 to 12.2001 is displayed, as set in the prompt.

6. Add distribution channel 12 (Internet Sales) as a background filter.

a) Drag Distribution channel from the Data panel to the Background panel.

b) The Filter panel opens automatically. Notice that the only member available is 12:
Internet Sales. Ensure that the 12: Internet Sales checkbox is selected. Choose OK.

Add a Calculation to your Workspace

1. In your workspace, replace Calendar year/month with Sold-to party.

a) Right-click Calendar year/month.

b) Choose Swap with —►Sold-to party (optional en try)—> Sold-to party (optional entry).

2. Add a calculation to display the percentage of orders that was returned for each
customer.
a) In the crosstab column header, choose Returns value.

b) On your keyboard, press Ctrl and, in the crosstab column header, click Incoming
Orders value.

c) Choose the Analyze toolbar tab.

102 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

d) To display the calculations menu, choose the arrow next to the Calculations button.
Choose Percentage Share. A new column is added to the crosstab. This calculation
calculates what percentage of the customers' orders was returned.

3. Name this calculation % Returns.

a) The new calculation column contains a calculator icon. Choose the Calculator icon.

b) In the Name field, enter % Returns and choose OK.

4. Rank the % Return with a number.

a) In the crosstab column header, click % Returns.

b) Select Calculations —>Dynamic calculation —►Rank Number.

Apply Conditional Formatting to your Workspace

Green 6 Less Than 5

Yellow 4 Between 5-10
Red 2 Greater Than 10

a) In the crosstab column header, choose % Returns.

b) Choose the Analyze toolbar tab and choose Conditional Formatting —►New.

C) In the Name field, enter Returns Percentage.

d) In the Based on field, choose the key figure % Returns.

e) Define the exception rules based on the table above and, after each rule, choose Add.

f) In the bottom left corner of the Conditional Formatting panel, select the Preview
checkbox. Notice that the crosstab dynamically updates.

g) In the Conditional Formatting panel, choose OK.

2. Save the Workspace in your Favourites as u##_workspace.

a) Choose Save —*• Save as...

b) Navigate to your Favourites folder.

c) Enter the filename U##_Workspace and choose Save.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 103

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP

104 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Lesson 2

Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW
Query

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson describes the way that SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP, can
connect to data stored in SAP NetWeaver BW.
Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP, that is based on a
SAP NetWeaver BW query.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP based on a BW

query

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP can connect to SAP BW data sources and
take advantage of features such as prompts, variants, display attributes, BEx conditions, and
the Report-Report Interface.
When working with SAP BW data, note that some Analysis features behave differently than
with other data sources:

• When connecting to an SAP BW data source, you may need to enter prompt values.

• Calculations can only be applied to measures.

• You can apply conditional formatting to a column or row header, or to a different measure
than the one that the condition is based on.

• Members can be displayed with either their keys or text.

• Data can be filtered by restricted characteristics with default values or by BEx conditions.

The new currency conversion feature can also be used.

Table 15: Connectivity Options

This table summarizes connectivity options for various releases of BusinessObjects, Edition
for OLAP:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 105

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

Provider Name Version

SAP BW • v7.01 SPS 06+

• v7.01 SPS 08+
• v7.02 SPS 02+
• v7.3 SPS 03+
• v7.31 SPS 04+
• V7.4SPS 02+ (SP01+)

Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services •

2008
• 2012

SAP BusinessObjects Financial Consolidation • v7.5

• vlO

SAP BusinessObjects Planning and Consoli • v7.5 SP5

dation for Microsoft Platform
• vlO

SAP BusinessObjects Plannig and Consolida • vlO

tion for NetWeaver
SAP BusinessObjects Profitability and Cost • v7.5 SP12
Management
• vlO

Teradata • vl4.10

Oracle Essbase • vl

Currency Conversion for SAP BW

You can leverage SAP BW's currency conversions in your analysis.

• Runtime Currency Conversion

• No workaround with variable needed

• Currency Conversion is available only if the currency translation is applicable to SAP BEx
Query

• Target currency options depend on SAP BW Configuration

• Support on SAP BW 7.x

Break Hierarchy

When you sort the data, the parent members are sorted in a order, and child members below
the parents are sorted in their own order.

106 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query

If you want the ascending or descending sorting arrangement not to be restricted within the
parent members in the hierarchy, then use break hierarchy. When you perform break
hierarchy, you can see that the dimensions and measures are sorted across the parents in the
hierarchy. This enables you to analyze the entire data with only ascending or descending sort.
This is supported for all Analysis for OLAP supported data sources.

Report-Report Interface
When building queries using the SAP Business Explorer (BEx), an IT specialist can configure
links between reports through the Report-Report Interface (RRI). These links provide the
ability to jump to a variety of targets such as reports, other BEx queries, ABAP transactions,
and web addresses.
Analysis, edition for OLAP workspaces can act as RRI senders. If your analysis uses an SAP
BW data source with RRI targets, you can view and access RRI targets by right-clicking
members in the crosstab.
Targets can help you perform tasks such as the following:

• Navigate to various result object-specific targets. For example, from the name of a sales
representative, navigate to that sales rep's employee fact sheet or order volume.

• Start workflows or activities. For example, from a crosstab showing cost per cost center,
create a request for clarification and send it to the accounting department.

RRI targets can be context-sensitive, so that the target report reflects the member that you
right-clicked in the crosstab.

Note:
Analysis workspaces do not act as RRI receivers, that is, an RRI link cannot be
configured to point directly to a workspace. However, using the OpenDocument
URL for an Analysis workspace, an IT specialist can use RRI to create a generic
URL link that points to the workspace.
For more information about RRI, see the documentation for SAP technology
available on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com.

To Access RRI Targets

To access the list of RRI targets for a BEx query, right-click the crosstab member that
interests you and click Go To. Click a target to open it.
You may be prompted to enter credentials for the target. RRI in Analysis supports single sign-
on (SSO). If SSO is configured and if you have already provided the necessary authentication
for the target, you can view it without re-entering your credentials.
If you click a BEx query target, the query opens as a new crosstab in the Analysis workspace,
and the data source is added to the Data pane. The new crosstab focuses on the member that
you jumped from. If the current worksheet already has four Analysis components, then the
crosstab opens in a new sheet.
If you click another type of target, it opens in a new browser window.

Other Hierarchies

In SAP BW data sources, hierarchies that belong to the same dimension are mutually
exclusive. For example, consider an SAP BW cube that contains a dimension <Customer>
that contains three hierarchies: <Country_l>, <Country_2>, and <Country_3>. Only one of

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 107

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

these hierarchies can be included in a single crosstab or chart analysis. You cannot specify
<Country_l> on the row axis and <Country_3> in the background filter in the same analysis.
Analysis supports unbalanced and ragged hierarchies.

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP: Supported and Unsupported

SAP NetWeaver BW Elements

Table 16: Support for NetWeaver BW Elements

This table summarizes BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP's support for various
NetWeaver BW elements:
BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for
OLAP (Direct Access) Support

Characteristics Yes
Key Figures Yes
Free Characteristics Yes
Restricted Key Figures Yes
Calculated Key Figures Yes
Display Attributes Yes
Navigational A ttributes Yes
Custom Key Figure Structure Yes
Custom Characteristic Structure Yes
Compounded Characteristics Yes
Optional Variables Yes
Manadatory Variables Yes
Characteristic Value Variables Yes
Formula Variables Yes
Hierarchy Variables Yes
Hierarchy Node Variables Yes
Hierarchy Version Variables Yes
Key Date Variable Yes
Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) Yes
Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) Yes
Exceptions (from BEx Query) Yes
Exception Aggregation Yes
Zero Suppression Yes
Local Calculations (defined in BEx Query) Yes
Scaling Factor Yes
Number of Decimals Yes

108 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query

BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for

OLAP (Direct Access) Support

Display Options for Characteristics (Key, Key Yes

& Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, Suppress) Yes
Placement of Subtotal (above or below no Yes
des)

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 109

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

110 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Exercise 7

Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW
Query

Business Example
As an analyst you want to learn how to use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for OLAP.
You have to create a workspace on a BEx query to analyze your BW data. Your first task is to
create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division
[p _a n a l y s i s o f d i v i s i o n ] and add a pie chart to your workspace.

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace ##with the group number
that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, log on with the
credentials provided in the following table:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned server>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

2. Remove Incoming Orders from the Analysis area.

3. Swap Division with Country.

4. Add a sub-analysis and visualize the data with a pie chart.

5. Remove all Nulls and Zeros from the analysis.

6. Change the currency to USD with a currency type Conversion type for posting date.

7. Further changes that you make to the crosstab should not be reflected in the pie chart.
Unlink the sub-analysis so that it is temporarily frozen in its current state.

8. Add Sold to party to the main analysis.

9. Savethe Analysis Workspace in your Favorites using the filename U## Workspace 1,
where # # is the user number assigned to you by your instructor.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. Ill

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

Create an Enhanced Workspace on Top of a BEx Query

Create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division
[p _a n a l y s i s o f d i v i s i o n ] and enhance the layout of the represented data using filters,
calculations and conditional formatting.

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, log on with the
credentials provided in the following table:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned server>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

2. Add a dynamic calculation to see the percentage contribution of each division to the
overall sum of all divisions.

3. Remove the Overall result.

4. Define a filter so that only data for Germany is displayed.

5. Save the Analysis Workspace in your Favorites using the filename U## Workspace 1,
where # # is the user number assigned to you by your instructor.

112 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Solution 7

Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW
Query

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace ##with the group number
that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, log on with the
credentials provided in the following table:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned server>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —>_SAP Business Intelligence —>Bl Launch pad <your assigned server>
and log on with the credentials provided in the table above.

b) Choose Applications —>Analysis edition for OLAP.

c) In the Open Data Source dialog box, select RWB System Connection.

d) Choose Next.

e) Use the Find field of the Find tab to search for the query Analysis of Division
[P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] .

f) In the results list, choose P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION.

g) Choose OK.

2. Remove Incoming Orders from the Analysis area.

a) In the Layout area, choose Filter —►By member from the context menu of Key Figures.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 113

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

b) Deselect the Incoming Orders EUR checkbox.

c) Choose OK.

3. Swap Division with Country.

a) Drag Country from the Data area it to the Rows area.

b) Remove Division from the Rows area by dragging it back to the Data area.

4. Add a sub-analysis and visualize the data with a pie chart,

a) On the Insert tab, choose the pie chart icon.

5. Remove all Nulls and Zeros from the analysis.

a) In the Analysis area, click the crosstab.

b) Choose Display —>Nulls & Zeros —>Hide all.

6. Change the currency to USD with a currency type Conversion type for posting date.
a) Open the Display tab.

b) Select the data in the workspace and choose Currency Translation.

c) In the Currency Translation dialog box, in the Target Currency filed, choose USD.

d) In the Currency Translation Type field, choose Conversion Type for Posting Date.

e) Choose Convert.

7. Further changes that you make to the crosstab should not be reflected in the pie chart.
Unlink the sub-analysis so that it is temporarily frozen in its current state.
a) Click in the Sub-Analysis area with the pie chart and choose Display —>Unlink sub
analysis.

8. Add Sold to party to the main analysis.

a) Click in the Analysis area containing your crosstab.

b) Drag Sold to party from the Data area into the Rows area below Country.

c) Make sure that the change only is reflected in the crosstab.

9. Savethe Analysis Workspace in your Favorites using the filename U## Workspace 1,
where # # is the user number assigned to you by your instructor.
a) Choose Save —►Save As...

b) Save the file in your Favorites folder using the filename U## Workspace 1.

Create an Enhanced Workspace on Top of a BEx Query

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, log on with the
credentials provided in the following table:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned server>

SAP System RWB

114 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query

Field Name Value

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —*•_SAP Business Intelligence —>Bl Launch pad - <your assigned server>
and log on with the credentials provided in the table above.

b) Choose Applications —>Analysis edition for OLAP.

c) In the Open Data Source dialog box, select RWB System Connection.

d) Choose Next.

e) Use the Find field of the Find tab to search for the query Analysis of Division
[P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

f) In the results list, choose P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION.

g) Choose OK.

2. Add a dynamic calculation to see the percentage contribution of each division to the
overall sum of all divisions.
a) In the Analysis view, select the Sales Volume EUR column header.

b) Choose Analyze —*■Calculations —>Dynamic Calculation —>Percentage Contribution

to Parent.

3. Remove the Overall result.

a) From the context menu of the Divisions dimension in the Rows area, choose Totals
—►Hide totals.

4. Define a filter so that only data for Germany is displayed.

a) Drag Country from the Data to the Background area.

b) In the Filter "Country" view, deselect all but the DE: Germany checkbox.

c) Choose OK.

5. Save the Analysis Workspace in your Favorites using the filename U## Workspace 1,
where # # is the user number assigned to you by your instructor.
a) Choose Save —>Save a s ...

b) Save the file in your Favorites folder using the filename u## Workspace 2.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 115

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

116 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4
Exercise 8

Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP with Variables and
Hierarchies

Business Example
Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on the BW query
Query Optional Variable [P_OPT_VAR].

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, logon using the
credentials in the following table:
Field Name Value

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

2. Find out which divisions the report is filtered by.

3. Change the values for the variable to Pumps (01) and Lightning (04) only.

4. Display the data using a hierarchy for Material. Remove Country, Division and Region from
the Analysis workspace. Show only the first two levels of the hierarchy.

5. Save the Workspace in your Favorites as u## workspace with Hierarchy .

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 117 SAB4

Unit 4
Solution 8

Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects

Analysis, Edition for OLAP with Variables and
Hierarchies

Business Example
Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on the BW query
Query Optional Variable [P_OPT_VAR].

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. When prompted, logon using the
credentials in the following table:
Field Name Value

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —>_SAP Business Intelligence —>Bl Launch pad - <your assigned
server>.

b) Log on with the credentials provided in the table above.

c) Choose Applications —>Analysis edition for OLAP.

d) In the Open Data Source dialog box, select RWB System Connection and choose OK.

e) Use the Find field of the Find tab to search for Query Optional Variable
[P_OPT_VAR ].

f) Select P_OPT_VAR in the results list and choose OK.

g) In the Prompts dialog box, choose OK.

2. Find out which divisions the report is filtered by.

a) Drag Division into the Rows area.
You see that the report is filtered by the divisions Pumps , Lightning and High Tech.

3. Change the values for the variable to Pumps (01) and Lightning (04) only.
a) In the Data area, choose Prompts.

b) In the Prompts dialog box, expand the Divisions node.

118 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Based on a BW Query

c) Remove the value 07 (High Tech) by choosing the Delete button.

d) Choose OK.

4. Display the data using a hierarchy for Material. Remove Country, Division and Region from
the Analysis workspace. Show only the first two levels of the hierarchy.
a) Drag Country, Division, and Region from the Rows area into the Data area.

b) In the Data area, expand the Material node and drag Product Hierarchy for material
MARA into the Rows area.

c) From the context menu of the Product Hierarchy for material MARA heading in the
workspace, choose Show levels and deselect level 3-5.

d) View the result by expanding the hierarchy nodes.

5. Save the Workspace in your Favorites as u## workspace with Hierarchy.

a) Choose Save —>Save A s ...

b) Navigate to your Favourites folder.

c) Enter the filename u## workspace with Hierarchy and choose Save.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 119

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a Workspace in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP based on a BW

query

120 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 4

Learning Assessment

1. What are the benefits of using SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 121 SAB4

Unit 4

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. What are the benefits of using SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP?

Thin client, connectivity to BW data, build and share in the same platform, connectivity to
other data sources such as Teradata and MSAS

122 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 5 SAP BusinessObjects Web

Intelligence and SAP
NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver BW 124
Exercise 9: Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW (BICS) 127
Exercise 10: Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW (Relational Universe) 133

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create a SAP BW Web Intelligence Document

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 123

Unit 5
Lesson 1

Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP

NetWeaver BW

LESSON OVERVIEW
Use SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence to query, report and analyze data. Create and
format a SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document based on existing universes.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a SAP BW Web Intelligence Document

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP BW Web Intelligence

Note:
This lessons covers SAP BW Web Intelligence only in the context of SAP BW. The
courses BOW310 and BOW32 cover omprehensive training for SAP BW Web
Intelligence.

The SAP data sources available from Web Intelligence are:

• SAP Business Warehouse

- Direct access to BEx queries via Bl Consumer Services (BICS)

- SQL access to BW InfoProviders (Relational universe 4.0 created with the Information
Design Tool)

Direct Access to BEx Queries via Bl Consumer Services (BICS)

BEx queries (SAP Business Explorer queries) are queries created using the SAP BEx Query
Designer, based on SAP Info Cubes in a SAP Business Warehouse (SAP BW). BEx queries
retrieve the metadata from the data source. You use Web Intelligence to connect to a BEx
query by using a Bl Consumer services (BICS) connection, and retrieve data via the BEx query
for reporting purposes. You create, edit and refresh documents and reports based on BEx
queries using the Web Intelligence Applet interface or Web Intelligence Rich Client. In the Web
Intelligence HTML interface, you can view and refresh documents, but you cannot edit any
document elements based on BEx queries.
Web Intelligence automatically maps data from the BEx query to hierarchies, attributes,
dimensions and measures as in universe-based hierarchical queries. Direct access into a SAP
BEx query (through a BICS connection) does not allow you to rename, modify, or add
metadata. You do not create a universe for BEx queries.
The resulting microcube is represented in the Available Objects pane as a tree of objects, but
uses a subset of the features available in universe-based hierarchical queries. For example,

124 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver BW

the Siblings, Parent and Ancestor member functions are not available for BEx queries in the
Member Selector dialog box.

• You can only access BEx queries that have the flag Allow External Access to the
Query enabled in the SAP BEx Query Designer.

• The object mapping is not all equivalent, refer to the equivalents and
restrictions pages to ensure that the queries can be used correctly.

• Web Intelligence can create a document on a BEx query only when the BEx
query connection authentication is pre-defined. Prompted authentication
mode is not supported on the BEx query at document creation.

Table 17: How BEx Query Metadata is Mapped

BEx query metadata Web Intelligence 4.x object

Characteristic Dimension

Hierarchy Hierarchy

Hierarchy level N/A (levels are displayed in the Member Se

lector dialog box)

Attribute Attribute

Characteristic properties (Key, Caption, Attribute

Short description, Medium description,
Long description)

Key figure without unit/currency Measure (numeric)

Property formatted value (string)

Key figure with unit/currency Measure (numeric)

Property unit/currency (string)
Property formatted value (string)

Web Intelligence: Supported and Unsupported SAP BW Elements

Table 18: Support for Elements

This table summarizes Web Intelligence's support for various NetWeaver BW elements:
BEx Element Web Intelligence (Direct Access) Support

Characteristics Yes
Key Figures Yes
Free Characteristics Yes
Restricted Key Figures Yes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 125

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element Web Intelligence (Direct Access) Support

Calculated Key Figures Yes

Display Attributes Yes
Navigational A ttributes Yes
Custom Key Figure Structure Yes
Custom Characteristic Structure Yes
Compounded Characteristics Yes
Optional Variables Yes
Manadatory Variables Yes
Characteristic Value Variables Yes
Formula Variables Yes
Hierarchy Variables Yes
Hierarchy Node Variables Yes
Hierarchy Version Variables No
Key Date Variable Yes
Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) No
Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) No
Exceptions (from BEx Query) No
Exception Aggregation Yes
Zero Suppression No
Local Calculations (defined in BEx Query) No
Scaling Factor Yes
Number of Decimals No
Display Options for Characteristics (Key, Key No
& Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, Suppress) No
Placement of Subtotal (above or below no No
des)

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

126 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 5
Exercise 9

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP

BW(BICS)

Business Example
Your organization uses BEx Query Designer for defining queries on top of BW InfoProviders.
You want to use a BW query definition as a foundation that allows you to analyze the sales
volume by material in web intelligence. The query is Sales by Division
[P_SALES_DIVISI0N] and the InfoProvider is MultiProvider - Customer Sales
[P_SALES01].
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence from the Bl Launchpad. Use the following
data:
Field Value
System WDFLBMT2065

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

Username USER##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

2. Create a web intelligence query using the SAP BW query Sales by Division
[P_SALES_DIVISION].

3. Drag the objects Product Hierarchy for Material MARA and Sales Volume EUR into the
Result Objects screen area.

4. Navigate through the report and set the Product Hierarchy node as a section. Observe the
effect that this has on the report.

5. Return the report to its original format.

6. Duplicate the report table.

7. Turn the second table into a column chart.

8. Change the report title to Product Hier. - Sales Volume EUR.

9. Choose the Chart to expand the nodes using Hierarchical Navigation.

10. Copy and paste the column chart and change it into a pie chart.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 127

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

11. Save your report in the BusinessObjects Bl Platform folder by choosing Public
Folders — > Training —*■User Area —►User ##. Enter the report name u## Product
Hierarchy.

128 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 5
Solution 9

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP

BW(BICS)

1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence from the Bl Launchpad. Use the following
data:
Field Value
System WDFLBMT2065

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

Username USER##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Choose Start —►Bl Launch pad - WDFLBMT2065.

b) Log in to Bl Launch pad by entering the corresponding values from the table.

2. Create a web intelligence query using the SAP BW query Sales by Division
[P_SALES_DIVISION].
a) Choose Applications and then choose Web Intelligence.

b) Choose New.

c) In the Create a Document dialog box, choose BEx and then choose OK..

d) In the Folders section, choose RWB System Connection.

e) Use the Search field of the RWB System Connection screen area to search for the Sales
by Division query.

f) Select the query and choose OK.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 129

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

3. Drag the objects Product Hierarchy for Material MARA and Sales Volume EUR into the
Result Objects screen area.
a) In the Objects screen area, expand the Material node and drag Product Hierarchy for
Material MARA into the Result Objects screen area.

b) Drag Sales Volume EUR into the Result Objects screen area.

c) Choose the down arrow by the Product Hierarchy for Material MARA field, in the Result
Objects screen area.

d) In the Member Selector window that displays, select the Product Hierarchy checkbox.

e) In the Product Hierarchy context menu, select the Descendents checkbox.

f) Choose OK.

g) Choose Run Query.

4. Navigate through the report and set the Product Hierarchy node as a section. Observe the
effect that this has on the report.
a) In the report, expand the Product Hierarchy node and observe its layout.

b) From the Product Hierarchy context menu, choose Set as Section.

c) Navigate through the report to view the effect of setting the Product Hierarchy as a
section.

5. Return the report to its original format.

a) Choose Undo until the initial report is displayed.

6. Duplicate the report table.

a) From the table border context menu, choose Copy.

b) From the context menu of a blank area of the report, choose Paste.

7. Turn the second table into a column chart.

a) From the duplicated table context menu, choose Turn Into —►Column Chart.

8. Change the report title to Product Hier. - Sales Volume EUR.

a) Double-click the Report 1 report title.

b) Delete the formula =ReportName() and enter =" Product Hier. - Sales Volume
EUR".

c) Choose Validate.

9. Choose the Chart to expand the nodes using Hierarchical Navigation.

a) Choose Hardware —*■PC to view the sales for PC parts.

10. Copy and paste the column chart and change it into a pie chart.
a) Right click and choose Copy from the context menu.

b) Paste the item next to the column chart.

c) Right click and select TURN to and select a pie chart.

130 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver BW

11. Save your report in the BusinessObjects Bl Platform folder by choosing Public
Folders —>Training —*■User Area —►User ##. Enter the report name u## Product
Hierarchy.
a) Choose the arrow next to the Save button on the toolbar and select Save to Enterprise.

b) Navigate to the Public Folders —> Training —» User Area —» User # # folder and enter u##
Product Hierarchy as the report name.

c) Choose Save.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 131

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

132 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 5
Exercise 10

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP

BW (Relational Universe)

Business Example
You have been asked to create a web intelligence document using a relational BW universe.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.
Create and Publish a Business Layer

1. Create a new project called U##_BW_UNX_PROJECT.

2. Create a new session, using the information in the following table:

Field Name Value
System <your assigned system>

User user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

3. Create a new relational connection to SAP BW using the SAP Java Connector (SAP JCo).
Use the information in the following table to provide parameters for the SAP NetWeaver
BW connection:
Field Name Value

Client Number 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Language EN

System ID RWB

Application Server <your assigned application serv-

er>

System Number 40

InfoProvider IP_CUSTOM

4. Create a new data foundation and create tables and joins automatically.

5. Create a new business layer and create folders and objects automatically.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 133

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

6. Update the necessary object types and ensure that the characteristic descriptions are
available as dimensions.

7. Publish the new business layer.

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW (Relational Universe using BEx Query)

1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.

2. Create a Sales by Division report using Web Intelligence against an SAP BW Universe.

3. Drag the objects Sold to party (Medium Description) and Net Value of Sales Volume EUR
into the Result Objects pane.

4. Navigate through the report.

5. Set Sold to party as a section.

6. Navigate through the report again to see the effect of sections.

7. Remove the sections by undoing your changes.

8. Duplicate the report table.

9. Turn the second table into a column chart.

10. Change the Report Title to Sold To Party - Sales Volume EUR.

11. Save your report in the BusinessObjects Bl platform folder Public Folders —►
Training — ►User Area — ►User # # with the name U## Sold to Party Relational.

134 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 5
Solution 10

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP

BW (Relational Universe)

1. Create a new project called U##_BW_UNX_PROJECT.

a) Start the Information Design tool by following the menu Start —>Information Design
Tool.

b) Select the menu File —►New —>Project to create a new project for your universe.

c) Enter u ##_b w _ u n x _ p r o j e c t as name for the new project and choose Finish.

2. Create a new session, using the information in the following table:

Field Name Value
System <your assigned system>

User user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Select your new project in the Local Projects window.

b) Ensure that the Repository Resources window is visible. If it is not, choose Window
—>Repository Resources.

c) In the Repository Resources window, choose Insert Session from the Insert menu.

d) In the Open Session dialog box that appears, use the information in the table above to
log on.

Client Number 800

User Name user##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 135

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

Field Name Value

Password <your password>

Language EN

System ID RWB

Application Server <your assigned application serv-

er>

System Number 40

InfoProvider IP_CUSTOM

a) Expand server connection node for your assigned server in the Repository Resources
window.

b) From the context menu of the Connections node choose Insert Relational Connection.

c) In the Resource Name field of the New Relational Connection enter

U##_BW_Universe.

d) Choose Next.

e) Select SAP —>SAP BW —►SAP Java Connector (SAP JCo).

f) Choose Next.

g) Use the information in the table above to provide parameters for the SAP NetWeaver
BW connection.

h) Choose Finish.

i) When you are asked if you would like to create a shortcut for your connection, choose
Yes.

j) Select your project, u##_BW_Universe.

k) Choose OK.

4. Create a new data foundation and create tables and joins automatically.
a) Choose File —►New —>Data Foundation.

b) Select your project, U##_BW_Universe.

c) Choose Next.

d) In the Resource Name field, enter u # # _ bw _ d a t a _ f o u n d a t io n as name for the Data

Foundation.

e) Choose Next.

f) Select the Multi-Source-Enabled radio button.

136 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver BW

Note:
The connection to SAP NetWeaver BW is not available using the Single
Source option.

g) Choose Next.

h) You will be asked to logon to your SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise system. Your
credentials should already be entered.

i) Choose Next.

j) Select the shortcut which was created earlier, U##_BW_Universe.cns.

k) Choose Next.

l) Choose Advanced.

m) Ensure that the Automatically create tables and joins (recommended) checkbox is
selected.

n) Choose Finish.
You are presented with a default generated star schema for the selected InfoProvider.

5. Create a new business layer and create folders and objects automatically.
a) Choose File —*• New —>Business Layer.

b) Choose Relational Data Foundation.

c) Choose Next.

d) Choose Next.

e) Enter u##_BW_Business_Layer as name for the business layer.

f) Choose Next.

g) Select BW_Data_Foundation.

h) Ensure the option Automatically create folders and objects for SAP NetWeaver BW
connections (recommended) option is activated.

i) Choose Finish.

6. Update the necessary object types and ensure that the characteristic descriptions are
available as dimensions.
a) On the U##_BW_Business_Layer.blx tab, expand the
U#tt_BW_Business_Layer U##_BW_UNIVERSE -► node.

b) From the context menu of Customer —>Sold to Party —*• Sold to party (Medium
description) , choose Turn into Dimension.

c) From the context menu of Customer —>Region —►Region (Short description) , choose
Turn into Dimension.

d) From the context menu of Customer —>Country —►Country (Short description) ,

choose Turn into Dimension.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 137

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

e) From the context menu of Material —>Material (Medium description) , choose Turn into
Dimension.

f) From the context menu of Material —>Material Group (Short description) .choose Turn
into Dimension.

g) From the context menu of Sales area data —»Distribution Cha nnel —►(Short
description) , choose Turn into Dimension.

h) From the context menu of Sales area data —»Sales Organization (Long description) ,
choose Turn into Dimension.

7. Publish the new business layer.

a) From the context menu of U##_BW_Business_Layer.blx, choose Publish —»To a
Repository.

Note:
If you wish to check the universe's integrity before publishing it, select rules
in the pane on the left and choose Check Integrity.

b) Choose Next.

c) Choose a destination folder by selecting Universes/Training.

d) Choose Finish.

e) Choose Close.

Create a Web Intelligence Document for SAP BW (Relational Universe using BEx Query)
1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.
a) Select Start —►Bl Launchpad <your assigned system>.

b) Choose Applications —> Web Intelligence.

2. Create a Sales by Division report using Web Intelligence against an SAP BW Universe.
a) Choose New section, and then choose Universe.

b) Choose OK.

c) In the Universe dialog box, select U##_BW_Business_Layer.unx and choose Select.

d) Select U##_BW_Universe.

3. Drag the objects Sold to party (Medium Description) and Net Value of Sales Volume EUR
into the Result Objects pane.
a) Expand the U##_BW_Universe node.

b) Expand the Customer node and drag Sold to party into the Result Objects pane.

c) Expand the Measures node and drag Net Value of Sales Volume EUR into the Result
Objects pane.

d) Choose Run Query.

4. Navigate through the report.

5. Set Sold to party as a section.

138 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Web Intelligence Document for SAP NetWeaver BW

a) From the context menu of Sold to party and choose Set as Section.

6. Navigate through the report again to see the effect of sections.

7. Remove the sections by undoing your changes.

a) Choose Undo until the initial report is displayed.

8. Duplicate the report table.

a) From the context menu of the table border, choose Copy.

b) From the context menu of the area next to the table, choose Paste.

9. Turn the second table into a column chart.

a) From the context menu of the duplicated table, choose Turn Into —>Column Chart.

10. Change the Report Title to Sold To Party - Sales Volume EUR.
a) Double-click Report 1 and enter Sold To Party - Sales Volume EUR.

11. Save your report in the BusinessObjects Bl platform folder Public Folders —►
Training —*•User Area —*•User## with the name U## Sold to Party Relational.
a) On the File tab, choose Save —>Save /4s...

b) Navigate to the folder Public Folders —> Training —►User Area —*■User # # and enter the
name U## Sold to Party Relational.

c) Choose Save.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 139

Unit 5: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a SAP BW Web Intelligence Document

140 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 6 SAP Crystal Reports and SAP

NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 142
Exercise 11: Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP BW 153

Lesson 2
Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2015 161

Lesson 3
Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2015 and SAP BW 171
Exercise 12: Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016 and SAP BW 173

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

• Explain data connectivity for SAP Crystal Reports 2016

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 141

Unit 6
Lesson 1

Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for

Enterprise

LESSON OVERVIEW
Create highly formatted and interactive reports in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise. Create
a report based on a universe or create a report by connecting SAP Crystal Reports for
Enterprise to SAP Netweaver BW.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP NetWeaver BW

Report Design in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Note:
This lesson covers SAP Crystal Reports only in the context of SAP BW. The
courses, BOCEIO and BOCE20 provide comprehensive training for SAP Crystal
Reports for Enterprise

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise is a newly designed version of the SAP Crystal Reports
designer.
SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise streamlines the report creation process, provides
significantly better support for the SAP BusinessObjects Semantic Layer, and allows users to
take advantage of better connectivity to SAP BW using Bex Query.
The report design screen of SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise consists of different areas, as
shown in the figure SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Design Environment.

142 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

The following list mentions basic functions of the application:

• Create new, open, save

• Print, export

• Undo, redo

• Cut, copy, paste

• Format painter

Toolbars

Insert Format Data

A Text \ Line n Box | IS Group * o ) Section | H Tot<

Figure 34: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Toolbars

The figure shows the available toolbars.

There are three different toolbars in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise as follows:

Insert
Here you can insert new elements into your report like textboxes, groups, and charts.
Format
Here you find all of the available options for changing the format of an element like font
size, font type, colors, and alignment of the elements.
Data
Here you can edit the query, define sorts, and add interactive filters.

Left Panels
The figure shows the left panel elements.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 143

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

There are different left panels available. Depending on the mode Structure or Page, the
corresponding panels are displayed and others are hidden as follows:

| Figure 35: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Left Panel

Data Explorer
Use the Data Explorer side panel to insert, modify, or delete objects in your report. When
you create a new report or open an existing report, the Data Explorer side panel opens
adjacent to the report canvas. Objects that you add in the Query Pane I are stored in the
Data Explorer where they can be added to the report. The following list mentions possible
objects:

• Result Objects

• Formulas

• Parameters

• Running Totals

• Predefined Objects

You can expand the area by clicking the area name.

Outline
The Outline panel shows the content of the report in a tree view. The root node is the
report itself, while the first-level nodes represent the sections of the report. Within each
section, the report’s objects and elements are listed. You can modify the objects using
the context menu.
Group Tree
The Group Tree panel shows a tree view of groups and subgroups in the report. Any item
you select in the Group Tree is selected on the report canvas.
Search
Use the Search side panel to search the report for any specific value. Type a word or
phrase into the text box and on the keyboard press the Enter key. The search results
appear in the side panel.

Report Sections
The report layout is divided in sections. Each section has its own properties and is used in a
different way. The figure shows the structure of a report.

144 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

See the following list for further details:

Report Header
This area is generally used for the report title and other information you want to appear at
the beginning of the report. It can also be used for charts and crosstabs that include data
for the entire report.
Page Header
This area is generally used for information that you want to appear at the top of each
page, such as chapter names, the name of the document, and other similar information.
This area can also be used to display object titles above the objects on a report.
Body
This area is used for the body of the report, and is printed once for record. The bulk of the
report data generally appears in this section.
Report Footer
This area is used for information you want to appear only once at the end of the report,
such as grand totals, and for charts or crosstabs that include data for the entire report.
Page Footer
This area usually contains the page number and any other information you want to
appear on the bottom of each page.

If a group is added to the report, the program creates two additional sections as follows:

Group Header
This area typically holds the group name object, and can be used to display charts or
crosstabs that include data specific to the group. It is printed once at the beginning of a
group.
Group Footer
This area generally holds the summary value, if any, and can be used to display charts or
cross-tabs. It is printed once at the end of a group.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 145

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Data Sources

New Data Source Connection

Browse SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform S

Choose a data source for your report.

Logged on as: user 12

Data Source Type: SAP BEx Query

Universe £ SAP!
Folders mlSAP BEx Query Access to
El —J Connect** Analysis View connector
SA Com 0 Relational Connection BEx tool tt
Sd Relat jrigi '.u n ir u iuin-------------- Warehous

Figure 37: Data Sources

Crystal Reports supports connecting to the following data sources:

• Universe

• SAP BEx Query

• Analysis view

• Relational connection

The figure Data Sources shows the supported options.

Note:
Before you can connect to a data source, first connect to an SAP Bl Platform
server.

After you have chosen the data source, the Edit Query panel appears. You can now select
elements to include in your query.

Note:
If you connect to an Analysis view, the query panel will not appear because
Analysis views contain predesigned queries. The report canvas will appear.

Hint:

O When you keep the Generate Report flag activated, the system automatically
generates a standard layout of the report. This feature is helpful for basic report
needs. When your report becomes more sophisticated, it might be useful to
deactivate that flag.

Report Elements
A Report consists of different elements. A selection of the most important elements is
described as follows:

Result objects

146 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Result objects are objects that display data from the data source, as shown in the figure
Result Objects. Much of the data displayed on a report is from result objects. Normally,
result objects are placed in the Body area, but under certain circumstances, they are
placed in other sections of the report.

▼ Result Objects

0 □ RWB System Connection

< Division
*■ Sales Volume EUR
▼ Formulas (0)
(empty)
» Parameters (0)
(empty)

Figure 38: Result Objects

Formulas
To display data that is a calculated value, create a formula and place that formula on the
report. For example, if the data source stores only the order dates and ship dates for
orders, but you need to display the number of days it takes to ship the order, create a
formula that will calculate the number of days between ordering and shipping.
Parameters
Parameters allow you to filter report data for specific users. For example, in a report used
by sales people, you might create a parameter that prompts the user to choose a region.
When the user chooses a region, the report returns the results for the specific region
instead of returning the results for all regions.
Running total elements
To display a total that evaluates each record and provides a running sum of all the values
in an object (or all the values in a certain set of values), a running total element is created
and placed in the report. If the first three values in an object are 2, 4, and 6, a running
total would print 2, and then 6 (the sum of 2 + 4), and then 12 (the sum of 2 + 4 + 6).
Predefined objects
Predefined objects include Page Number, Record Number, Group Number, Print Date ,
and Total Page Count objects. Use the commands in the Predefined Objects area of the
Data Explorer side panel to add predefined objects to your report.
Text elements
Text elements are mostly used to hold text, but they can also hold result objects to create
custom form letters and more. You can use text elements to combine result objects,
insert titles, label totals, and other data on your report.
Picture
When designing reports, you may want to include a picture. For example, you may want
to insert a company logo in the Report Header.

Data Format
There are different ways to format your data in a report. The Formatting toolbar includes such
options as font formatting, text formatting and alignment, and highlighting. Database fields
can be formatted to print with the colors, fonts, and attributes that you prefer, as shown in the
figure Data Format. These fields can also be formatted to change the way the data displays on
your report. For example, you might prefer your numbers to be printed with two decimal

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 147

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

places and your dates to be in the North American format. These attributes can be combined.
Using the Formatting Dialog is another, more complex method of formatting.

Figure 39: Data Format

Data Grouping and Sorting

The data can be grouped and sorted. Grouped data is data that is sorted and separated into
meaningful groups, as shown in the figure Data Grouping. For example, a customer list may
be grouped by Postal Code or Region. In a sales report, a group might consist of all orders
placed by a particular customer or orders generated by a particular sales representative.

. Group ^ a ] Section Z Total *

Figure 40: Data Grouping

When data is grouped, the following sort and group direction options are available. Direction
refers to the order in which the values are displayed:

• Ascending order means smallest to largest (1 to 9, A to Z, False to T rue). The program

sorts the records in ascending order and then begins a new group whenever the value
changes.

• Descending order means largest to smallest (9 to 1, Z to A, True to False). The program

sorts the records in descending order and then begins a new group whenever the value
changes.

• Specified order is an order that you customize for your needs. The program places each
record into the custom group that you specify, leaving the records in each group in original
order: or, it sorts them in ascending or descending order, depending on your instructions.

When you sort, Crystal Reports asks you to define two things: the sort direction (ascending or
descending), and the object you want the sort to be based on (sort object). Sort objects let

148 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

you determine the order in which data appears on your report. Almost any object can be used
for sorting, including formulas. An object's data type determines how the data from that
object is sorted.
In single object sorting, all the records used in the report are sorted based on the values in a
single object. Sorting an inventory report by stock number or sorting a customer list by
customer number are examples of single object sorts.
In multiple object sorts, Crystal Reports first sorts the records based on the values in the first
object selected, putting them in ascending or descending order as specified. If two or more
records have a matching object value in the first sort object, the matching records are sorted
by the value in the second sort object. For example, if you choose to sort first by Country and
then by Region, both in ascending order, the report would appear with countries listed in
alphabetic order, and regions within each country listed in alphabetic order. Any other
objects, such as the postal codes within each region, would remain unsorted.

Insight to Action
Insight to Action provides additional functionality to navigate/drill further into the information
provided in Business Intelligence Tools such as Crystal Reports & Dashboards (formerly
known as Xcelsius). Using the Insight to Action framework, an action in a Bl document can
take you to the next logical step in a business process with context, by allowing you to access
related data in an SAP system, launch an internet URL, or another document.
The architecture of Insight to Action consists of the following elements, as shown in the figure
Insight to Action - Architecture:

• Bl Clients

• Bl Platform

• 12A (Insight to Action) Web Services

• Crystal Reports

• Xcelsius

Figure 41: Insight to Action - Architecture

Web Services are hosted to communicate between the actions provided, where SAP RRI
(Report to Report Interface) Receivers are built inside SAP NetWeaver BW and actions are
external data elements. Actions are configured for the reports or dashboards to navigate with
external data elements.
SAP RRI Actions are configured on SAP systems and are supported only on reports based on
BEx queries. When invoking an action from a report object, the data for the object as well as

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 149

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

the entire row of data is passed to the RRI action. RRI actions can use this data in which ever
way is configured and process that data.
Enable Actions in your Crystal Report to use the RRI Actions defined for the Query in the SAP
System. To do so, right-click on the relevant object and choose Enable Action . Once the RRI
Actions are enabled, an icon appears to the right side of the enabled objects when you hover
over them. Clicking the icon will show the list of RRI actions configured in the SAP system. The
relevant BEx query opens. The query shows the data that was included when the action was
invoked.

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Crystal Reports for Enterprise supports connectivity to:

• Universes

• SAPHANA

• Analysis views

• Microsoft SQL Server

• Oracle Database

• Teradata

For more information, see service.sap.com/pam.

Crystal Reports: Supported and Unsupported SAP NetWeaver BW Elements

Table 19: NetWeaverBW Elements Support

This table summarizes Crystal Reports for Enterprise's support for various NetWeaver BW
elements:
BEx Element Crystal Reports for Enterprise (Direct Ac
cess) Support

150 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

BEx Element Crystal Reports for Enterprise (Direct Ac

cess) Support
Hierarchy Variables Yes
Hierarchy Node Variables Yes
Hierarchy Version Variables No
Key Date Variable Yes
Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) No
Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) No
Exceptions (from BEx Query) No
Exception Aggregation Yes
Zero Suppression No
Local Calculations (defined in BEx Query) No
Scaling Factor Yes
Number of Decimals No
Display Options for Characteristics (Key, Key No
& Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, Suppress) No
Placement of Subtotal (above or below no No
des)

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 151

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

152 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6
Exercise 11

Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for

Enterprise and SAP BW

Business Example
In this exercise, you will create a report with SAP BusinessObjects Crystal Reports for
Enterprise using a query from the BW system as datasource. First you want to visualize the
BW hierarchy with a hierarchical group.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.
Visualize a BW Hierarchy with Hierarchical Group in SAP BusinessObjects Crystal
Reports for Enterprise

1. Define a new report against the query Sales by Division [p_ s a l e s _ d i v i s i o n ]

showing Product Hierarchy for Material MARA, and Sales Volume EUR without generating
a report automatically.
Add a new server connection using the following values:
Field Value

Connection Display Name U##_MYSERVER

Bl Platform Web Services Server Name WDFLBMT2065

Username USER##

Authentication SAP

To log on, use the following credentials:

Field Name Value
User name user##

Password <your password>

2. To visualize the hierarchy, define a hierarchical group.

3. Hierarchical groups automatically indent, which adds an indent to the whole group
(Product Hierarchy and Sales Volume EUR). To ensure that Sales Volume EUR is not
indented, delete the automatic group indent and add a formula to only indent the Product
Hierarchy members.

4. Save your report in the Bl Platform server and open it in the Bl Launchpad. To log on, use
the following credentials:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 153

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

Visualize a BW Hierarchy with a Crosstab in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

You want to display the BW hierarchy with a crosstab.

1. Open the SAP Crystal Reports document that you created in task 1. Delete the group and
the sales volume object you created.

2. Insert a crosstab that displays the Product Hierarchy for Material MARA in the rows and
the Delegated Count of Sales Volume EUR as the total.

3. Save your report to the Bl platform server and open it in the Bl launchpad. To log on, use
the following credentials:____________________________________________________
Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

154 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6
Solution 11

Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for

Enterprise and SAP BW

1. Define a new report against the query Sales by Division [p_ s a l e s _ d i v i s i o n ]

showing Product Hierarchy for Material MARA, and Sales Volume EUR without generating
a report automatically.
Add a new server connection using the following values:
Field Value

Connection Display Name U##_MYSERVER

Bl Platform Web Services Server Name WDFLBMT2065

Username USER##

Authentication SAP

To log on, use the following credentials:

Field Name Value
User name user##

Password <your password>

a) Choose Start —* SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.

b) Choose F/7e—> New—> From Data Source....

c) In the Choose a data source type dialog box, choose Browse Repository....

d) In the Connect To Server dialog box, choose Manage Servers....

e) In the Server Connections dialog box, choose Add and enter the values from the
corresponding table.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 155

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

f) In the Connect to Server dialog box, log on with the credentials provided in the table
above. Choose OK.

g) In the Connect To Server dialog box, choose OK.

h) Enter your credentials.

i) In the New Data Source Connection dialog box, in the Data Source Type field, choose
SAP BEx Query.

j) Choose RWB System Connection. Choose Next.

k) In the Select BEx Query dialog box, enter Sales by Division and choose Find
queries. Select the query and choose OK.

l) Drag the following objects from the Universe: P_SALES_DIVISION panel to the Result
Objects for Query #1 panel:

. Material —> Product Hierarchy for material MARA

• Sales volume EUR

m) On the Product Hierarchy for material MARA object, choose the arrow.
The Member Selector dialog box opens.

n) In the Member Selector dialog box, select the Product hierarchy checkbox.

o) In the Product hierarchy context menu, choose Descendents. Choose OK.

p) Deselect the Generate report checkbox. Choose Finish.

2. To visualize the hierarchy, define a hierarchical group.

a) Choose Insert —> Group.

b) Do not change any default values and choose Insert.

c) To change to the Structure view, choose View —* Show Structure.

d) To hide the Body and Group Footer 1 report sections, in the context menu of each
section, choose Hide.

e) Drag Sales Volume EUR to the Group Header 1 section.

f) To avoid unused space in the report, reduce the height of the Group Header 1 section.

g) To change to the Page view, choose View —> Show Structure.

b) To expand Group #1 ,in the grouped by field, choose the arrow.

c) In the Group indent field, change, delete 1 and insert 0. Choose OK.

d) To change to the Structure view, choose View —> Show Structure.

156 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

e) In the Group Header 1 report section, in the GroupName (Product Hierarchy for
material MARA) context menu, choose Format Group Name Element....

f) In the Size and Location panel, next to the X field, choose the Conditional Formula (fx)
button.

g) In the Formula Workshop dialog box, enter:

HierarchyLevel (GroupingLevel
({P_SALES_DIVISION.Material\Product Hierarchy for material
MARA}))*250

Hint:
Instead of typing {P_SALES_DIVISION.Material\Product Hierarchy for
material MARA} you can drag the Product Hierarchy for material MARA
object from Add Object to the Formula Workshop dialog box.

h) Choose Save and Close.

i) In the GroupName (Product Hierarchy for material MARA) dialog box, choose Close.

j) To change to the Page view, choose View —> Show Structure.

4. Save your report in the Bl Platform server and open it in the Bl Launchpad. To log on, use
the following credentials:
Field Name Value
System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Choose File —►Save.

b) Choose Public Folders —> Training —> User Area —> L/ser## .

C) In the Display Name field, enter U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW
hierarchy I.

d) Choose Save.

e) In the Report Contains Saved Data dialog box, choose Save with Data.

f) Choose Start —» Bl Launch Pad <wdflmbt2065>.

g) Log on with the above credentials.

h) Choose the Documents tab.

i) Choose the Folders tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 157

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

j) Choose Public Folder —> T rainings User Area —> User##.

k) Choose U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW hierarchy I.

Visualize a BW Hierarchy with a Crosstab in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

You want to display the BW hierarchy with a crosstab.

1. Open the SAP Crystal Reports document that you created in task 1. Delete the group and
the sales volume object you created.
a) In the SAP Crystal Reports document, to change to the Structure view, choose View —*■
Show Structure.

b) In the Group Header 1 report section, delete all objects.

2. Insert a crosstab that displays the Product Hierarchy for Material MARA in the rows and
the Delegated Count of Sales Volume EUR as the total.
a) Choose Insert —> Cross-tab.

b) In the Row field, choose Product Hierarchy for material MARA and in the Total field,
choose Sales Volume EUR.

c) Choose Insert.

d) Place the crosstab in the report header.

e) To see your result, choose View —►Show Structure.

3. Save your report to the Bl platform server and open it in the Bl launchpad. To log on, use
the following credentials:
Field Name Value

System <your assigned system>

SAP System RWB

SAP Client 800

User Name user##

Password <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Choose F/7e—» Save As....

b) Choose Public Folders—> T rainings User Area —> User##.

C) Save a s U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW hierarchy II.

d) Choose Save.

e) In the Report Contains Saved Data dialog box, choose Save with Data.

f) Choose Start —» All Programs —►Bl Launch Pad<WDFLBMT2065>.

g) Log on with the above credentials.

h) Choose the Documents tab.

i) Choose the Folders tab.

158 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

j) Choose Public Folder —> T rainings User Area —> User##.

k) Choose U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW hierarchy II.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 159

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP NetWeaver BW

160 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6
Lesson 2

Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports

2016

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson is an introduction to report creation and formatting options available with SAP
Crystal Reports 2016.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

Report Creation
When you launch SAP Crystal Reports 2016 the Start Page appears. It displays links to the
reports that were recently opened, various report creation methods, the help system, and
other useful resources. It also allows you to create a new blank report.

SAP Crysta Reports •[Start Page] _ n x

W* JAP vjew Bdp

1 P a * « Ml £ r3 ■Cl < • / o • o • 3 3 * -■ «! 3 . »
□ a n » SI -II -i a’ »• l i i a 11 a m ■ , A • J • ■-< m >91 * • •» g t I a a 11» d p i /« □ J .j
rlB a O » < ' ■ QO
Mart Pope x
1
SAP CRYSTAL REPORTS SET
START A NEW REPORT MY RECENT REPORTS
►Blank report ►Comparative irco m e Statem...nbmt206S,RWB~800/USER!2)
►Report wizard * Open M e
* C ro w -tab report wizard
►Mailing label report wizard
* OLAP Cube Report Wizard

INTERNET CONNECTION NOT DETECTED

Connect to the internet to access onfcne Crystal Reports resources,
including product add-ons, samples, and the latest product updates.

J
fo r H^p, prest PI fT ^l
Figure 42: Report creation in SAP Crystal Reports 2016

There are three ways to create a new report with Crystal Reports using these methods:

• Use a Report Wizard: Wizards, which are also known as Experts, provide a step-by-step
process for creating reports of a chosen type.

• Construct the report manually: you can start with a blank report and build its elements
from scratch.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 161

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Create a report from another report: if you have an existing report that contains much of
the information and formatting you need, you can use it as a template and adjust any
elements that are not correct.

SAP Crystal Reports 2016 Data Sources

Regardless of which method you use to create a new report, the first step to specify a data
source. This data source can come from an existing connection or a new one.

Figure 43: The Database Expert•

If you choose to use a blank report as the basis of your new report, the Database Expert opens
automatically. The options in the Database Expert are:

• My Connections: this folder shows all data sources that you are currently connected to.

• Create New Connection: this folder contains various data source options. These can be
server-based, as in the case of SQL Server or an SAP system, or local, as in the case of
Microsoft Access.

Note:
SAP Crystal Reports 2016 enables you to connect to many different relational or
OLAP data sources - see the SAP Crystal reports 2016 user guide for detailed
information.

When you choose Create New Connection in the Database Expert, you are invited to enter
connection details and then to add one or more tables for your report.
If your report contains data from two or more database tables, you will need to link them,
using a field that is common to both. You can do so in the Links tab of the Database Expert.
The Auto Link option automatically chooses links for your tables based on common fields.

162 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

Basic Functions
To create a report you have to select fields from the data source and decide how to position
and size them. Once you have placed fields or objects in your report, you may want to change
their appearance. Crystal Reports enables you to change many of the formatting attributes.

The table fields of the selected data source appear in the Field Explorer area in Crystal
Reports (dimension and measure objects from OLAP sources will also be displayed as
'Fields'). You can drag and drop objects from the Field Explorer to sections in the Design area,
such as Header or Details . The steps for adding objects are as follows:

1. After selecting a data source, choose View —►Field Explorer to show the Field Explorer
area. To speed the report building process, the Field Explorer remains on screen until you
close it. You can move it wherever you want.

2. Expand the Database Fields folder to see all the tables that have been chosen from the
database.

3. Expand the respective nodes in the Field Explorer and select the object you want to appear
in the report. Drag it into the report or choose Insert to Report from its context menu. A
checkmark appears next to an object that is used in the report.

Special Fields
Special fields contain information that is not included in the database, but is useful to the
overall presentation quality of the report. They can be found in the Field Explorer area under
the node Special Fields .

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 163

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

B £ Special Fields
<£-> Content Locale
c tj Current CE User ID
a=> Current CE User Name
a=> Current CE User Tme Zone
a=3 Data Date
o=j Data Time
a=i Data Time Zone
a=j Fie Author
a=3 Ffc Creation Date
ccj Fie Path and Name
'■ ~1 I t r n m U i m k e r

Figure 45: Special fields

Some of the more commonly used special fields are

• Page N of M: prints the current page number of the total number of pages.

• Page Number: prints the current page number.

• Print Date: prints the current date.

• Report Title.

Positioning and Resizing

In Crystal Reports you can position and reposition objects at pixel level to create the desired
report layout. You can move an object by dragging it to the desired position. To resize an
object, select it and then drag one of the handles on the broken line frame that appears.

| Figure 46: The Object Size and Position dialog box*•

Another way to resize an object is choose Size and Position from its context menu. In the Size
and Position dialog box you can define the position on the X and Y axis and define Width and
Height very precisely.

Select Expert
In most reports you need to filter the records that are displayed by dimension or measure
values. For example, you may only want to see values for a particular division or only the order
volumes that are greater than a million euros. You can filter - or 'select1- records using the
Select Expert.
Use one of these three methods to open Select Expert:

• Choose Select Expert on the Expert Tools toolbar.

• Choose the menu item Report —>Select Expert from the menu.

• From the context menu of a field in the report, choose Select Expert.

The first step in record selection is to define your criteria for selection. You may want to view
reports from a particular area or from a particular date range. Using the drop-down list, you
can build selection criteria that meet your needs.

164 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

Figure 47: The Select Expert

Depending on the field you select the drop-down list offers options such as:

• is equal to

• is one of/is not one of

• is greater than/is less than

• is greater than or equal to /is less than or equal to

• is between/is not between

• is like/is not like (allows use of wildcard characters ? and •* )

• is in the period/is not in the period

Sorts and Groups

If you do not specify a sort order, Crystal Reports sorts the records in the default order, that is
the order in which they appear in the Field Explorer. The default sort direction is ascending.
To specify a sort order, use the Record Sort Expert which you can open by choosing
Report —►Record Sort Expert... —>
Groups
There are many scenarios in which it makes sense to break data into meaningful groups. For
example, you may want to group all the customers from one country together. Crystal
Reports allows not just groups but nested groups - that is, groups within groups. You can have
groups within groups. For example, you can create a report of all customers, broken down by
country, with each country broken down by region.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 165

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

Figure 48: The Insert Group dialog box.

Reports

Table 20: Report without Grouping

The following table shows how a particular report looks without grouping applied:
Country Customer Sales Volume

Germany Schmidt 2000

Germany Maier 1000
Germany Schulz 800
USA Smith 2000
USA Jones 500
USA Taylor 1000
Total 7300

Table 21: Report with Grouping

The following table shows the same report with grouping applied:
Country Customer Sales Volume
Germany Schmidt 2000
Maier 1000
Schulz 800
Germany Total 3800
USA Smith 2000
Jones 500
Taylor 1000
USA Total 3500
Report Total 7300

166 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

Groups
Crystal Reports can also summarize the information in each group. You can group
information based on report fields, on fields that are not in the report, and on formula fields.
When you group records, you add new areas to your report. These new areas are visible in the
left margin of the Design window. Once you have created a group, a Group Header and Group
Footer surround the Details area. Each group you create has its own header and footer. Note
also that when you insert a group, the Group Name field is automatically created in the Group
Header.
To insert a Group, follow these steps:

1. Choose Insert —►Group in the menu to open the Group Expert.

2. In the first drop-down list, select the field you want to group on. You get a new group for
every change in this value.

3. Select a sorting option from the second drop-down list.

4. When you have finished defining your group(s), choose OK. The dialog box closes and
returns to the report.

5. Preview your report.

Data Summary
One of the primary purposes for breaking data into groups is to run calculations on each
group of records instead of all records in the report. When Crystal Reports summarizes data,
it sorts the data, breaks it into groups, and then summarizes the values in each group
automatically.

| Figure 49: Inserting a data summary *•

Depending on the data type of the field you plan to summarize, you can:

• Sum the values in each group.

• Count all the values or only those values that are distinct from one another.

• Determine the maximum, minimum, average, or Nth largest value.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 167

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Perform various calculations.

To insert a summary follow these steps:

1. Choose Insert —►Summary.

2. Select the desired field to summarize.

3. Select a summary operation.

4. Select a location (i.e. a section of the Report) in which to place the summary.

Formatting Toolbar
The Formatting toolbar includes options such as font formatting, text formatting and
alignment, and highlighting. Database fields can be formatted to print with the colors, fonts,
and attributes that you prefer. Fields can also be formatted to change the way the data
displays on your report.

For example, you might prefer your numbers to be printed with two decimal places and your
dates to be in the North American format. These attributes can be combined.

SAP Crystal Reports 2016 Charts

Crystal Reports enables you to include sophisticated, colorful charts in your reports. You will
typically chart on summary and subtotal information at the group level. Each chart becomes
an object on your report, and therefore can be moved, resized, and so on. Not all chart styles
work with all data. For example, a report that shows the total sales for each state would make
a good pie chart but a meaningless stacked bar chart, since only one series of data exists.
On the other hand, if you had a report that showed inventory levels of certain items for each
quarter of the year, that information would make an excellent stacked bar chart, but a poor
single pie chart. A chart's position determines what data is displayed and where it is printed.
For example, if you place a chart in the Report Header section, the chart includes data for the
entire report. If you place it in a Group Header or Group Footer section, the chart displays
group-specific data.

168 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

| Figure 51: Adding a chart

Follow these steps to insert a chart into a report:

1. Choose Insert —>C hart.

2. Position the top-left corner of the frame in the desired location for the new chart.

3. Depending on where you place the chart, the Chart Expert may open automatically or you
may need to choose Chart Expert from the the chart's context menu. The Chart Expert
allows you to select the chart type and the data that is visualized in it. It also allows you to
change the formatting of the chart elements.

4. When you have finished customizing the chart, choose OK .

Graphical Elements
If you want to make specific data or summaries stand out from the rest of the report or just
want to improve the overall appearance, you can incorporate graphic elements. When
working with graphic elements, you may prefer to work in the Design area: it is easier to
ensure that graphic elements such as lines, boxes, and pictures are positioned correctly.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 169

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

Insert j Format Qatabase

(S Text Object
E Summary...
Field Headng
^ort Control...

IS Group...
% QLAP Grid...

G3 Cross-Tab...
Subreport...
\ Line
□ Box
n Picture...

y Chart...

OLE Object...

Template Field Object

Figure 52: Incorporating graphical elements

These are the graphical elements that you can use:

• Text Objects

• Lines

• Boxes

• Pictures

To format graphical elements open the Format Editor in the context menu of the relevant
element.

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:•

• Create a report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

170 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6
Lesson 3

Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports

2016 and SAP BW

LESSON OVERVIEW
Use SAP Crystal Reports 2016 to create a report by connecting to SAP NetWeaver BW.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Explain data connectivity for SAP Crystal Reports 2016

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP Crystal Reports 2016

• SAP Crystal Reports 2016 supports data connectivity to a number of databases, including
the following:

- SAP BW

- SAPHANA

- SAP IQ

- IBM DB2

Microsoft Access

Microsoft SQL Server

Microsoft SQL Server Analysis Services

- Oracle Database

- Oracle Hyperion

- MySQL

Neteeza

For a complete list of supported databases and versions, please reference the Product
Availability Matrix (PAM) at service.sap.com/pam.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 171

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

172 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6
Exercise 12

Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

and SAP BW

Business Example
You have been asked to generate a report in SAP Crystal Reports 2016 using BW as a data
source. When prompted to logon, use the credentials provided in the table below:

Field Name Value

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Open SAP Crystal Reports 2016.

2. Create a new report based on the query Material Details [p _ m a t e r i a l _ d e t a i l ].

3. Select the fields for your report from the Field Explorer and drag the fields to the detail
area.

4. Preview your report.

5. Save the report to the Bl Platform.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 173

Unit 6
Solution 12

Create a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016

and SAP BW

Business Example
You have been asked to generate a report in SAP Crystal Reports 2016 using BW as a data
source. When prompted to logon, use the credentials provided in the table below:

Field Name Value

Client 800

User user##

Password <your password>

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Open SAP Crystal Reports 2016.

a) Choose Start —►SAP Crystal Reports 2016.

2. Create a new report based on the query Material Details [p _ m a t e r i a l _ d e t a i l ].

a) Choose SAP —>Create New Report from a Query.

b) In the SAP Logon window, select RWB[SPACE] and choose OK.

c) In the SAP Logon at RWB[SPACE] window, enter the credentials provided in the table
above.

d) In the Select Query for your Crystal Report window, choose the Find tab.

e) Use the search field to search for the query Material Details.

Note:
You can search for a query using either its description or its technical
name. Just choose your preferred option using either the Search in
Description or Search in Technical Name radio button.

f) In the results list, select Material Details and choose Open.

3. Select the fields for your report from the Field Explorer and drag the fields to the detail
area.
a) If the Field Explorer not already visible, choose View —►Field Explorer.

174 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Report with SAP Crystal Reports 2016 and SAP BW

b) To show descriptions for the fields, choose File —>Options —* Database and select the
Show Descriptions radio button, then choose OK.

c) In the Field Explorer, expand the Database Fields. Material Details, Key Figures and
Material nodes.

d) From the Material node, drag Material (Medium Name) to the Details section of the
report.

e) From the Key Figures node, drag Order Entry Quantity to the Details section of the
report.

4. Preview your report.

a) Choose View —►Preview Sample.

b) In the Preview Sample dialog box, select the All records radio button and choose OK.

5. Save the report to the Bl Platform.

a) Choose S-4P —>Save Report As...

b) In the Save a Crystal Report to BW window, navigate to Roles —>Role##.

c) Enter a description and technical name for your report in the appropriate fields, and
then choose OK.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 175

Unit 6: SAP Crystal Reports and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Explain data connectivity for SAP Crystal Reports 2016

176 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 6

Learning Assessment

1. Which is not a connectivity option for Crystal Reports for Enterprise?

Choose the correct answer.

I A Universes

B BICS

| C Live Office

D Analysis views

2. Which of these is not a connectivity option for SAP Crystal Reports 2016?
Choose the correct answer.

| A Microsoft SQL Server

B SAP BW InfoSets

| C Universes

D Text files

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 177

Unit 6

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Which is not a connectivity option for Crystal Reports for Enterprise?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Universes

B BICS

[~x| C Live Office

D Analysis views

2. Which of these is not a connectivity option for SAP Crystal Reports 2016?
Choose the correct answer.

| A Microsoft SQL Server

B SAP BW InfoSets

C Universes

\x \ D Text files

178 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 7 SAP BusinessObjects D<esign

Studio and SAP NetWeaiver BW

Lesson 1
Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio 180
Exercise 13: Create an Analytical Application with Tabstrip Layout and Filter Panel 193

Lesson 2
Creating an Analytical Application with Scripting 201
Exercise 14: Create an Analytical Application 205
Exercise 15: Create an Analytic Application using the Design Studio Ready to Run 207
Template

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create an analytical application

• Write script to enable flexible user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 179

Unit 7
Lesson 1

Creating an Analytical Application in SAP

BusinessObjects Design Studio

LESSON OVERVIEW
Create an analytical application for web browsers and mobile devices using SAP
BusinessObjects Design Studio.
Use Design Studio to add a data source to the application, modify the initial state of the data
source, and choose the layout of the components in the application.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create an analytical application

SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

Note:
This lesson covers SAP Design Studio only in the context of SAP BW. The courses,
BOD310 and BOD320 cover comprehensive training for SAP Design Studio.

SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio enables application designers to create analysis

applications and dashboards for browsers and mobile devices (iPhones and iPads) on top of
BW and SAP HANA data sources.
It is the product of choice when full support for BW and HANA data models and engine
capabilities is required. The product offers a design tool that allows you to create applications
in an easy and intuitive way without the need for native HTML and mobile Ul programming
skills.

180 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio can be used both locally and integrated in the Bl
platform. In local mode, you can create first analysis applications for presenting and
evaluating SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio with users at customer side. When you add a
data source to your application it gets represented as a data source alias. A data source alias
represents an instance of a data source (for example, a BW query, or an SAP HANA data
source) at runtime of the application. A single application can contain multiple instances of
one data source. Every instance, for example, can apply its own filters on the same data
source and thus represents its own subset of data.
You can see the list of components and data source aliases used in an application in the
outline view of the design tool.
Design Studio 1.6 now also supports the so-called Main part of the SAPUI5 library (sometimes
just referred as “ m” , these are controls in name space sap.m of SAPUI5). The Main (m) part
was developed having the mobile use case in focus; those components are therefore
specialized for mobile devices.
However, the usage of the SAP UI5 m library is not restricted to mobile scenarios; it also
supports desktop applications. In order to adjust the visualization accordingly, there are two
form factors for the m mode: the compact for the desktop and the cozy form factor with more
spacing and padding for mobile use cases.

How IT and Business Users use SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

Ml IT
£l ® M
X
* *
— ► .Mill
-
1
:
Create &
Deploy
T" \ A T
DESIGN STUDIO Custom Apps

Analyze, Explore,
Modify (optional) Re-Compose,
Personalize & Share

Personal Views &

Deploy
Self-Service
Dashboards
Standard Apps for Analysis, Standard Apps
Exploration & Self-Service (out-of-the-box)
Dashboards

Design Studio design tool (Eclipse)

Design Studio Technology Design Studio app (HTML5)
Design Studio bookmark (HTML5)

Figure 54: How IT and Business Users use SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 181

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

Chart Picker Filter Area

X
Menu ■

fry Ptooua CiMgar, ana Rapon iMaratcfty «

«jH
d table
; view, chart view and

Navigation Panel

ictionality \
Settings for charts / Action Area
table

Figure 55: Design Studio Interface*•

Design Studio contains the following interface elements:

• Menu

• Filter Area

• Navigation Area

• Settings Area for chart and table

• Data Area including table view, chart view and table/chart view

• Action Area

New Components
Design Studio contains the following new components:

Data Connection

New Navigation Panel

Filter Line

Chart Type Picker

Enhanced Context Menu

Enhanced Bookmark functionality

With SAP Business objects Design Studio, you can analyze and visualize data with the
following functions:

• Filter data on the dimensions

• Use pivottables

• Visualize data with BW hierarchies

• Use standard context menu

• Use report-report interface / open document

182 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

• Create different visualizations for story composition

• Visualize several data sources and display them in one story

Once you have created your visualization and story, you can share the stories with others in
the following ways:

• Save to the Bl Platform with document level security

• Share a PDF export of a story

• Share a URL link to the story

Example: Data Exploration & Visualization App

• • • • • • • • • •
H H i in H I III H I IMIlil~ * HIM
Analytical Applications on BW AdHoc Analysis on BW

Design Studio Design Studio & Lumira

Professional Environment for Designers & Lumira Desktop: BW Data Acquisition
Q)
3o Developers to Create Purpose-Built Apps
Standard Design Studio Apps for
§ Planning Support
• Self-Service Data Analysis
-Q Mobile Support
• Data Exploration & Visualization
i • SDKs
Standard Apps & Templates
Robust & Enterprise Ready

Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office

03
O IT / Develops, Data Analysts, Business Users
€
O Excel-based Analysis & Planning
0=
o
Integrated Roadmap with EPM Excel Client
8
b
PowerPoint Integration
§
Trusted Data Discovery with BW workspaces

Figure 56: Example: Data Exploration and Visualization App

Analytical Application Use Cases and Target Groups

Table 22: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio 1.2 Target Groups and Use Cases
The following table outlines the SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio target groups and use
cases:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 183

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

Target Group Use Cases

Individual contributor and business user • Consume and interact with information
using prepared analysis applications and
dashboards.

• Provide navigation for further analysis us

ing product interoperability.

• Follow guided analysis using pre-built

Business Intelligence (Bl) applications.

• Analyze information on the desktop, via

browser, and via mobile devices.

Senior management
• Analyze and review corporate Key Per
formance Indicators (KPIs) and measure
progress towards set goals.

• Analyze information on the desktop, via

browser, and via mobile devices.

Executive
• Track and analyze company-wide metrics
using real time interactive dashboards.

• Analyze information on the desktop, via

browser, and via mobile devices.

Initial View
The Initial View window allows you to modify the initial state of any data source (BW, SAP
HAN A, Universes). To access it, choose Edit Initial View from the context menu of the data
source alias in the Outline view (or choose Reset Initial View if you have already changed the
initial view). You can change the following data in the initial state of a data source:

• The dimensions on the rows/columns and their order

• The measures displayed in the result set

• The dimensions in the background filter

For each measure you can change:

• The number of decimal places displayed

• The scaling factor used

• How totals are calculated

• The sorting order

For each dimension you can change:

• The additional result set attributes to be displayed

• The active hierarchy (if available) and its initial expansion level

• A member to be filtered (filter members)

184 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

The filter by input string

The member presentation (text, key, text/key, key/text)

The totals display mode (show, hide, hide if only one member)

bcJ>asic/8ICS_FOODMA... IQ Column* Irve Preview (paused) 2 Psuse Refresh

Medium a Measures
Product a? Store Sales / Unit Sales * store_cost 4*
addressl Store Sales
Herat® Avocado Dip 219.42 69.00 82.13
buthdate
i—----------
144.54 66.00 57.15
Customer custom erjd Remove
ied Tuna m Water BOM 63.00 33JO
Customer City city 17136 62.00 70.46
Decimal Places a P
Customer Name nam e
Scaling Factor ► Puffs 180.42 62.00 72.09
Education education
First Name ‘ r»nre Calculate Totals As ream Sandaach 174.80 60.00 70.51
II Rows
Gender lender Sort > Ascending 113.28 59.00 44.70
Marital Status 106.56 59.00 44.78
Decending
Product product.*!
Nations* Fa s t s 149.86 59.00 59.86
Product Name proouct_name
FafeAous Berry Xace 41.30 59.00 15.74
SW>
Store store.*! Fort West Chocolate Chp Cookies 91.45 59X0 36J6
Stort City store.crty Red Wing Paper Cups 103J4 58.00 39.54
Store Name store.name
Atomic ftutWe Gun 189.81 57X0 77.93
3U 5 57.00 12J2
Y Background Filter NaOoree! B8Q Potato Ch<* 78.09 57X0 31.59

Frter Members... og Substitute 213.18 57.00 83.27

filter by InputStnng... eat Bread 104.72 56.00 40.50

Select AH Members Lhl; Home Magaane 120.40 56X0 47.51

ty 75 Watt U^itbutt) 123.76 56.00 49.02

Member O f play
Abuts 49.28 56.00 20.14
Totals Display

_ Crosstab Chart

OK * Create Crosstab ( OK ♦ Create Chart

Figure 57: Design Studio Initial View

You can see the effects of your changes in a live preview - either in a crosstab or in a chart.
Both views are refreshed after each change. If you switch to the chart preview, you can also
specify the chart type and the Swap Axes and Show Totals properties to find the chart
presentation best suited for your specific view on the data source.

If many small changes need to be performed in a row, you can pause all browser refreshes
using the checkbox Pause Refresh in the upper right corner of the window. Reactivate
rendering once all changes are made.
SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio offers you a set of standard (blank and predefined) and
ready-to-run templates that serve various design and business needs. When you choose a
template, the system automatically creates a copy of it. You can change the copy according
to your needs.
Depending on the rendering mode, you can choose between different templates:

• SAPUI5 mode (SAPUI5 Namespace sap.ui commons)

- Standard Templates

■ Blank

■ Basic Analysis Layout (new)

■ Basic Layout (new)

■ Planning Layout (updated)

Ready-To-Run Templates

■ Data Discovery and Visualization

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 185

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

■ Generic Analysis (updated)

■ Online Composition (updated)

• SAPUI5 m (SAPUI5 Namespace sap.m)

- Blank (new)

- Basic Layout (new)

Layout
Design Studio allows tree-form layouting with the following features:

• WYSIWYG design principle

• Pixel-exact layouting

• Dynamic layouting via docking position

• Proportional grid layouting

Ul components provide a set of specific events that the application user can execute. For
example, every button provides an 'on click' event. You can see a list of components available
events in its Properties view. From there, you can open the script editor and specify which
actions should take place when the application user triggers the event.
The Design Studio script language is a subset of JavaScript and allows a sequence of script
API method calls to be defined. The script API provides access at runtime to the application
itself as well as to its components and data source aliases. Therefore, the application designer
has flexible control of the application behavior by using event scripts.

• :« v G-
—Cooycnidi : “n

lbOwl
Component*
□ Cfpntae
1 SAP GCO Global Forecast Dashboard
□
BoutComponent*
— 1button
0 OtecUxM
"5 OneField EsttnaMm • V 154 00
1 hOiopdon— Bo*
Bbnope •L MOO
• InputField
hBbdin Oowtti : I
S RadioButtonGroup
TTa* AORMForecast O 54 00 %
ConUfmComponeitti
_)6nSl»,«ut UpsK* ; * \9 :
Piqebool
f. TeMrp
Nortti Am*nca(>ri MC) LjOn AmoncJ(»iKK) EMEA (in MC) n MC)

C&vnalM • $59.50 9 | 544 00 # i • 122 50 23300 167.21

?--(’
Outline - n
[ rV, . vw w fC 689.50 J i 233 00 167.21
V 5*4 00 * t; : 122
J 5 DCMD_AWtM_C€8
» D«U Scur«i
i ' 0D.K.m.CM.Q00n Gro»*i 11600 # L 57.00 # ; : V 42.00 127 00 111.15
i OO.fC.MW.CW.QOOM
s OO.K.MW.CM.QOOOl
* OO.K.WV.CM.QOOOl
ADRMFC • 53oo :+ | V 37 70 # : j O 4 00 360 36 )0
ic?Layout
J MIAMR.GMD Ups-oe : 524.00 # */ 652 00 * . ; 126 75
• aU 'll
f titinun
• HfAcnt.mu
* rMCf.GCOlOC
HI1FTTINGS.BUTT

huwl Accen:Ok Trnet06 * loed

Figure 58: Layout in Design Studio

Applications in Design Studio

SAP delivers pre-defined templates which can be used to easily create simple or complex
applications. These templates are optimized for desktop browsers, iPhones and iPads.
Applications created in Design Studio can be easily integrated into the SAP BusinessObjects
Bl Mobile Solution. Before users can access analysis applications on a mobile device, you

186 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

need to assign the analysis applications to the 'Mobile' category on the Bl platform. To do this
follow these steps:

1. In the Bl Launch Pad, open the folder that contains the analysis application that you want
to assign to the mobile category.

2. Select the analysis application, and choose More Actions —*• Categories.

3. In the Categories dialog box, choose the Mobile category.

4. Choose OK.

To simplify testing, you can create a QR Code and scan that with you mobile device, rather
than publishing the analytical application to the Bl Platform server.
To create a QR code, choose Send to iPad. The dialog box QR Code is displayed with the URL
of the current application encoded. This code can then be scanned with your mobile device.

Architecture

Caution:

A On the Bl Platform Server you need at least version 4.0 SP5 to be able to install
the Design Studio Platform Add-On.

Caution:

A The Design Environment on the client PC required Java 1.6 or 1.7 and Microsoft
Internet Explorer 9.0.

When you use the SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform deployment option your administrator
has to create OLAP data source connections to SAP HANA systems or to SAP NetWeaver BW
systems containing business data before you can choose a connection from the Bl Platform
Server.
The following graphic illustrates the architectural structure when the deployment platform is
Bl:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 187

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

Consumer Designer

Figure 59: Architecture for Bl deployment

Architecture for NetWeaver Deployment

This graphic shows the architecture for the NetWeaver Platform:

Consumer Designer

Figure 60: Architecture for NetWeaver deployment

Connections represent SAP NetWeaver BW or SAP HANA systems. Connections have to be

active if you want to select a data source and use it immediately. However, you can also work
with inactive connections when designing and validate the data sources for this connection
later when the connection is active. The connection is automatically active when the backend
system (SAP HANA or SAP NetWeaver BW) is up and running.

188 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

Note:
You can see all created connections in the design tool by choosing
Tools —>Preferences —►Backend Connections. To display recently defined
connections in the corresponding table, choose Reload All Connections.

Architecture for Local Mode

There is a third option - local mode, for prototyping only:

Designer

| Figure 61: Architecture for local mode

When you launch SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio after installation, it starts in local mode
by default. Local mode can be used to create your first analysis applications for presenting
and evaluating SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio with users at a customer site. You can
save the analysis applications on your local system.
Technical prerequisites are minimal when integration to the Bl platform is not an issue. The
key users of a company - possibly together with consultants - can investigate if SAP
BusinessObjects Design Studio is able to cover their requirements regarding data analysis
and reporting. The full Bl platform requirements need only be met following a successful
evaluation phase and a decision to implement SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio.
As soon as the Bl platform infrastructure has been set up by the administrator, you can easily
switch the default startup mode in the Preferences dialog box and connect to the Bl platform.
Next, you can upload your locally saved analysis applications to the Bl platform.

Caution:

A Local mode not designed for offline usage of the design tool. You should not use
it for downloading analysis applications from the Bl platform, changing and
saving them locally, and then uploading the applications again to the Bl platform.

Table 23: Design Studio BEx Element

BEx Element Design Studio

InfoProvider Dimension No

Characteristics Yes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 189

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element Design Studio

Key Figures Yes

Free Characteristics Yes

Restricted Key Figures Yes

Calculated Key Figures Yes

Display Attributes Yes

Navigational Attributes Yes

BEx Query Filter Yes

BEx Query Filter (Default Values) Yes

Compounded Characteristics Yes

Information about configured Filters in the Yes

BEx Query

BEx Text Elements Yes

Support for Conversion EXIT Yes

Optional Variables Yes

Mandatory Variables Yes

Characteristic Value Variables Yes

Formula Variables Yes

Hierarchy Variables Yes

Hierarchy Node Variables Yes

Hierarchy Version Variable Yes

Key Date Variable Yes

Text Variables Yes

Variable Processing Type: User Entry / De Yes

fault Value

Variable Processing Type: Replacement Path Yes

Variable Processing Type: Customer / SAP Yes

Exits

Support for manual entry of values Yes

Support for Variables in Defaults Area of BEx Yes

Query

Support for single Key Date Variable Yes

190 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

BEx Element Design Studio

Support for multiple Key Date Variables in Yes

single BEx Query

Support for Hierarchy / Hierarchy Node Vari Yes

able dependency

Support for cascading variables for Com Yes

pounded Characteristics

Support for Variable Default Values Yes

Support for Variable Variants No

Support for Variable Personalization No

Currency / Unit Conversion (defined in BEx Yes

Query)

Currency / Unit Conversion (defined in the Bl Yes

client)

Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) Yes

Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) Yes

Conditions for fixed set of characteristics Yes

(from BEx Query)

Condition for independent characteristics Yes

(from BEx Query)

Defining Conditions in the report No

Exceptions (defined in BEx Query) Yes

Defining Exceptions in the report Yes

Constant Selection Yes

Cell Editor Calculation Yes

Local calculations (defined in BEx Query) Yes

Exception Aggregation Yes

Zero Suppression Yes

Scaling Factor Yes

Reverse Sign (+ /-) Yes

Number of Decimals Yes

Hide / Show the Element Yes

Sort Characteristics Yes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 191

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element Design Studio

Display Options for characteristics (Key, Key Yes

& Text, Text)

Result Rows (Show, Suppress) Yes

Placement of subtotal (above / below nodes) Yes

Support for Hierarchies with Linked Nodes Yes

Support for time-dependent Hierarchies Yes

Support for time-dependent Hierarchy Struc Yes

tures

Support for Hierarchies with Temp Join Yes

Show specific Hierarchy Levels Yes

Support for Hierarchies with Linked Nodes Yes

Support for time-dependent Hierarchies Yes

Support for time-dependent Hierarchy Struc Yes

tures

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported SAP BW elements, refer
to SAP Note 1869560.

192 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 7
Exercise 13

Create an Analytical Application with Tabstrip

Layout and Filter Panel

Business Example
The requesting business department wants to filter the data in the application and separate it
into tabs. The charts should be displayed with a slide transition effect.

Create an Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

1. Start SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and create an analysis application called
APP01_USER##.

2. Create a data source based on the P_ORDERS_001 query.

3. Create a pie chart showing the Incoming Orders EUR key figure for each Country.

4. Create a line chart showing the Incoming Orders EUR measure for each Calendar Year.
Create a copy of the existing data source and edit its Initial View so that it shows the data
needed for the chart. Create the chart object.

5. Create a table showing the Incoming Orders EUR key figure for the Country, Region, and
Division characteristics. Create a copy of the data source with the alias d s _3 and edit its
Initial View so that it shows the data needed for the chart. Create the chart object.

6. Rearrange the components used in the layout area so that the two charts are on top and
next to each other, and the table is located below the charts. Save your application and
execute it locally.

Add Tabstrip Layout and Filter Panel to Your Analytical Application

Rename tabs of the application to Overview and Analysis. On the Overview tab the charts
should be displayed with a sliding transition effect. On the Analysis tab there should be a
Dimension Filter component for the data source DS_3 and the crosstab component.

1. Launch Design Studio and open the application APP01_U## .

2. Add the Tabstrip component and change the following attribute values:

© Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Set Top Margin to 0

• Set Left Margin to 0

• Set Bottom Margin to 0

• Set Right Margin to 0

• Set Width to auto

• Set Height to auto

3. Add a Pagebook component to the Overview tab that shows the two existing charts with a
horizontal slide effect.

4. Arrange a new Filter Panel component for the data source DS_3 and the existing
CROSSTAB_l component on the second tabstrip. Use a Grid Layout component to align
both items.

5. Save your application with the name APP02_USER# # and execute it locally.

194 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 7
Solution 13

Create an Analytical Application with Tabstrip

Layout and Filter Panel

Business Example
The requesting business department wants to filter the data in the application and separate it
into tabs. The charts should be displayed with a slide transition effect.

Create an Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

1. Start SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and create an analysis application called
APP01_USER##.
a) Choose Start —►Design Studio.

b) If prompted, enter your password.

c) Choose Create Analysis Application.

d) Enter a p p o i _ user ## as the application name.

e) Choose Basic Layout.

f) Choose Create.

2. Create a data source based on the P_ORDERS_001 query.

a) From the Data Sources context menu in the Outline view, choose Add Data Source.

b) Choose the Browse button next to the Connection field.

c) Choose RWB System Connection and choose OK.

d) Logon with your credentials.

e) Choose the Browse button next to the Data Source field.

f) In the Search for field of the Search tab, enter p_ orders_ 001 to search for the query,
and choose OK.

g) Choose OK to finish adding the data source.

3. Create a pie chart showing the Incoming Orders EUR key figure for each Country.
a) From the P_ORDERS_001- DS_1 context menu in the Outline view, choose Edit Initial
View...

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 195

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

b) Drag Sold to party out of the Rows area, and drag Country into the Rows area.

c) Expand the Measures node into the Columns view and remove all measures except
Incoming Orders EUR.

d) Choose OK.

e) Drag the Chart component from the Analytic Components section of the Components
view onto the canvas.

f) Select the chart.

g) Under the Data Binding heading in the chart's Properties view, select DS_1 from the
Data Source dropdown list.

h) Under the Display heading, select Pie from the Chart Type dropdown list.

b) From the Data Sources context menu in the Outline view, choose Paste. A new data
source, P_ORDERS_001-DS_2 is created.

c) From the newly-created data source P_ORDERS_001-DS_2 context menu, choose Edit
Initial View...

d) Replace Country with Calender Year in the Rows area.

e) Choose OK.

f) Drag the Chart component from the Analytic Components section of the Components
view onto the canvas.

g) Select the chart.

h) Under the Data Binding heading in the chart's Properties view, select DS_2 from the
Data Source dropdown list.

i) Under the Display heading, select Line from the Chart Type dropdown list.

j) Under the Display heading, select True from the Swap Axes dropdown list.

5. Create a table showing the Incoming Orders EUR key figure for the Country, Region, and
Division characteristics. Create a copy of the data source with the alias ds_ 3 and edit its
Initial View so that it shows the data needed for the chart. Create the chart object.
a) From the P_ORDERS_001 -DS_1 context menu in the Outline view, choose Copy.

b) From the Data Sources context menu in the Outline view, choose Paste.
A new P_ORDERS_001-DS_3 data source is created.

c) From the newly-created data source P_ORDERS_001-DS_3 context menu, choose Edit
Initial View...

d) Drag and drop elements until the Rows area contains Country, Region, and Division.

e) Choose OK + Create Crosstab.

196 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

6. Rearrange the components used in the layout area so that the two charts are on top and
next to each other, and the table is located below the charts. Save your application and
execute it locally.
a) Drag and drop to arrange the objects as described above.

b) Choose Application —►Save.

c) Choose Application —►Execute Locally.

Add Tabstrip Layout and Filter Panel to Your Analytical Application

1. Launch Design Studio and open the application APP01_U## .

a) Choose Start —>Design Studio.

b) Choose Application —>Open.

c) In the Open Application dialog box, select APP01_USER## and choose Open.

2. Add the Tabstrip component and change the following attribute values:

Note:
Set the automatic values, Height and Width first.

• Set Top Margin to 0

• Set Left Margin to 0

• Set Bottom Margin to 0

• Set Right Margin to 0

• Set Width to auto

• Set Height to auto

a) Drag the component Tabstrip from the Container Components section to the canvas.

b) Select the newly-created component TABSTRIP_1 in the Outline view.

c) In the Layout section of the Properties view, change the attribute values listed above.

d) In the Layout section of the Outline view, choose Tab 1.

e) In the Display section of the Properties view, change the attribute Text to Overview.

f) In the Layout section of the Outline view, choose Tab 2.

g) In the Display section of the Properties view, change the attribute Text to Analysis.

3. Add a Pagebook component to the Overview tab that shows the two existing charts with a
horizontal slide effect.
a) Drag the component Pagebook from the Container Components section to the
Overview tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 197

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

b) In the Outline view, select the newly-created component, PAGEBOOK_l.

c) In the Display section of the Properties view, change the following attribute values:

• Set Transition Effect to Slide In

• Set Transition Direction to Horizontal

• Set Page Caching to All

• Set Show Page Indicator to true.

d) If it is not already expanded, expand the PAGEBOOK_l component in the Outline view.

e) Drag and drop the component CHART_1 onto the component PAGE_1 within the
Outline view.

f) Drag and drop the component CHART_2 onto the component PAGE_2 within the
Outline view.

4. Arrange a new Filter Panel component for the data source DS_3 and the existing
CROSSTAB_l component on the second tabstrip. Use a Grid Layout component to align
both items.
a) Drag the component Grid Layout from the Container Components section to the
Analysis tab.

b) In the Outline view, select the newly-created component, GRID_LAYOUT_l.

c) In the Properties view, change the following attribute values:

• Set Number of Columns to 2

• Set Column Width (the first entry) to 1

• Set Column Width (the second entry) to 2

d) In the Layout section of the Properties view, change the following attribute values:•

• Set Top Margin to 0

• Set Left Margin to 0

• Set Bottom Margin to 0

• Set Right Margin to 0

• Set Width to auto

• Set Height to auto

e) If it is not already expanded, expand the Grid_Layout_l component in the Outline view.

f) Drag the component Filter Panel from the Analytic Components section to the element
Cell - [0 ,0 ] in the Outline view.

198 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

g) Drag and drop the data source P_ORDERS_001 - DS_3 onto the component
FILTER_PANEL_1.

h) In the Outline view, select the component FILTER_PANEL_1.

i) In the Layout section of the Properties view, change the following attribute values:

• Set Top Margin to 0

• Set Left Margin to 0

• Set Bottom Margin to 0

• Set Right Margin to 0

• Set Width to auto

• Set Height to auto

j) Drag and drop the component CROSSTAB_l - DS_3 onto the object CELL - [0 , 1].

k) Select the component CROSSTAB_l - DS_3 .

l) In the Layout section of the Properties view, change the following attribute values:

• Set Top Margin to 0

• Set Left Margin to 0

• Set Bottom Margin to 0

• Set Right Margin to 0

• Set Width to auto

• Set Height to auto

5. Save your application with the name APP02_USER## and execute it locally.
a) Choose Application —>Save As.

b) Enter APP02_USERtt# in the Name field.

c) Choose Application —>Execute Locally.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 199

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create an analytical application

200 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 7
Lesson 2

Creating an Analytical Application with

Scripting

LESSON OVERVIEW
Add script to your analytical application with SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio.
Use the Script Wizard and the Script Editor in the Design Studio to add script to your
application that enables flexible user interaction with the application.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Write script to enable flexible user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

User Interaction Enablem ent

SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio is a design tool for creating interactive analysis
applications. This interactivity is enabled by scripts that are executed when the user performs
an action in the application. For example, a script can be be assigned to a button's 'On Click'
event.
Scripts consist of one or more statements written in a JavaScript-based language that follow
a specific syntax. A statement is composed of an object followed by an appropriate method
and the corresponding expressions. Design Studio offers two approaches: the Script Wizard
and the Script Editor. All objects, methods and expression types are listed in the API
reference which can be found in the documentation.

Figure 62: Scripting in Design Studio

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 201

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

Among Design Studio's scripting features are:

• An easy-to-use scripting wizard

• Intuitive content assistance via CTRL + SPACE

• Live data display for selection

• Built-in documentation for script API

• Automatic syntax check

Scripts
Design Studio scripts are written in the Bl Action Language (BIAL). Bl AL is a true subset of the
JavaScript/ECMA Script standard. There are three main reasons why JavaScript is used in
Design Studio:

• Executable on both browser and server

• Relatively easy to learn

• Sufficiently powerful

A subset of JavaScript, rather than JavaScript itself, is preferred for these reasons:

• Full JavaScript is quite complex

• Full JavaScript has no type support (Bl uses types such as Dimension and Filter)

• Some constructs can be dangerous (e.g. endless loops)

• Design Studio can validate all scripts

Design Studio scripts are executed on the Analysis Application Design Service which, unlike
JavaScript, is executed in the web browser.
Scripts consist of statements. Each statement is typically written in a single line. Statement
execution is triggered by user interaction with the component. This interaction is also referred
to as an event: the script executed in response to the event is known as the event handler.
Each component has its own set of one or more events that are displayed in the component's
Properties view.
Design Studio currently supports the following statement types:

• Call statements

• Conditional execution statements

202 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application with Scripting

| Figure 63: The Design Studio script editor

Call statements execute an API method of an object and have the following format
<component>.<method>(<arguments>);
<component> is the name of a data source alias or a component in your application, for
example, d s _1 or Button_l.
<method> is an operation that is applied to the object specified on the left of the period. The
available methods depend on component type. DataSourceAlias objects, for example, provide
methods for filtering data, and visual components provide methods for modifying visibility,
enablement, etc.
<arguments> is a comma-separated list of expressions. The passed expressions must match
the requirements of the method.
Each statement ends with a semicolon.

Script Wizard
The Script Wizard guides you through the script statement creation process, step by step.
You can access the Script Wizard from the scripting dialog by choosing CTRL + Space and
then choosing New Script wizard...

Figure 64: Script Wizard

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 203

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

Script Editor
The script editor offers various help functions to support the designer in writing the script.
Examples include:

• Automatic syntax check

• Auto correction

• Display of additional information

• Intelligent proposal offering by content assistance

• Relevance-ordered proposals and context-sensitive documentation

• Linked mode and value help for member selection

• Automatic syntax check: the system checks the syntax of your script in the background.
When an error is encountered, an error marker appears on the left of the editor and the
bad code is underlined. You can hover over the error marker or the underlined text to see
the error message.

• Auto correction: in some cases you will find a 'Quick Fix' that fixes an error automatically.
Just check the correction links in the error message popup.

• Display of additional information: when you hover over the script text with the mouse and
keep the mouse pointer still, additional information about the text is displayed. For
example, if you hover over a data source alias name, you see the corresponding query or
query view data source. Or if you hover over a dimension, you see its display name.

• Intelligent proposal offering by content assistance: when entering the script text, you can
choose CTRL + Space to see proposals on how to continue. The editor is an intelligent tool
and knows which continuations make sense and which do not. If you choose CTRL + Space
in an empty script editor, you will see all the components and data source aliases of the
application as proposals. You can select one and continue typing the script or choose
CTRL + Space again to get the next proposal. In some cases the editor will show you
proposals without you choosing CTRL + Space . For example, if you type the name of a
data source alias and choose the full stop key, all available functions for the data source
alias will be displayed automatically.

• Relevance-ordered proposals and context-sensitive documentation: proposals are ordered

by relevance. The most likely proposals are displayed first. Proposals that have the same
relevance are sorted alphabetically. If you select a proposal, you will see some
documentation about it. For example, if you show proposals for a data source alias d s _1 ,
you see all available functions. Each function displays documentation.•

• Linked mode and value help for member selection: if you have chosen a proposal for a
function, the editor will automatically insert the function name, the opening and closing
brackets and placeholders for all arguments. The editor is now in the 'linked mode' that
allows you to enter the parameters. You can use the Tab key to switch to the next
parameter and the Shift key to go back to the previous parameter. Proceeding to the green
bar beside the closing bracket (using the Tab key, arrow keys or the mouse) will exit the
linked mode. To fill the parameters, choose CTRL + Space again to see proposals.
Proposals for parameters depend on the function. The function setFilter , for example,
will propose dimensions. Members will be shown as proposals if the available number is
not too high. Otherwise there will be a proposal that allows you to open the value help for
member selection.

204 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 7
Exercise 14

Create an Analytical Application

Business Example
A business department wants to be able to use a chart to set a filter value for a data source
and change the selected tab at the same time. You will need to open the application you
created in the exercise Create an Analytical Application with Tabstrip Layout and Filter and
add the following behavior: when a user clicks on a slice in the pie chart the selected country
should be transferred as a filter to the data source that is used by the crosstab and at the
same time, the tabstrip with the crosstab on it should be activated.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Launch Design Studio and open the application APP02_USER##.

2. Add the required lines of script to the on Select property of the element CHART_1.

3. Save your application with the name a p p 03_u s e r ## and execute your application locally.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 205

Unit 7
Solution 14

Create an Analytical Application

1. Launch Design Studio and open the application APP02_USER##.

a) Choose Start —»Design Studio.

b) Choose Application —»Open.

c) In the Open Application dialog box, select APP02_USER## and choose Open.

2. Add the required lines of script to the on Select property of the element CHART_1.
a) In the Outline view, select the element CROSSTAB_l. In the Events section of the
Properties view, choose the icon next to On Select.

b) Add the following code:

DS_1.setFilter("T_SOLD_TO__OCOUNTRY",
CHART_1.getSelectedMember("T_SOLD_TO__OCOUNTRY"));
TABSTRIP_1.setSelectedTablndex(1);

3. Save your application with the name a p p 03_u s e r ## and execute your application locally.
a) Choos e Application —>Save As...

b) Enter a p p 03_u s e r ## as the application's name.

c) Choose Application —►Execute Locally.

206 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 7
Exercise 15

Create an Analytic Application using the

Design Studio Ready to Run Template

Business Example

Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Start SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio.

2. Create an analysis application called a p p 04_u s e r ## and execute it locally.

3. Select the RWB Connection and search for the P_SALES_DIVISION query.

4. Change to a line chart with Cal Year/Month in the Columns and Divisions rows. Add a filter
for the Cal/Year Month to show one year of data.

5. Close the browser and exit the application.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 207

Unit 7
Solution 15

Create an Analytic Application using the

Design Studio Ready to Run Template

Business Example

Note th a t w hen th e data values fo r th e exercise include # # , replace # # w ith th e g ro up

n u m b e r th a t th e in s tru c to r has p ro vide d to you.

1. S ta rt SAP B usinessO bjects Design S tudio,

a) C hoose Start —►Design Studio.

2. C reate an analysis a p p lica tio n called a p p 0 4 _ u s e r ## and execute it locally.

a) C hoose Create an Analysis Application.

b) E nter a p p 0 4 _ u s e r ## as the a p p lica tio n nam e.

c) C hoose th e Data Discovery and Visualization te m p la te .

d ) C hoose Create.

e) C hoose Execute Locally in th e to o lb a r.

3. S elect th e RWB Connection and search fo r th e P_SALES_DIVISION query.

a) From th e Data Sources c o n te x t m enu in th e Outline view, choose Add Data Source.

b) C hoose th e Browse b u tto n next to th e Connection field.

c) C hoose RWB System Connection and choose OK.

d ) Logon w ith y o u r cre d en tia ls.

e) C hoose th e Browse b u tto n next to th e Data Source field.

f) In th e Search for fie ld o f th e Search tab, e n te r p _ s a l e s _ d iv is io n to search fo r the

query, and choose OK.

g ) C hoose OK to fin ish adding th e data source.

4. Change to a line c h a rt w ith Cal Year/Month in th e Columns and Divisions rows. A dd a filte r
fo r th e Cal/Year Month to show one ye ar o f data.
a) Drag Cal Year/Month in to the colum ns.

b) Ensue th a t Divisions in rows.

c) C hoose Add Filters and th e n choose Cal Year/Month.

d ) C hoose Range.

e) C hoose Starts at and the n se le ct th e 01.2004 checkbox.

208 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating an Analytical Application with Scripting

f) Choose Ends at and then select the 12.2004 checkbox.

g) Choose Apply.

h) Choose the Line Chart icon.

5. Close the browser and exit the application.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 209

Unit 7: SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Write script to enable flexible user interaction in SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

210 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 7

Learning Assessment

1. Scripting in Design Studio allows which of the following:

Choose the correct answer.

| A Triggering of actions driven by user interaction with a component

B Write-back capabilities to the database

| C Scheduling

D Establishing connectivity to SAP BW

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 211

Unit 7

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Scripting in Design Studio allows which of the following:

Choose the correct answer.

|~X~| A Triggering of actions driven by user interaction with a component

B Write-back capabilities to the database

C Scheduling

D Establishing connectivity to SAP BW

212 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 8 SAP BusinessObjects

Dashboards and SAP
NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards 214
Exercise 16: Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet 225

Lesson 2
Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query 233
Exercise 17: Create a Dashboard with a BEx Query Connection via Query Browser 235

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create a dashboard

• Create a dashboard with BEx Query

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 213

Unit 8
Lesson 1

Creating a Dashboard with SAP

BusinessObjects Dashboards

LESSON OVERVIEW
Present key metrics and live data to your users in a visual and interactive way by creating a
dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a dashboard

Dashboards

Note:
This lesson covers SAP Dashboards only in the context of SAP BW. The course,
BOX310, covers comprehensive training for SAP Dashboards.

A Dashboard is a user interface that provides highly visual and interactive data to the user. It
is intended to present data in a simple and intuitive way to users such as executives,
managers and operational staff. A Dashboard's interactive possibilities are defined by its
designer. Users follow a predefined path and do not navigate freely through the data. Note
also that Dashboards are designed to provide summarized data and key performance
indicators - they are about the big picture, not details. To provide greater detail, you can add
embedded hyperlinks to more detailed views.

214 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

Dashboards is data visualization software that allows you to create and export interactive
dashboards. These dashboards contain various components, such as charts, graphs, and
buttons, that are bound to data sources.
These components display the data in a compact and visual manner, which can then help the
dashboard consumer see trends and make informed business decisions.
All product versions include an Excel spreadsheet in the interface that is referred to as the
embedded spreadsheet; data can be imported or entered directly into the embedded
spreadsheet, modified as required, then bound to components. SAP BusinessObjects
Dashboards includes the ability to link external data sources, such as data stored in Bl
platform repositories, directly to the embedded spreadsheet or to components in the model.
It consists of a user interface that provides highly visual and interactive data to the user. It is
intended to present data in a simple and intuitive way to users such as executives, managers
and operational staff.
A Dashboard's interactive possibilities are defined by its designer.
Users follow a predefined path and do not navigate freely through the data.
Note also that Dashboards are designed to provide summarized data and key performance
indicators - they are about the big picture, not details.
To provide greater detail, you can add embedded hyperlinks to more detailed views.
SAP has announced that SAP Dashboard will be converged into SAP Design Studio in the
future. The future roadmap for this product is available at the following link:
http://scn.sap.com/community/business-intelligence/blog/2014/09/10/sap-
businessobjects-bi-strategy-and-roadmap-call-notes-question-and-answer.
Although SAP Dashboard will be supported, SAP Design studio will be the future direction.

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards: Major Product Updates

SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio is the going-forward solution for dashboards and
application development. SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards will continue to have incremental
updates but SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio will contain the new features and
innovations in future.
SAP will continue to support the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SDKs that are
available.
Refer to Convergence of the SAP BusinessObjects Bl Product Portfolio for more details, see
http://blogs.sap.com/analytics/2014/06/25/run-simple-convergence-of-the-sap-
businessobjects-bi-product-portfolio/

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards 4.1 Features

• Common semantic layer

- Common query panel for all data sources

- Universe access to relational and OLAP sources

Hadoop support

• SAP landscape integration

- Direct access to SAP BW via BIOS hosted by SAP Bl platform

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 215

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

- Parameterize dashboard content with BEx variables

- Universe access to SAP ECC infosets and ABAP functions

- SAP HANA support

• Direct data binding

- Bind query result objects to charts and tables

- Bind query conditions to prompt component

For SAP BW sources, direct access to BEx query is supported.

Guidance for Dashboard Projects

• Customers using SAP BW or SAP HANA as a data source should adopt SAP Design Studio
as their primary tool for creating dashboards and applications, for both Web and mobile
deployment.

• Existing customers of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards with offline requirements or that

need to use scheduled data sources should continue with Dashboards.

• Customers starting a new project on any data source should strongly consider building
new dashboards with SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio.

Dashboard Use Cases and Target Groups

The main use cases for Dashboards are:

• The creation of consolidated views on key metrics: using visual components on highly
aggregated Bl content makes it easy to retrieve essential business information.

• The creation of What-lf Scenarios: Dashboards allow users to change parameters and see
at once how results change.

• The use of multiple data sources to create visualizations: Dashboards allow you to access
trusted and up-to-date Business Intelligence data from SAP Netweaver BW and from the
SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform.•

• The sharing of information in multiple familiar formats: security, connectivity, and

interactivity are maintained whether a Dashboard visualization is deployed to Bl
Launchpad or SAP NetWeaver Portal, or embedded inside Microsoft Office or Adobe PDF
documents.

216 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

| Figure 66: A Dashboard use case

Target Groups
SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards is the right tool for most business users. Dashboards
provide visualization on key metrics, which means highly aggregated data that provides a
crucial help to executives and managers.
Another important user group is information consumers, which is usually the biggest user
group in an organization. They tend to need predefined reports with few interactive
possibilities.
Dashboards are of limited utility to business analysts, who find information in data by using
OLAP operations like slice and dice or by performing drill downs to more detailed data. OLAP
Analysis tools like BEx Analyzer or SAP BusinessObjects Analysis are of more use to this
group.

The Canvas Area

The canvas area is the main work area where you place and manipulate components to create
models. You can change the color of the canvas background and add a grid to help you
arrange items on the canvas. You can also adjust the size of the canvas to give you more
space to work or to reduce the overall size of a saved model.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 217

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Figure 67: The canvas, components, spreadsheet and properties areas

To display a grid on the canvas in Dashboards choose File —►Preferences —*■G rid..
To change the canvas size choose File —>Document Properties .
You can fit the canvas size to components by choosing View —►Canvas Sizing —►Fit Canvas to
Components or fit the canvas size to the window by choosing View —>Canvas Sizing —>Fit
Canvas to Window.

Embedded Spreadsheets
An embedded spreadsheet is a functional Excel spreadsheet that you can work with just as
you would in Excel itself. To associate your models with specific data, you can link
components to cells in the embedded spreadsheet. Data coming from a connection can also
be inserted into an assigned range in a spreadsheet.

Note:
Embedded spreadsheets support most but not all Excel functions. Macros,
conditional formatting, linking to other external spreadsheets, and some formula
functions are not supported.

The Component Browser

The Components Browser lists all the components that are available for addition to your
model. From this list you can drag components onto the canvas to add them to your model.
You can view the list of components grouped into functional categories (Category or Tree
view) or as an alphabetical list (List view).

218 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

Components X

Category | Tree | lis t |

Figure 68: The Component Browser

Components are grouped into the following functional areas:

Category Description

Favorites A list of favorite components that you can

create by choosing Add to Favorites in the
context menu of a component.
Charts Chart components, such as bar charts and
line charts.
Containers Container components that group and dis
play other components.
Selectors Selector components that allow users to
choose options when running the model,
such as list boxes and check boxes.
Single Value Single-value components that can be linked
to a single cell in the spreadsheet, such as di
al buttons, gauges, sliders.
Maps Map components that provide geographical
representations, allowing you to display data
by region.
Text Text components that can be used to add la
bels to your model or to allow users to enter
text when the model runs.
Other Various components that can enhance your
model, such as calendars, trend icons, panel
sets, and print buttons.
Art & Backgrounds Art & Backgrounds components allow you to
enhance models by adding images and back
grounds.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 219

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Category Description

Web Connectivity Web connectivity components such as the

URL button and the Connection Refresh but
ton.
Universe Connectivity Universe connectivity components allow
users to interact with Universe (.UNX) con
nections, performing functions such as re
freshing data and entering prompt values.
Universe Connectivity components also allow
users to connect directly to BEx queries.

The Properties Panel

The Properties panel contains the setting and format options for the selected component.
After you place a component on the canvas area, you can access its Properties panel from its
context menu or by double-clicking it.

Pie Chert 1 - Pie Chert 9 X

|* -m 1
V
T r 1
s*
Generel Insertion Behevior Appearance

Titles
Chart:
Pie Chart g)
Subtitle:
Sample Sub Title gj

Data

Values:

O Data in Rows Q Data in Columns

labels:

5id

Figure 69: The Properties panel

The Properties panel can contain the following views (which views are available depends on
the type of component):

• General View: for basic configuration, such as title, label and source data.

• Insertion View: used to configure charts to act as selectors, so that choosing a chart
element inserts more detailed information into the embedded spreadsheet. This view is
not available for all components.

• Behavior View: defines interactivity and visibility.

• Appearance View: defines font sizes, colors, and so on.

• Alerts View: used to define notifications about data: for example, you can have a
notification appear when a value is extremely high or low.

Data Connections
SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards creates visualizations on data that has been imported to a
spreadsheet. There are three ways to insert this data. They are as follows:

220 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

• The first option is to import an Excel file via Data —*■Import. The components of your
dashboard model can now be linked to cell ranges. If you need to update your dashboard
model you can open an existing .xlf file and import the newer version of your spreadsheet.
If the structure of your Excel sheet has not changed, the components are still linked to the
correct cell range.

• The second option is to create an external connection via the Data Manager by choosing
Data —>Connections. Here you will find a variety of connections to choose from. Most
connections can be linked with others in your dashboard model, allowing you to merge
data from different data sources. External connections can be refreshed dynamically
during dashboard runtime - for example you can load current values via a web service
connection.

• The third option is to create a query on a .unx universe and insert the results into the
spreadsheet. With this option you can alternatively bind the result data from the query
directly to the components without inserting into the spreadsheet. Queries can also be
created on BEx queries using BICS connectivity. This can be done via the Query Browser. A
later section will provide more information on this topic.

Figure 70: Data connections

Note:
If you export or publish your dashboard model, restrictions may apply for the
refresh of external connections. For example, if you export the model as a Flash
file, Adobe Flash Player Restrictions may apply. Users must also have sufficient
rights to be able to refresh data from, for example, an SAP NetWeaver BW data
source.

Available Connection Types

Table 24: Available Connection Types

This table summarizes BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP's support for various
NetWeaver BW elements:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 221

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Connection Type Description

Web Service Query Using Web Service query defined using

Query as a Web Service (QAAWS), you can
define a query from a universe and import
data from this web service into SAP Busines
sObjects Dashboards.
Web Service Connection Web Service connections support interoper
able interaction over a network using the
HTTP Protocol.
XML Data An XML data connection connects to an ex
ternal source through HTTP.
SAP NetWeaver BW Connection Connect to Business Explorer Queries in SAP
NetWeaver BW via Bl Consumer Services
(BICS) interface. Query data can be directly
imported to SAP BusinessObjects Dash
boards without having to create a universe.
WHen using this connection, the dashboard
needs to be hosted in the NetWeaver portal.
An easier way to connect SAP BW data is via
Query Browser as explained later (possible
with Dashboards 4.0 SP 4).
Flash Variables Flash variables provide a way to pass data or
variables from HTML to the _root level of a
Flash object.
Portal Data Portal data connections allow you to define
parameters in models or send and receive
data from another web part in SAP Busines
sObjects Bl workspace, IBM WebSphere or
Microsoft SharePoint.
Crystal Reports Data Consumer Crystal Reports Data Consumer connections
allow you to retrieve information from Crystal
Reports documents.
FS Command The FS Command connection allows you to
include Flash FS Commands which allow
Flash to run JavaScript statements in a web
browser.
LCDS Connections The LiveCycle Data Services (LCDS) connec
tion streams real-time data through Adobe
LiveCycle Data Services.
External Interface Connection External Interface connections allow you to
expose selected data ranges in an embedded
spreadsheet in order to transfer data to a
SWF file using JavaScript.

222 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

Connection Type Description

Excel XML Maps An Excel XML Map connection allows you to

import an Excel spreadsheet with an XML
map while retaining the defined structure of
the XML file and its mapping to the data with
in the spreadsheet.
Live Office Connections A Live Office connection allows the data in a
model created from a LiveOffice-enabled Ex
cel spreadsheet to be refreshable against the
source data. Note that Live Office can only be
used against UNV universes.

The Query Browser

Using the Query Browser you can access UNX universes and BW queries using the BICS
connector.
The Query Browser provides quick access to queries and the tools that modify them. You can
use the Query Browser to create new queries, and to edit, refresh, or delete existing ones.
You can open the Query Browser by choosing View —►Query Browser.

Query Browser G X

S3 v X 8 t +

The Query Browser aflows you to

manage queries that provide data
for components in the model

| |J j Add Query |

Figure 71: The Query Browser

The following information is displayed for each query in the Query Browser:

• Result Objects: the raw data returned by a query.

• Filters: any filters added to a query.

• Prompts: any prompts added to a query. You can drag any prompt onto the canvas to
create a Query Prompt Selector component bound to that prompt.

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and the SAP BusinessObjects Bl Platform

When saved locally, SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards files are stored in a zipped format with
a .xlf extension. The .xlf file format contains the model information and its associated
embedded spreadsheet file, .xlf files can only be opened and executed in the dashboard
design tool. These files cannot be distributed to users that do not have access to a dashboard
design tool installed on their computer. In order to distribute dashboards, you can export
them to the following file formats:

• HTML web page

• Adobe Flash file (.swf) that can be opened with Adobe Flash player

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 223

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

• Adobe Acrobat PDF file

• Microsoft Office PowerPoint document

• Microsoft Office Word document

The advantage of these files is that they contain the dynamic components of the dashboard
model and can be easily distributed. The disadvantage is that it may not be possible to refresh
external connections from these locally exported files on another computer. Another way of
distributing these files is to save them to the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform repository.
Dashboards saved there contain both the design document (.xlf) and the Adobe Flash file
(.swf) in a single object. This object can be viewed and modified. Publishing dashboard
models in the SAP BusinessObjects Bl platform has the following advantages:

• A single object holds the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards design document (.xlf file) and
the localized Adobe Flash file (.swf file).

• You can publish from SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards.

• Support view and modification.

• Object level security.

• Multilingual consumption and a localized dashboard for viewing based on the preferred
viewing locale of the user.

• Integrated into the lifecycle management tool.

The new features in version 4.x include the integration into the lifecycle management tool and
the recognition of dependencies between dashboard models and universe queries, universe
objects in web service queries, and with corresponding SAP Crystal Report documents, SAP
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence documents and universe objects in SAP BusinessObjects
Live Office connections. Translation management makes it possible to translate all texts that
are used in the dashboard model and to display number values for the correct viewing locale.

224 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 8
Exercise 16

Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel

Spreadsheet

Business Example

The Sales Director sent you the latest Sales Key figures that have to be visualized for a
meeting with the board. Create a dashboard using the data provided from a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.

Note:
Replace # # with the group number assigned to you by your instructor.

1. Start SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and import the Microsoft Excel file
Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls from the Bl platform.

2. Insert a bar chart that visualizes the projected product lines (Desktops, Laptops, Servers,
PDAs, and Software).

3. In Chart, enter XYZ Computers and in Subtitle , enter Projected Sales: 2014.

4. In the XAx/s , enter Projected Sales (u s d l , 000s) as the description and in the Y
Axis , enter Product Lines as the description. Enter values for each field.

5. Use a horizontal slider for the sales growth rate of desktops, with the title Desktops , to
give the bar chart what-if capabilities. You should be able to see the impact of a change of
the sales growth rate for desktops in the bar chart. In the preview, when you drag the
pointer to the slider, the desktop sales data in the bar chart should change.

6. Add more horizontal sliders to the dashboard in the same way to give the bar chart what-if
capabilities for the other product lines. Set the maximum limit for the slider values to 50.
Position all five sliders under the bar chart and center and distribute them evenly
vertically.

7. To visualize the total of projected sales for all product lines, add a custom gauge to the
lower-right corner with the title Projected Sales . Use alerts within the gauge to
indicate bad, critical, and good values. In the preview, when you drag the pointers of the
sliders, the data in the bar chart should change and the gauge needle should move to
reflect the new values.

8. Add a custom pie chart that visualizes the product mix for 2014 for all product lines.
Position it in the upper-right corner and enter the title XYZ Computers and the subtitle
Product Mix: 2014.

9. Finalize the presentation by adding the title XYZ Computers Sales Projections
2014 at the top of the dashboard. Change the font size of the title to 26, and bold and
center the title.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 225 r

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

226 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 8
Solution 16

Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel

Spreadsheet

Business Example

The Sales Director sent you the latest Sales Key figures that have to be visualized for a
meeting with the board. Create a dashboard using the data provided from a Microsoft Excel
spreadsheet.

Note:
Replace # # with the group number assigned to you by your instructor.

1. Start SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and import the Microsoft Excel file
Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls from the Bl platform.
a) To open SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards , choose Start —> All Programs —> SAP
Business Intelligence —►SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards 4 —►SAP BusinessObjects
Dashboards.

b) Choose New —> Blank Model.

c) On the Dashboards toolbar, choose Data —►Import from Platform .

d) In the Dashboards dialog box, choose Yes .

e) Log on to the system using the credentials provided by your instructor.

f) Navigate to the Training folder.

g) Select the Microsoft Excel file Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls and choose Open .

2. Insert a bar chart that visualizes the projected product lines (Desktops, Laptops, Servers,
PDAs, and Software).
a) On the Components panel, choose Charts .

b) Drag the Bar Chart icon to the canvas and place it in the upper-left hand corner.

3. In Chart, enter XYZ Computers and in Subtitle , enter Projected Sales: 2014.
a) To open the bar chart Properties panel, click the bar chart component on the canvas.

b) In the Titles area, delete the text in the Chart and Subtitle fields.

c) In the Chart field, enter x y z Computers .

d) In the Subtitle field, enter Projected Sales: 2014.

4. In the XAx/s , enter Projected Sales (usd l , 000s) as the description and in the Y
Axis , enter Product Lines as the description. Enter values for each field.

227
© Copyright. All rights reserved.
SAR.
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

a) In the Values (X) Axis field, enter Projected Sales (usd 1,000s ) .

b) In the Category (Y) Axis field, enter Product Lines .

c) In the Data field, select the By Series radio button.

d) Choose the [+ ] button to add a new series.

e) Choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Name field.

f) In the imported spreadsheet, select cell/45 and in the Select a Range dialog box,
choose O K .

g) Choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Values (X) field and in the imported
spreadsheet, select cells B5 to F5. Choose O K.

h) Choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Category Label (Y) field and in the
imported spreadsheet, select cells B2 to F2. Choose O K.

b) Drag the Horizontal Slider icon to the canvas and click it to open its Properties panel.

c) On the General tab, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Title field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cell B2. Choose O K .

d) On the General tab, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Data field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cell B4. Choose O K.

e) On the Appearance tab, choose the Text tab and ensure that the Title and Value
checkboxes are selected.

f) To verify that the slider is working correctly, choose Preview. To return to the Design
view, choose Preview.

b) Select Slider 2 to open its Properties panel.

c) On the General tab, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Title field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cell C2. Choose O K.

d) On the General tab, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Data field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cell 04. Choose O K .

e) On the Appearance tab, choose theTexf tab and select theT/f/e and Value checkboxes.

f) Repeat the previous four steps for Slider 3, but for Title , select cell D2, and for Data ,
select cell D4.

228 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

g) Repeat the same steps for Slider 4, but for Title , select cell E2, and for Data , select cell
E4.

h) Repeat the same steps for Slider 5, but for Title , select cell F2, and for Data , select cell
F4.

i) Draw a box around the five slider components to select them all.

j) On the General tab, in the Scale area, enter 50 in the Maximum Limit field. On your
keyboard, press the Enter key.

k) Draw a box around the five slider components to select them all.

l) On the Format menu, choose Align —> Center.

m) On the Format menu, choose Space Evenly —►Down.

n) Choose Preview . To return to the Design view, choose Preview .

b) Drag the Gauge icon to the canvas, and place it in the lower-right corner.

c) Increase the size of the gauge.

d) To open the gauge Properties panel, click the gauge component.

e) On the General tab, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Title field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cell Al. Choose O K.

f) On the General tab, in the Data area, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the
By Range radio button and in the imported spreadsheet, select cell G5. Choose O K .

g) On the General tab, in the Scale area, select the Manual radio button and, in the
Maximum Limit field, enter 10,000 . Choose Enter.

h) On the Alerts tab, select the Enable Alerts checkbox.

i) Select the As Percent of Target radio button and choose its Cell Selector button. In the
imported spreadsheet, select cell H5. Choose O K.

j) In the Color Order area, select the High values are good checkbox.

k) To verify that the gauge is working correctly, choose Preview. To return to the Design
view, choose Preview.

l) Draw a box around the five slider components to select them all.

8. Add a custom pie chart that visualizes the product mix for 2014 for all product lines.
Position it in the upper-right corner and enter the title x y z Computers and the subtitle
Product M ix: 2014
a) On the Components panel, select Charts .

b) Drag the Pie Chart icon to the canvas, and place it in the upper-right corner.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 229

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

c) On the General tab, delete the text in the Chart and Subtitle fields.

d) In the Chart field, enter x y z Computers and, on your keyboard, press the Enter key.

e) In the Subtitle field, enter Product M i x : 2014 and, on your keyboard, press the Enter
key.

f) In the Data area, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Value field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cells B5 to F5. Choose O K.

g) In the Data area, choose the Cell Selector button to the right of the Labels field and in
the imported spreadsheet, select cells B2 to F2. Choose O K.

h) Choose Preview . To return to the Design View, choose Preview .

9. Finalize the presentation by adding the title XYZ Computers Sales Projections
2014 at the top of the dashboard. Change the font size of the title to 26, and bold and
center the title.
a) On the Components panel, choose Text.

b) Drag the Label icon to the canvas and place it at the top. To open its Properties panel,
click the Label component.

c) On the General tab, select the Enter Text radio button.

d) In the Enter Text field, enter XYZ Computers Sales Projections 2014.

e) On the Appearance tab, choose the Text tab and choose the center the text button.

f) Set the font size to 26 and choose bold. Resize the text box.

10. Label the sliders with the text field Product Line Growth Rates beneath the sliders.
Set the font size to 18. Add a background element to the canvas and resize it to the
optimal size. Preview the dashboard.
a) Drag another Label icon beneath the sliders and in the Enter Text field, enter Product
Line Growth Rates . Set the font size to 18. Resize the text box.

b) On the Components panel, choose Arts & Backgrounds .

c) Drag the Background icon to the canvas.

d) Resize the Background component until it covers the other components on the canvas.

e) Click the Background component and, on the Format menu, choose Order —> Send to
Back.

f) On the toolbar, choose the Fit Canvas to Components button.

g) Choose Preview. To return to the Design view, choose Preview.

11. Save the dashboard in your local Documents folder as u## Computer Sales
Projections . Export the dashboard to Microsoft PowerPoint and save the presentation
in the Documents folder as U## Computer Sales Projections . View the slide in
presentation mode in Microsoft PowerPoint.
a) To save the dashboard, choose File —> Save—* Libraries—*■ Documents and save as
U## Computer Sales Projections.

b) Choose File ^ Export and choose PowerPoint Slide....

230 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

c) Save the file in the Documents folder as u## Computer Sales Projections.

d) The slide opens automatically in Microsoft PowerPoint.

e) To view the slide in Microsoft PowerPoint, choose Slide Show —►From Current Slide .

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 231

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a dashboard

232 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 8
Lesson 2

Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson describes the way that SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards can connect to data in
SAP NetWeaver BW.
Create a dashboard with a BEx Query connection by using the Query Browser in SAP
BusinessObjects Dashboards.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a dashboard with BEx Query

Data Connectivity Overview for BEx Query

In SAP Business Objects Dashboards 4.0 you can leverage Universes and BEx Queries. Use
the query browser in the Dashboard Design tool, choose a .unx universe from SAP
BusinessObjects Bl Platform or a BEx Query from SAP BW and create queries.
A dashboard model can contain data from multiple universes and BEx Queries. The query
results can be inserted into the embedded spreadsheet or linked directly with components in
the canvas. This simplifies the authoring workflow because you can design the dashboard
model and the corresponding universe or BEx Query in the same client tool.
You can access all universes with a relational data source that have been published to SAP
BusinessObjects Bl Platform, so you can access the full variety of database connections
available in Information Design Tool and also relational universes on SAP NetWeaver BW
InfoProviders. You have access to all BEx Queries, where "OLE DB for OLAP” is allowed.

Note:
You can find more information about the Query Browser in the next lesson.

BEx Query: Supported and Unsupported SAP BW Elements

Table 25: SAP BW Elements Support

This table summarizes BEx Query's support for various SAP BW elements:
BEx Element BEx Query Support

Characteristics Yes
Key Figures Yes
Free Characteristics Yes
Restricted Key Figures Yes
Calculated Key Figures Yes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 233

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element BEx Query Support

Display Attributes Yes

Navigational A ttributes Yes
Custom Key Figure Structure Yes
Custom Characteristic Structure Yes
Compounded Characteristics Yes
Optional Variables Yes
Manadatory Variables Yes
Characteristic Value Variables Yes
Formula Variables Yes
Hierarchy Variables Yes
Hierarchy Node Variables Yes
Hierarchy Version Variables No
Key Date Variable Yes
Condition in Rows (from BEx Query) No
Condition in Columns (from BEx Query) No
Exceptions (from BEx Query) No
Exception Aggregation Yes
Zero Suppression No
Local Calculations (defined in BEx Query) No
Scaling Factor Yes
Number of Decimals No
Display Options for Characteristics (Key, Key No
& Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, Suppress) No
Placement of Subtotal (above or below no No
des)

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

234 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 8
Exercise 17

Create a Dashboard with a BEx Query

Connection via Query Browser

Business Example
In your organization BEx queries are provided as data source to reporting users. Use SAP
BusinessObjects dashboards to create a visualization on international sales data. Your first
task is to create a new connection on the BEx query Sales Analysis 002
[p_ s a l e s _a n a l y siS_002 ]that will provide data for your dashboard model.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Open SAP BusinessObjects dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model.

2. Open the Query Browser tab in the dashboard design workspace. Add a new query on the
BEx Query Sales Analysis 002 [P_SALES_ANALYSIS_002 ]. When prompted, logon
using the credentials in the following table:
Field Value

System WDFLBMT2065

User USER##

Pass <your password>

Authentication SAP

3. In the Query Panel, create a new query with the following result objects: Country
(Dimension) and Incoming Orders EUR (Measures). Preview the query results. Do not
change usage options for this query.

Use Data Binding to Create a Dashboard Model

Your second task is to use direct data binding with the query results to create a dashboard
model that looks like the one in this graphic:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 235

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Country Incoming Orders EUR Order Entry Quantity

Incoming Orders per country Utd.Arab.Emir. 5,700,775.44 2,015
Canada 0 0
Cuba 3,750.88 100
Germany 287,565,680.73 653,170.76
France 1,057,002.26 14
Great Britain 7,167,450 2,179
Italy 5,837,600 2,018
Norway 10,073,750 3,068
United States 48,765,896.35 158,128.667

Enter Calendar year: (Equal to)

Apply

/S Figure 72: Target Dashboard Model*•

1. Add a new bar chart to the canvas.

2. Edit the properties of the bar chart as follows:

• Give it the title Incoming Orders per country.

• Display countries on the Y-axis of the chart and the measure values on the X-axis.

. Use By Series in the properties of the Bar Chart. Create a series with the name
Incoming Orders EUR.

. Bind the data from the query directly to the Values and Category labels in the bar chart.

. Resize the bar chart so that all countries are visible in the canvas.

Add a Scorecard
Add a scorecard component that allows you to compare Order Entry Quantities and Incoming
Orders EUR to your dashboard. Also add a Prompt Selector for the year.

Note:
Note: If you need to log on again, use the credentials provided at the beginning of
the exercise.

1. On the Query Browser tab, open the Query Panel and edit the query in your dashboard.
Add the measure Order Entry Quantity to the result objects. Also create a mandatory
prompt based on the dimension object Year that allows users to select a single year from
a list of values during dashboard runtime.

236 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query

3. Add a query prompt selector component from the Universe Connectivity category to the
lower right part of the canvas. The prompt selector allows the user to enter a value for
year during dashboard runtime.

Note:
The query prompt selector automatically adapts to the type of prompt that
you created in the query if you set it as source prompt.

4. Preview your dashboard and test if the prompt values can be changed and return different
results using 2007 as the Event Calendar Year.

5. Save your dashboard to the Bl Platform repository into your personal folder
Training —>User Area —►User## as Dashboard Design Object with the name
U##_Incoming_Orders_Dashboard.

6. Execute the dashboard in Bl Launchpad. If prompted to logon, use the credentials in the
following table:
Field Value

System <your assigned server>

Sap System RWB

Sap Client 800

User name user##

Password <Your password>

Authentication SAP

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 237

Unit 8
Solution 17

Create a Dashboard with a BEx Query

Connection via Query Browser

Business Example
In your organization BEx queries are provided as data source to reporting users. Use SAP
BusinessObjects dashboards to create a visualization on international sales data. Your first
task is to create a new connection on the BEx query Sales Analysis 002
[ p_ sales _ a n a ly s iS _ 0 02 ] that will provide data for your dashboard model.
Note that when the data values for the exercise include ##, replace # # with the group
number that the instructor has provided to you.

1. Open SAP BusinessObjects dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model.
a) Choose Start —»SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards.

b) Choose File —>New —>New.

System WDFLBMT2065

User USER##

Pass <your password>

Authentication SAP

a) On the Query Browser tab, choose Add Query.

b) Login by entering the values from the corresponding table.

c) In the Add Query dialog box, select BEx and choose Next.

d) Select Connections —►RWB System Connection and choose Next.

e) In the Select a BEx Query dialog box, search for the query Sales Analysis 002. You
can search for it either by that name or by its technical name
p_sa l e s _ a n a l y siS _ 0 02. If you search by the latter, you must choose Technical
Name in the In dropdown box.

f) From the results list, select Sales Analysis 002 and choose OK.

238 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query

a) Drag the dimension objects Country and Incoming Orders EUR from the available
objects for the Sales Analysis 002 query to the Result Objects area.

b) Choose Next to preview the query results.

c) Click OK to finish and create the query.

Use Data Binding to Create a Dashboard Model

Your second task is to use direct data binding with the query results to create a dashboard
model that looks like the one in this graphic:
Country Incoming Orders EUR Order Entry Quantity
Incoming Orders per country Utd. Arab. Emir. 5,700,775.44 2,015
Canada 0 0
Cuba 3,750.88 100
Germany 287,565,680.73 653,170.76
France 1,057,002.26 14
Great Britain 7.167,450 2,179
Italy 5,837,600 2,018
Norway 10,073,750 3,068
United States 48,765,896.35 158,128.667

Enter Calendar y e a r (Equal to)

Q Ap p ly

o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o
o o o o o o o
CD CD O CD CD O CD
IS) O IS) o to O IS)
h h w n n n

Figure 72: Target Dashboard Model

1. Add a new bar chart to the canvas.

a) Drag the Bar Chart object from the Charts section of the Components tab onto the
canvas in the middle of the screen.

2. Edit the properties of the bar chart as follows:

• Give it the title Incoming Orders per country.

• Display countries on the Y-axis of the chart and the measure values on the X-axis.

• Use By Series in the properties of the Bar Chart. Create a series with the name
Incoming Orders EUR.

. Bind the data from the query directly to the Values and Category labels in the bar chart.

. Resize the bar chart so that all countries are visible in the canvas.

a) Under the Titles heading in the General tab of the bar chart's properties, enter the
following information:
Field Value

Chart Incoming Orders EUR

Value (X) Axis: Measure

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 239

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Field Value

Value (Y) Axis: Countries

b) Delete the text in the Subtitle field.

c) Under the Data heading in the General tab of the Bar Chart's properties, select the By
Series radio button.

d) Choose the Plus icon (+ ).

A new series, Seriesl, is added.

e) In the series Name field, enter Incoming Orders EUR.

f) From the dropdown menu on the right of the Values(X): field, choose Query Data.

g) In the Select from Query dialog box, choose Incoming Orders EUR, and then choose
OK.

h) From the dropdown menu on the right of the Category Labels(Y): field, choose Query
Data.

i) In the Select from Query dialog box, choose Country, and then choose OK.

j) Resize the bar chart in the canvas by dragging the lower right corner.

Add a Scorecard
Add a scorecard component that allows you to compare Order Entry Quantities and Incoming
Orders EUR to your dashboard. Also add a Prompt Selector for the year.

Note:
Note: If you need to log on again, use the credentials provided at the beginning of
the exercise.

b) Drag the measure object Order Entry Quantity from the Sales Analysis 002 area to the
Result Objects area.

c) Drag the dimension object Calendar Year from the Sales Analysis 002 area to the
Filters area.

d) Do not change the setting Equal to but choose Prompt from the dropdown list on the
right.

e) Do not change any of the settings in the Edit Prompt dialog box. Choose OK.

f) Choose Next.

g) In the field under the heading Enter Calendar Year, enter the value 2005 and choose
Run.

h) Choose OK.

240 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query

2. Add a scorecard component from the Selectors category to the upper right part of the
canvas that allows you to compare Order Entry Quantities and Incoming Orders
e u r for each displayed country. Bind the component directly with the query data from
your BEx query.
a) Drag the Scorecard object from the Selectors section of the Components tab onto the
upper-right portion of the canvas.

b) In the General tab of the properties of the scorecard properties, choose the arrow on
the right of the Display Data field and then choose Query Data.

c) In the Result Objects list, select the Country, Order Entry Quantity, and Incoming
Orders EUR checkboxes and choose OK.

Note:
The query prompt selector automatically adapts to the type of prompt that
you created in the query if you set it as source prompt.

a) Drag the Query Prompt Selector object from the Universe Connectivity section of the
Components tab onto the lower-right portion of the canvas.

b) From the Source Prompt dropdown list in the Query Prompt Selector properties, select
Query 1: Enter Calendar Year.

c) Under the heading Destination Prompt(s), note that the Enter Calendar Year checkbox
is automatically selected.

d) Under the heading Refresh Queries, select the Query 1 checkbox.

4. Preview your dashboard and test if the prompt values can be changed and return different
results using 2007 as the Event Calendar Year.
a) On the Dashboard Design Toolbar, choose Preview.

b) In the Enter Calendar Year prompt, enter 2007 and choose Apply.

c) Choose Preview again to end this preview.

5. Save your dashboard to the Bl Platform repository into your personal folder
Training —>User Area —>User#ft as Dashboard Design Object with the name
U##_Incoming_Orders_Dashboard.
a) Choose File —>Save to Platform As —>Dashboards Object for Desktop Only.

b) Navigate to the Training —►User Area —>User## folder.

c) Enter the file name u##_incoming_Orders_Dashboard and choose Save.

6. Execute the dashboard in Bl Launchpad. If prompted to logon, use the credentials in the
following table:
Field Value
System <your assigned server>

Sap System RWB

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 241

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

Field Value

Sap Client 800

User name user##

Password <Your password>

Authentication SAP

a) Choose Start —*■Bl Launch pad<your assigned server>.

b) Logon with the credentials provided in the table above.

c) Navigate to the Documents tab and open the Folders section. Navigate to the Public
Folders —*■Training —►User Area —>User## folder.

d) Double-click the dashboard object U##_lncoming_Orders_Dashboard to execute it.

242 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Creating a Dashboard with a BEx Query

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a dashboard with BEx Query

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 243

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and SAP NetWeaver BW

244 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Unit 8

Learning Assessment

1. Name two connectivity methods for connecting dashboards to BW.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 245 SAB4

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 8

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Name two connectivity methods for connecting dashboards to BW.

Universes and BICS.

246 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

UNIT 9 SAP Lumira and Predictive

Analytics

Lesson 1
Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira 248
Exercise 18: Creating a Lumira Analysis on SAP BW Data 267

Lesson 2
Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis 271
Exercise 19: Create a Predictive Analysis on SAP BW Data 287

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Visualize and manipulate data

• Forecast in SAP Predictive Analytics

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 247

Unit 9
Lesson 1

Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson will describe how to visualize and manipulate data in SAP Lumira.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Visualize and manipulate data

SAP Lumira
SAP Lumira is a data manipulation, visualization, and story creation tool. You can connect to
one or multiple data sources to create datasets that can be enhanced with new measures,
hierarchies, and custom columns that allow you to manipulate, edit, and clean up your data.
Using the customized datasets, you can then visualize your data using a diverse range of
graphical charts and tables. You can create stories that provide a graphical narrative to
describe your data by grouping charts together on boards to create presentation style
dashboards. By adding images and text, you can annotate and add presentation details.
SAP Lumira is installed locally and can operate on either remote or local data. The charts that
are built on the datasets can be saved, printed, and sent by email. Your datasets can be
published to SAP HANA, SAP Business Explorer, the SAP Lumira Cloud, the SAP Lumira
Server, and SAP StreamWork activities.
A dataset and its charts that you create in SAP Lumira, are saved in documents with the file
format .lums. This is a document that contains the data source connection information, the
data definition and data, and the visualizations.

SAP Lumira Use Cases and Target Groups

For businesspeople, one of the biggest barriers to faster insight can be waiting for IT to create
a predefined query or report each time a new question arises. With SAP Lumira, your IT
department can enable better use of corporate data and analytics without adding to its
workload. Equally important, IT can avoid having to create additional, siloed infrastructures
across your organization to support increased demand for data-driven visualization, as the
software can connect to your SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) platform or
SAP Crystal Server software.

SAP Lumira Use Cases

• Deliver insight using a self-service approach, as there is no need for IT to create predefined
or custom queries and reports.•

• Provide data discovery functions that are connected to the enterprise (for example, to
existing data, metadata, and personal sources).

248 © Copyright. All rights reserved.

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

• Focus on its core mission of delivering information to the business in a timely manner,
while maintaining good governance that is based on one IT-sanctioned security model and
one Bl platform.

SAP Lumira Data Sources

Microsoft Excel

CSV file

SAPHANA

SAP Business Warehouse (BW)

SAP BusinessObjects Universe

Query with Structured Query Language (SQL)

Depending on your data source, data can be adapted before acquisition to include or remove
columns, attributes, measures, or SAP HANA variables and input parameters.
For certain data sources you have other options, such as data formatting, column naming and
trimming, and specifying column name prefixes.
You can also edit a data source that has been acquired. You can add or remove columns,
attributes, measures, and variables from the original data source.
Note that for data that is acquired to manipulate locally, the maximum number of cells that
can be acquired is limited by the capacity of your machine. You are notified by a warning at 15
million for 32 bit systems, and 30 million cells for 64 bit.

Data Source Editing

Add new columns that had been removed from the data source when acquired originally.

Remove columns included in the original data source.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 249

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Change values selected for SAP HANA variables and input parameters.

Data Preparation
In the Data panel, the data is raw data so it is not often formatted consistently, and is not
easily interpreted by business users. Before creating the charts to visualize your data, it is
often necessary to clean up the data so it is presentable and understandable.
Cleaning data can be done in Grid or Facet view. To the right of the Data panel, you use a data
editing panel to do column management tasks, such as column duplication, splitting,
renaming, and removal. You can also carry out row level editing tasks, for example, setting
values to lowercase, find and replace, adding or trimming text, and adding formulas.
Editing tasks can be applied to all values in a column or to selected values.

Prepare View

You use the Prepare view to view, clean, and prepare your data before creating charts.

Table 26: Panels in Prepare View

The Prepare view displays the data for the connected data source. Your workspace is divided
into the following panels:
Panel Description

Data panel The central panel containing the data dis

played as columns in Grid view, or as facets
in Facet view. You use the Data panel to view
data, and by clicking the arrow in column
headers, you can apply the following to col
umn values:

• Filter

• Sort

• Convert

• Rename

• Delete

• Merge

• Hide

Object picker Shown to the left of the Data panel. Your

measures and attributes that have been de
tected by SAP Lumira are listed here. You
can also edit or define new meaures, and cre
ate time and geography hierarchies.
Column data manipulation panel Shown to the right of the Data panel. It con
tains data manipulation tools that can be ap
plied to a selected cell or column to edit text,
convert values, create new columns with for
mulas, and rename, duplicate, and remove
columns.

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Object Picker

The Object Picker is displayed to the left of the central Data panel. At the top of the Object
Picker are icons that allow you to change the data view in the Data panel between facets and a
grid view.

Table 27: Object Picker

The Object Picker lists the following objects in the dataset:
Object Picker Objects Description

Measure Maps to aggregated data in a column or cal

culation. You use measures to get the calcu
lated result when different columns are com
bined. For example, a measure called Sales
Revenue would represent the column Sales
Revenue that contains the summed revenue
for sales. Measures are automatically detect
ed and listed.
Hierarchies References more than one related column in
your dataset. These columns have hierarchi
cal relationships. For example, an object
Time, could inlcude Year, Quarter, and Month
arranged in a hierarchical structure under the
top object Time.
Attributes Maps to columns in the dataset.
Inferred attributes One or more columns that are created based
on geography or time data available to SAP
Lumira to support a hierarchy. For example,
if you select Create a Geographic hierarchy
for the attribute City, you can select the lev
els of the hierarchy (Country, Region, City).
SAP Lumira infers the Country and Region
from a geography database, and Country and
Region columns are created matching the
City values. These columns are added to the
dataset, but are not part of the original data
set. They are inferred and added to support
the hierarchy.

Data Panel

The Data panel is the central panel in the Prepare view that shows your data. You use the Data
panel to view, organize, and clean the data.

Table 28: Data Panel

You can view data in two ways by choosing the corresponding icon at the top of the Object
Picker, as follows:
Data View Description

Grid Data is presented as columns and rows. All

rows are displayed.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Data View Description

Facets Data is presented as columns, with only the

unique values shown. The repeated values in
columns are not shown. Using facets can be
harmful if you have many repeated values.

Table 29: Data Management Tools

At the top of the panel, and in the drop down list in each column header, the following data
manipulation and formatting tools appear to help you manage and edit your dataset:
Data Management Tools Description

Data source selection list You can see what data sources are connect
ed to the current session. This appears as a
drop down list at the top left corner of the
panel. You can switch from one dataset to
another.
Combine as • Merge: You can merge data from multiple
datasets into the current dataset. The da
ta needs to be compatible.

• Append: You can add another dataset to

the current one. The common columns
are appended and different columns are
added as new columns.

Undo/Redo N/A
New dataset You can define or add a new dataset to the
current session.
Data filters You can define constraints to filter column
data.
Formula creation and edition You can create formulas using an editor and
formula language defined for SAP Lumira.

Data Manipulation Panel

The Data manipulation panel is the left side panel in the Prepare view that contains editing
tools, which allow you to edit and format values both at a column and row level for a column
selected in the Data view. Depending on the data type of the selected column, you can do the
following:

• Duplicate, rename, and remove columns

• Create columns with formulas

• Find, replace, and change string values

• Fill in prefixes and suffixes

• Convert, trim, and group values

• Edit within text strings

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Data Editing and Cleaning

To the right of the central panel, you use the editing panel to edit and format the values in a
column. The editor is indicated by a collapsible vertical sidebar that is a panel that contains
data manipulation tools. You can use the editor in either Grid or Facet view.
Note that a number of the options available in the Manipulation Tool panel are also accessible
directly by choosing the arrow in the column name, or by right-clicking the column name.
To open the editor panel, at the top right of the central panel, choose the manipulation tools
vertical sidebar. At the top of the panel, the unique column values appear in an All values box.
You can choose one or more values to edit in this box, or enter a search string in the Filter
items box. Selections in the editor panel override the value selections made directly in the
column. Column editing options depend on the data type of the column, and whether a
column, a cell, or a range of characters within a cell are selected.

Table 30: Column Editing Options

Column editing options are as follows:
Edit Tool Description

Duplicate Creates a new column that is a duplicate of

the selected column.
Rename Changes the column name.
Remove Removes the selected column.
Split Creates a new column with string values ap
pearing after a defined split point. The split
can be, for example, a punctuation mark, a
comma, or a text string.
Create Creates a new column for number and date
types that apply a function to values. For ex
ample, a function Floor can be applied to a
column Margin to create a new column of
margin values rounded down to the nearest
whole number.
Set case Changes string values to either lower or up
per case.
Find and replace Searches to find a string and replace with a
new string.
Fill with Specifies a character to prefix or suffix a
string to a defined character length.
Convert Column to text: Inserts a copy of the column
with values as text format.
Column to number: Inserts a copy of the col
umn with values as number format.
Column to date: You select a date format
then validate. A copy of the column is insert
ed with values as the new date format.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Edit Tool Description

Trim Removes characters after or before a speci

fied punctuation mark or character.
Grouping Creates a new column in which you can cre
ate new groups of rows (for example, group
1, group 2...) to organize your rows. Rows
that are not in specific groups can be organ
ized in a group called Others or can remain
individual.
Cell inner selection When you double-click in Grid view, or slow
double-click in Facet view, and select a range
of characters or a word, you can do the fol
lowing:

• Remove or replace text portions

• Create a new column with the same rows

but cleaned (for example, remove Resort
from values)

• Move the selected text to the beginning of

the row value

Data Filtering in Columns and Charts

A filter is a restriction imposed on a data set to limit the values displayed. For example, if your
chart shows revenue for products sold in the years between 1995 and 2012, and you only
want to see revenue for the years 2010 to 2012, you create a filter on the dimension Year to
limit the values shown to this period.
Each filter created in a column appears as entries in the Global filters bar at the top of the
Data panel. You can edit the filter directly from the filter bar.

Table 31: Data Filtering

You can define the following types of filters:
Filter Scope Description

Data set filter You define a filter on a column that applies to

both the data and the charts that use the col
umn
Visualization level filter You define a filter on a chart that only applies
to the chart. The filter is not applied to the
data at the dataset level.

Filter Panel
You define a filter using the Filter panel. You access the Filter panel from the drop down menu
for a column header, or from the Filter category in the Chart feeder panel.
Note that a filter defined on a chart only applies to the chart.

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Table 32: Filter Panel Options

In the Filter Panel, you have the following filter options for text based data:
Filter Options Description

Search field Type one or more characters of a column val

ue to search and display the value.
All values All unique values for the column are listed
with the number of occurances for each val
ue.
Add, remove, remove all Choose the appropriate button to add a value
to filter, remove a value from the filter, or re
move all values from the Filtered values list.
Filtered values Selected values to filter.
Keep only Select to retain only the values in the Filtered
values panel in the column. All other values in
the column do not appear in the column or
dimension.
Exclude values Select to include all values in the column or
dimension except the values in the Filtered
values panel. You define a filter to exclude
values not to include.

Numbers and Dates Formatting

Table 33: Numbers and Dates Display Formats

You can choose the following display formats for columns with number and date type:
Display Option Description

Use scientific number format Use a decimal point separator.

Use 1000 separator Use a comma separator.
Number of decimals Specifiy the number of decimal places for the
column values.
Date display formats (date type only) Select a date format.

Customization of Columns With Formulas

You can create and apply formulas to column values using the SAP Lumira formula language.
To the right of the Prepare tab, the formula editor option is available in the Data Manipulation
panel. When you create a formula on a column, a new column is created with the values
affected by the formula. Note that each function available in the formula language has an
associated description of its syntax.

Formula Editor Features

Combine any two columns in the dataset.

Apply functions from a predefined set of numeric, date and text functions. Functions are
also accompanied by a description of the syntax.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Use If...Then...Else clauses.

• Use auto-completion to speed up editing.

• Use a calendar picker for date parameters.

• Copy and paste any text or syntax into the function definition.

Functions Reference

You can customize values in one or more by defining functions available in the formula bar.

Table 34: Functions Definition

Functions are divided into the following categories:
Category Description

Aggregate Aggregates data, for example, by summing

or averaging a set of values.
Note:
Aggregate functions are imple
mented in the definition of a
measure.

Character Manipulates character strings.

Date and time Returns date or time data.
Numeric Returns numeric data.
Logical Returns TRUE or FALSE.
Miscellaneous Functions that do not fit into the above cate
gories.

Visualization and Storyboards

LE3B3 -i D l *|
File Edit V ie w D ili

Prepare Compose Share

« Purchases by PomtOISale

Filters within a visualization have o Add inters

been moved from the chart feeder
to above the chart, making them
easier to create and manage HOHB3
-TV. RetalIPnce None PointOfSalt iH v -
-7 :: Returns Sum ■ Huntington Beach
Los Angelas
•t v Revenue MEASURES
■ Mobile
ATTRIBUTES 57 ■ San Diego Pie Sectors
133 Monti ■ San Francisco
■ Web
123 Overall

ABC PomtOtSale ATTRIBUTES

ABC PostaiCod* Legend Color

ABC Product

ABC ProductCalegory

ABC ProdudGroup

ABC ProdudGroupCategory

ABC P roducfljne

ABC ProdudType

123 Purchases

1 attnbute(s) identrfied as Geography or 1 mi Dll...

Tima - ■* ■ U iiiJ k ) Save

Yoga West Retail Jdsx/Yoga West Retail I Never Refreshed I • I

Figure 74: Charts in SAP Lumira

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

You use the Visualize tab to create charts from a wide selection of chart families. The Visualize
tab uses the Object Picker panel that contains the measures and attributes defined in the
dataset, a Chart Body panel to visualize the chart, and a Chart Feeder panel.

Chart Feeder Panel

Table 35: The Chart Feeder Panel

The Chart Feeder panel guides you to build the chart as follows:
Visualization Method Method Description

Using the Chart Feeder panel The Chart Feeder panel pro
• Activate the Chart Feeder
vides a structured method to
panel.
build a chart. You can do the
• Drag attributes and meas following:
ures to the Chart Feeder.
• Drag measures and ob
jects to the indicated cate
gories.

• Sort, rank measures, de

fine filters, and add calcu
lations.

Note that visualizations are limited to 10,000 data points in this release.

Chart Building Using the Chart Feeder Panel

To the right of the Chart Body panel, the Chart Feeder panel guides you when building a chart.
You drag measures and attributes from the Object Picker, on the left of the Chart Body panel,
to the indicated boxes in the Chart Feeder, to the right of the Chart Body panel, and the chart
automatically builds with each object added.
Note that chart titles are automatically generated based on the attributes and filters used to
build the chart. You can change these at any time.

Table 35: Options in the Chart Feeder Panel

The following categories and options are available in the Chart Feeder panel:
Chart feeder category Description Options

Measures
• Measures are predefined • Sorting: Next to the meas
in the view and are listed ure, choose the arrow and
in the Measure tab of the choose an ascending or
Semantic panel. descending sort.

• Each chart must have at • Adding a calculation: Next

least one measure. to the measure, choose
the arrow and choose a
• Depending on the type of predefined calculation.
chart, if you have multiple
measures, the values are • Ranking values: Next to
color coded for each the measure, choose the
measure in the chart key arrow and choose either a
to the right of the chart. top or bottom ranking sort

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Chart feeder category Description Options

for a selected dimension

in the chart.

Dimensions • Multiple attributes can be • Axis labels: Depending on

added to the Chart Feed the type of chart, this
er . could be X axis, area
name, or other ways of de
• The attribute values show scribing the zone used to
a dimension of the data af display attribute values in
fected by the measure. a single color.

• Legend color: Attribute

values are displayed in dif
ferent colors to distin
guish the attributes.

Trellis Attributes can be added as N/A

rows or columns.
Filter You can filter the dimension N/A
either on a single value of the
dimension or choose multiple
values.

Chart Types For Your Data

There are multiple families of chart types to choose from for your visualization. You can use
charts from different families to represent similar types of information, while giving a different
look to the information

Table 37: Chart Types

The following types of charts are available based on the type of analysis shown:
Type of Data Analysis Description Available Charts

Comparison You want to view the differen

• Vertical bar chart
ces between values, or need
to show the simple compari • Horizontal bar chart
son of categorical divisions of
measures. For example, you • Bar chart with two y axes
could use a bar chart to com • Radar chart
pare the differences in your
sales revenue between differ • Multiple radar chart
ent countries.
• Surface chart

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Type of Data Analysis Description Available Charts

Percentage You want to show the per • Pie

centage of parts to a whole,
or show values as ratios to a • Multiple pie chart
whole. The legend shows the
• Vertical 100% stacked bar
percentage and the total val
ues. For example, use a pie chart
chart to see who had the • Horizontal 100% stacked
highest sales as part of a total bar chart
sales value directly: Total
sales = $200, Paul had 10% • Treemap
($20), David had 65%
($130), and Susan had 25%
($50).
Correlation You want to view the relation • Scatter chart
ship between values, or to
compare multiple measure • Bubble chart: The size of
values. For example, you can bubbles within the chart is
view the correlation of two determined by a third
measures, and understand measure.
the impact of the first meas
ure on the second measure.
Trend You want to show a trend in
• Line chart
the data values, especially for
dimensions that are time • Line chart with two y axes
based such as Year. You may
also want to see the progres • Multibarchart
sion of your data and possi • Multiline chart (multiple
ble patterns. For example, measures)
you can use a line chart to
view sales revenue trends of
a product over a range of
years.
Geographical You want to show a map of • Geographical bubble chart
the country object used in the
analysis. You may also need • Geo choropleth chart
to see the data for dimen
sions sorted by country • Geo pie chart
shown on the map, or want to
see the geographical spread
of data for any single country.

Data Trends Prediction Over Time

Table 38: Predictive Calculation

You can use predictive calculation to add the following types of information to your charts:

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Type of Predictive Analysis Description

Forecast Allows you to predict how data may behave

in a defined future period. Depending on the
type of chart, the forecasted data is dis
played as bars or a line in a single color add
ed to the existing chart plots, for a defined fu
ture time period.
Linear regression Allows you to see how data is most probably
distributed around your actual data to give a
generalized trend over time. Depending on
the type of chart, the regression is displayed
as bars or a line superimposed over the exist
ing chart plots.

The predictive calculation is available for a measure on the Y axis of a chart when charted with
a time based hierarchy on the X axis. It is not recommended to use multiple measures when
multiple dimensions are also plotted, as it becomes difficult to interpret the prediction.
Note that the forecasting is based on the Triple Exponential Smoothing algorithm which
predicts based on a single fixed time period. You are prompted to choose the time period for
the predictive analysis, so it is recommended that you choose an aggregation that makes
sense within a specific cycle. For example, if you choose an aggregation on month, this allows
the analysis to be done over a year and abstract weekly cycles.
For this release, predictive analysis is only available for bar and line charts.

Charts and Data Sharing

Charts, Stories, and Datasets Sharing

L‘
O n the Share tab, you can publish stones to SAP Lumira Cloud
Prepare Visualize Compose

Publish to SAP lum ira Cloud

STORIES 1 I VISUALIZATION 6

® Yoga West... 0

$ Yoga W est... 0

fj* YogaSurve... 0

fj) Colors

Yoga West Retail Jdsx/Yoga West Retail Never Refreshed m

| Figure 75: Sharing in SAP Lumira

Table 39: Charts, Stories, and Datasets Sharing

You can share charts created in SAP Lumira, as follows:

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Sharing Method Description

Sending your chart by mail You can automatically attach your chart to a
mail message and send it to collaborators.
Saving your document on the file system You can save your document (charts and da
ta) as a .lums document.
Printing your charts You can print charts to a printer or to Adobe
PDF format.

SAP Lumira Storyboard

Datasets Sharing

Table 40: Datasets Sharing

You share your datasets, as follows:

Sharing Method Description

Export You can save a dataset as a CSV file or a Mi

crosoft Excel file.
Publish to SAPHANA You can publish a dataset to SAP HANA as a
new analytic view.
Publish to SAP StreamWork You can publish a document to SAP Stream-
Work.
Publish to SAP Business Explorer You can publish a dataset to SAP Business
Explorer.

Note that the following restrictions apply when you export or publish a dataset:

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Both visible and hidden objects are exported.

• Filters are not taken into account.

• Columns that are referenced multiple times in the dataset are exported multiple times.

• Sorting is not taken into account.

Sending Your Chart By Mail

You can send your chart as a graphics file attachment in your default mail program.
Note that if your chart is a table type, then it is attached to a mail as a Microsoft Excel file
attachment, not as a graphics file.
There are two ways to send your charts:

• Directly from the chart

• Selecting a saved chart in the Share panel

SAP Lumira Feature Overview

• Agility for analysts

- Additional data source support: SAP S/4HANA

- SAP BW data acquisition: Acquisition Filters and Date Format

- Support for SAP HANA managed connections from BIP

- SAP HANA online end-to-end workflow on browser

• Instant insights

- User defined color palettes

- Time series analysis for additional chart types

- Offline consumption of stories on Mobile Bl

• Trust and scale

- Extended support for Scheduling

- Extended SSO support with Universe Credential Mapping

- Enhanced OpenDocument support

- Extended support for platforms

- Authentication support for Hadoop

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

% o m io n

Filter

PrM iKI Typ# i

CompaMkm

Figure 77: SAP Lumira Data Acquisition and Preparation

SAP Lumira unleashes possibilities to explore data from more sources and perform
incrementally more complex transformations on data in a trusted environment.

SAP S/4HANA

- Acquire data from SAP S/4HANA via SAP BW Analytic Engine with transient SAP
BExQueries

SAPHANA

- Support for use of SAP HANA managed connections from SAP Bl Platform on SAP
Lumiradesktop (for both Online and Offline connectivity)

- Create new SAP Lumiradocuments that access SAP HANA views using Bl launchpad

- Support for SAP HANA SPS 11

SAP BW

Filter dimension values during acquisition in metadata explorer

- Assign the Date format from SAP BW

- Support for SAP BW 7.5

Big Data

- Authentication support via Kerberos for Hadoop

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Visualizations - Chart formatting and Customizations

Customize Dimension Palette ®

■■■■ ■■■ «

IF F i"
»
M

Choose Colors
o 27
•FAE)

Pafclt*
■■■ ■■■ E S D

V Show Title
V Show Legend
Choose Colors...

Show Data Labels

£~
Use Measures as a Dimension

Set Axis S ca le-

Show Gridlines

Add Reference Line

Figure 78: Visualizations

SAP Lumira visualizations are flexible and powerful and can help you discover hidden insights
and associative information. In SAP Lumira, you can define custom color palettes, such as
categorical and quantitative palettes.
SAP Lumira also offers support for time series analysis on bubble and shatter charts.

Future Roadmap

/s. Figure 79: SAP BusinessObjects Lumira scr

SAP Lumira and SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio will be merged into one product with two
clients.

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

Business User
Professional Designer Business User Information Consumer

Browser
' u>n'

Combined Server Add-On

^C M S Repository "
Stories / Applications
Q User-defined
In Memory Data - * Extended Design Studio Components
Engine (Velocity) Runtime BICS Data Services Templates
Bookmarks

Data Online Data Access

Acquisition I

SAP BW SAP HANA UNX File 3rd Party

Figure 80: High-Level Architecture Layers

Planned: BusinessObjects Lumira 2.x, ONE product TWO clients

Today

SAP Lumira 1.30 and 1.31

E Planned Innovations

Agility & Insight for analysts

E Future Direction

Agility & Insight for analysts

Additional data source support: SAP Modernized user experience Data acquisition and manipulation on
S '4 HANA Improved R lter and Input Controls browser
Enhancements to SAP BW data Simplified visualization experience GUI for Freehand SQL connections
access Improved SAP HANA online analysis M anaged connection support for
Extended support for analytics on Support for SAP BW online analysis Freehand SQL
SAP HANA Export to P D F enhancements Simplified and extended analysis
User defined color palettes Trust and scale features (Filter on measure, out of
Offline consumption of stories on Studio applications from acquired data context calculations etc )
Mobile Bl in SAP BusinessObjects Lumira Enhanced story building experience
Extended support for scheduling Extend SAP BusinessObjects Lumira with Templates
Enhanced desktop and data source stores with Studio functionalities Improved Mobile Bl Offline
S S O support Personalize Studio applications with experience
Enhanced OpenDocum ent support SAP BusinessObjects Lumira Collaborate with commentary and
Extended support for platforms Contextual export to SAP annotation
SAP Design Studio 1.6 SP2 BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Variants support for personalization

Spreadsheet Improvements Microsoft Office Trust and scale

Ad-hoc currency conversion Schedule Studio applications based Impact and Lineage analysis
Build virtual hierarchy of stacked on acquired data Publication & broadcasting
dimensions Extended support for Enterprise Usage of SAP BusinessObjects
New SAP Fiod components deployment Lumira dataset by any Bl Client
info chart enhancem ents Application design Application design
D esigner Simple calculations, UX Additional SAP Fion components Improved components scorecard,
enhancements (Resizable, movable Componentization and reusable crosstab spreadsheet and others
dialogs) custom components Improved conditional formatting
Support of cascading filters for UNX Robust bookmarks. LCM of Continuous Improvements
and C S V data sources bookmarks and folders
This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time.

Figure 81: Product Map Overview

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Unit 9
Exercise 18

Creating a Lumira Analysis on SAP BW Data

Business Example
You want to use SAP BW infoprovider and do quick visualizations to analyze flatscreens sales.

1. Start SAP Lumira.

2. Create a new document using BW Connector, using T_SDDEM02 (Customer Cube) as the
data source.

3. Add the following dimensions and measures to create a visualization.

• Sales Volume EUR

. Material

• Cal. year/month KEY

4. Add a filter on material to select flatscreens and the date 01.2003. Change the chart to a
pie chart

5. Create a line chart to display flatscreens restricted by 2002.

6. Create a trellis for materials and chagre the chart to a pie chart..

7. Save your visualization as U##_Sales_Analysis.

SAB4
0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 9
Solution 18

Creating a Lumira Analysis on SAP BW Data

Business Example
You want to use SAP BW infoprovider and do quick visualizations to analyze flatscreens sales.

1. Start SAP Lumira.

a) Choose Start —>SAP Lumira.

2. Create a new document using BW Connector, using T_SDDEM02 (Customer Cube) as the
data source.
a) Choose File —>New.

b) Choose Download from SAP Business Warehouse.

c) Choose Next.

d) In the Connect To field, choose Local bw System.

e) In the Server field, choose r w b [s p a c e ].

f) Enter your credentials and choose Connect.

g) On the next screen search for T_SDDEM02.

h) Select Customer Cube T_SDDEM02 and choose Next.

3. Add the following dimensions and measures to create a visualization.

• Sales Volume EUR

. Material

• Cal. year/month KEY

a) In the Select Measure and Dimensions from BW Dataset screen area, select a
dimension or measure and choose the Add button.

b) Choose Create.

c) On the Visualize tab, drag Sales Volume EUR to the X Axis, and Material and Cal. yea r/
month to the Y Axis.

4. Add a filter on material to select flatscreens and the date 01.2003. Change the chart to a
pie chart
a) Next to Material, choose the Options button.

b) In the context menu, choose Filter....

c) Select all the flatscreen options and choose Apply.

Lesson: Visualizing Data in SAP Lumira

d) Next to Cal. year/month, choose the Options button.

e) In the context menu, choose Filter....

f) Select 01.2003 and choose Apply.

g) Choose the Pie Chart icon.

5. Create a line chart to display flatscreens restricted by 2002.

a) Create a new chart by clicking on the Create New visualization button.

b) Drag Sales Volume EUR to the X Axis, and Material and Cal. year/month to the Y Axis.

c) Next to Material, choose the Options button.

d) In the context menu, choose Filter....

e) Select all the flatscreen options and choose Apply.

f) Next to Cal. year/month, choose the Options button.

g) In the context menu, choose Filter....

h) Select all entries for 2002 and choose Apply.

Hint:
Search for 2002 in the filters and add all the months found.

i) Choose the Line Chart icon.

6. Create a trellis for materials and chagre the chart to a pie chart..
a) Choose Trellis.

b) In the Rowsfield, add Materials.

c) Choose the Pie Chart icon.

7. Save your visualization as U##_Sales_Analysis.

a) Choose File —►Save As.

b) In the Name field, enter u##_Saies_Anaiysis.

c) Choose Save.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Visualize and manipulate data

Unit 9
Lesson 2

Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson will demonstrate how to forecast in SAP Predictive Analysis, using data mining
capabilities and algorithms.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Forecast in SAP Predictive Analytics

SAP Predictive Analytics

SAP Predictive Analytics is a statistical analysis and data mining solution that enables you to
build predictive models to discover hidden insights and relationships in your data, from which
you can make predictions about future events.
SAP Predictive Analytics combines SAP Infinite Insight and SAP Predictive Analysis in a single
desktop installation. SAP Predictive Analytics includes two user interfaces, Automated
Analytics and Expert Analytics.
Automated Analytics includes the following modules:

• Data Manager is a semantic layer tool used to facilitate data preparation.

• Modeler helps you create models such as classification, regression, clustering, time series,
and association rules. Models can be exported in different formats so that you can easily
apply them in your production environment.

• Social extracts and uses implicit structural relational information stored in different kinds
of data sets, improving the decision and prediction capacities of the models. It can
represent data in the form of graphs that show how the different data are linked. Dedicated
workflows help you create colocation and frequent path analyses based on geo-referenced
data.

• Recommendation generates product recommendations for your customers based on a

social network analysis.

• Predictive Factory (installed separately) lets you automate the management of predictive
models created in Modeler such as retraining a model, applying a model to a new data set,
and detecting model deviations. Refer to Predictive Factory online help.

Expert Analytics enables you to do the following:

• Perform various analyses on the data, including time series forecasting, outlier detection,
trend analysis, classification analysis, segmentation analysis, and affinity analysis.•

• Analyze data using different visualization techniques, such as scatter matrix charts,
parallel coordinates, cluster charts, and decision trees.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Use a range of predictive algorithms, the R open-source statistical analysis language, and
in-memory data mining capabilities for handling large volume data analysis efficiently.

Predictive Models Creation and

Predictive Models Consumption
Management

k & &

Business Analysts
(Line of) Business Users Citizen Data Data Scientists
Scientists

Analytics Skill Set

SAP Line of Business Applications SAP Analytics SAP Predictive Analytics

SAP HANA, SAP BW, Hadoop, Major Databases

SAP Advanced Analytics Solutions

Figure 83: Democratize Predictive

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Create, apply and manage predictive models Access to embedded predictive use cases

SAP Line of Business

SAP Analytics
Applications

Access and store data, apply predictive models

Figure 84: SAP Advanced Analytics Solutions

Automated Analytics Expert Analytics

• End-to-end automation of your • Customization of predictive modeling

predictive projects process

Guided, powerful lata preparation Extended support of SAP HANA

Native libraries
• Fast ieployment
8000+R-algorithms
• Predictive Factory to manage 1000's
of models Drag and drop model creation

Figure 85: Automated Analytics and Expert Analytics

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Data Manager

With Data Manager, you can automate the production of analytical datasets by doing the
following:

• Building analytical datasets with clicks, not code

• Creating thousands of derived attributes

• Using metadata to automate dataset production

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

• Creating reusable transformations

Modeler
With Modeler, you can automate the predictive modeling process with the following:
• Classification

• Regression

• Clustering

• Time Series Analysis

• Association Rules

• Automatic identification of key contributing variables

• Executive and operational reports

Link Analysis
In SAP Predictive Analytics, you can create insights by identifying and analyzing relationships.
You can extract variables for enhanced link analysis and prediction, and then identify
communities amongst your customers and find influencers within those communities to
focus efforts where they count the most.

Recommendation
In SAP Predictive Analytics, you can achieve a higher level of personalization by creating
personalized recommendations for each visitor, and by creating and visualizing rule sets from
transactional data.

Expert Analytics

Expert Anlaytics is easy to use, share and collaborate.. You can drag and drop data to select
and prepare predictive modeling.
Expert Analytics comes with reusable models, R functions, and libraries. The predictive
models can be used in SAP HANA, shared with other users, and embedded in external
applications.

Algorithms

SAP Predictive Analytics is delivered with best-in-class algorithms for SAP HANA and third-
party databases.

Compatible SAP HANA Modules and Functions

The algorithms can be used with the following SAP Modules:

Automated Predictive Library (APL)

Predictive Analysis Library (PAL)

Unified Demand Forecast (UDF)

Sentiment Analysis

Optimization Function Library (OFL)

Rich Modeling Capabilities

The algorithms have the following rich modeling capabilities:

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Anomaly Detection

• Association Rules

• Classification

• Clustering

• Data Preparation

• Demand Forecasting

• Model Performance Comparison

• Outlier Detection

• Optimization Function Library

• Regression

• Sentiment Analysis

• Time Series

Scoring

• One-click deployment of scores into production

• In-database scoring using SQL

• Interface with business applications using scoring equations and code:

- SQL

- Java

- PMML

- SAS

- C, C++

• Build custom applications thanks to the scoring equations

Predictive Factory
Predictive Factory lets you automate the management of predictive models created in SAP
Predictive Analytics.
In Predictive Factory, you can do the following:

• Automatically refresh analytic data sets and models

• Deploy scores to production

• Detect data and model performance deviations

• Automatically schedule and trigger retraining tasks

• Use event-based task execution

• Use segmented time series modelling

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Consumption and Visualization of Results

Predictive scores created in SAP Predictive Analytics can be written back in to most
databases and consumed by SAP Business Intelligence Clients such as:

• SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office

• SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

• SAP BusinessObjects Design Studio

• SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

• SAP Lumira

• SAP Crystal Reports

Scoring equations can also be injected to allow scoring on the fly.

Embed Predictive Models for Business Users

SAP HANA business application are delivered with preconfigured predictive use cases.
Predictive models can be created using SAP Predictive Analytics and embeddedin the SAP
HANA business applications.
Scores are consumed directly in the business application by the decision maker.
Models can be retrained from within the business application.
The duration of development cycles is minimized.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Future Road Map

Today Planned Innovations Future Direction

Simplify Simplify Simplify
Single product with Automated and Unified user interface (SAP Fiori) for Unified user interface (SAP Fiori) for
Expert Analytics business analysts and data scientists business analysts and data scientists -
SAP Fiori-based Predictive Factory to - Unified data preparation and data one engine for online and offline modes
automate the training, scoring, and acquisition Very small data sets stability
updating of 1000's of models easily • Client/Server deployment on SAP SAP Business Warehouse powered by
Supports SAP HANA views (Content, Business Intelligence platform SAP HANA end-to-end scenarios:
Analytical. Attribute) and SAP BW on framework dynamic scoring
SAP HANA
Automated and Expert Analytics Expert Analytics Expert Analytics
leverage APL on HANA Schedule expert models (chains) in New and enhanced predictive
Expert Analytics algorithms
Predictive Factory
De-facto client for SAP HANA: Embeddable predictive engine Super node - easily manage group of
Sentiment Analysis, Demand components as a unit.
Forecasting, Optimization Function Data preparation/manipulation
Big Data
Model performance comparison with components (merge, formula)
Spark MLLib support with Hadoop as an
partition and KPI selection Extensions in Python
analytical engine in Expert Analytics
Multi-charts support in custom R scripts SAP HANA PAL Catalogue support in
Upgrade to new versions of Hadoop, Hive
on SAP HANA EA enabling all PAL
and Spark
Apply expert models (entire chain) on SAP HANA Vora Support Big Data
datasets on SAP HANA Very wide datasets (50k columns) Apache Storm / Apache Spark
R extension IP Protection (offline)
Big Data streaming
Predictive Factory Native Spark Clustering, Social, Time
Hive and Spark SQL In-Hadoop data
Segmented Classification Series
preparation and scoring 15K column
support through Hive Ultra-wide datasets: 500k+ columns
Ecosystem Apache Spark GraphX support
Automated Analytics with native Spark
Exposing predictive services to SAP LOB
modeling capabilities to push data
Applications Ecosystem
intensive workload to Spark
Prebuilt capability embedded in SAP Enable SAP HANA Cloud Platform
SAP HANA smart data streaming
Fraud Management with the ability to push (HCP) predictive services deployment
Automated Predictive Library (APL)
custom models from SAP Predictive on non-HCP environments - i.e. natively
Auto-Algorithms: classification,
Analytics on SAP HANA
regression, clustering, time series,
recommendation, key influencers, scoring This is the current state of planning and may be changed by SAP at any time.
equations, social analysis.
APL on IBM Power platform support (Release 3.0)

Figure 88: SAP Predictive Analytics R Madmap

Predictive Analytics Use Cases and Target Groups

SAP Predictive Analytics is intended for professional data analysts, business users,
statisticians, and data scientists who want to analyze and visualize data using predictive
algorithms. To use the SAP Predictive Analytics application, you need to be familiar with
statistical and data mining algorithms and have a basic understanding on how to use these
algorithms.

SAP Predictive Analytics Use Cases

• Forecasting: How do historical sales, costs, key performance metrics, and so on, translate
to future performance? How do predicted results compare with goals?

• Key influencers: What are the main influencers of customer satisfaction, customer churn,
employee turnover, and so on, that impact success?

• Trends: What are the historical/emerging, sudden step changes, and unusual numeric
values trends, that impact the business?

• Relationships: What are the correlations in the data? What are the cross-sell and up-sell
opportunities?•

• Anomalies: What anomalies might exist and, conversely, what groupings or clusters might
exist for specific analysis?

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Data Mining

From a business perspective, data mining has its origin in the Customer Relationship
Management (CRM) area, specifically marketing. Businesses utilize demographic data and
past history to predict customer purchasing behavior and perform target marketing. It is also
heavily used to drive sales suggestions for alternate or related items during a purchase
transaction.
Data mining is sometimes categorized under the field of Artifical Intelligence (Al). Even state-
of-the-art data mining tools are just a part of larger Decision Support Systems (DSS)
supporting human decision makers by providing information and analytical results.

High-Level Architecture

Microsoft
Excel
d redicth
SAP HANA
tables and
knalysi views

L A
Relational
Database Universe
(SQL Query)

Figure 89: SAP Predictive Analytics Data Sources

A component is the basic processing unit of SAP Predictive Analytics. Each component has
one input and/or multiple output connection points. These connection points are used to
connect components through connectors. When you connect components together, data is
transmitted from predecessor components to their successor components.

SAP Predictive Analytics Components

Preprocessors

Algorithms

Data writers

SAP Predictive Analytics is installed and run locally on the client machine. As of release 1.0.9,
SAP Predictive Analytics can only run on Windows 7 (both 32- and 64-bit clients are
available). SAP Predictive Analytics has a small library of built-in predictive functions for linear
regression, time series analysis, and outlier detection. The software largely relies on the local
R, HANA Predictive Analytics Library (PAL), and HANA-R predictive libraries for most of its
predictive functionality.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

SAP Predictive Analytics Modes

HANA online mode, in which data is stored on HANA and predictive algorithms are run on
either HANA or an affiliated R Linux host.

Offline mode, in which data from a flat file or database is downloaded to the user’s
workstation and processed using only the client system resources.

R Algorithms
Use algorithms to perform data mining and statistical analysis on your data. For example, to
determine trends and patterns in data.
SAP Predictive Analytics provides built-in algorithms such as regressions, time series, and
outliers. However, the application also supports decision trees, k-means, neural network, time
series, and regression algorithms from the open-source R library. You can also perform in
database analysis using PAL algorithms from SAP HANA.
SAP HANA supports in-database data mining through R integration and PAL.

R Configuration
After you have installed R, you need to configure the R environment to enable R algorithms in
the application.
As a statistician or a data scientist, you can create and add your component using R scripts in
SAP Predictive Analytics. The newly added component is classified under Custom R
Components in the Components list, depending on the type of component created. For
example, it can be classified as an algorithm, a preprocessor component or a data writer. You
can use custom components in SAP Predictive Analytics to perform analysis on the acquired
data set.
R is a software programming language and environment for statistical computing and
graphics. SAP Predictive Analytics provides an environment for you to use R scripts (within a
valid R function format) and create a component, which can be used for analysis in the same
way as any other existing component. While creating an R component, you can provide a
name for the component, which appears under the classification, Custom R Components in
the Component list.

Algorithm Sources for SAP Predictive Analytics

Table 41: SAP Predictive Analytics Data Sources

You can acquire data from the following data sources:
Data Source Description

Microsoft Excel You can acquire data from a Microsoft Excel

spreadsheet and perform in-process (in-
proc) analysis using SAP and R algorithms.
CSV You can acquire data from a comma-sepa
rated value data file and perform in-process
(in-proc) analysis using SAP and R algo
rithms.

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Data Source Description

Connect to SAP HANA You can acquire data from SAP HANA tables,
views, and analysis views and perform in-da
tabase (in-db) analysis using SAP HANA PAL
algorithms. In this mode, the data is never
taken out of the database for processing, and
hence, the processing speed is very high.
This mode can be used to process large data
sets.
Download from SAP HANA You can acquire data from SAP HANA tables,
views, and analysis views and perform in-
process (in-proc) analysis using SAP and R
algorithms. In this mode, SAP HANA PAL al
gorithms are not available for analysis.
Download from a universe You can acquire data from SAP BusinessOb-
jects universes that exists on the XI 3.x and
Bl 4.x platforms, and perform in-process (in-
proc) analysis using SAP and R algorithms.
Query with Structured Query Language You can create your own data provider by
(SQL) manually entering the SQL for a target data
source and perform in-process (in-proc)
analysis using SAP and R algorithms.

List of Algorithms

Once you have the relevant data for analysis, you need to apply appropriate algorithms to
determine patterns in the data.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Determining an appropriate algorithm to use for a specific purpose is a challenging task. You
can use a combination of a number of algorithms to analyze data. For example, you can first
use time series algorithms to smooth data and then use regression algorithms to find trends.

SAP Predictive Analytics Algorithms

Table 42: SAP Predictive Analytics Algorithms

The following table provides information on which algorithm to choose for a specific purpose:
Purpose Algorithm

Performing time based predictions Time series algorithms

• Single exponential smoothing

• Double exponential smoothing

• Triple exponential smoothing

Predicting continuous variables based on Regression algorithms

other variables in the dataset
• Linear regression

• Exponential regression

• Geometric regression

• Logarithmic regression

• Multiple linear regression

• Polynomial regression

• Logistic regression

Finding frequent item set patterns in large Association algorithms

transactional datasets to generate associa
tion rules • Apriori

• AprioriLite

Clustering observations into groups of simi Clustering algorithms

lar item sets
• K-means

Classifying and predicting one or more dis Decision trees

crete variables based on other variables in
the dataset • SAP HANA C 4.5

• R-CNR tree

• Chi-squared Automatic Interaction Detec

tion (CHAID)

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Purpose Algorithm

Detecting outlying values in the dataset Outlier detection algorithms

• Inter quartile range

• Nearest neighbor outlier

• Anomaly detection

• Variance test

Forecasting, classification, and statistical Neural network algorithms

pattern recognition
• R-NNet neural network

• R-Monotone Multi-layer Perceptron

(MONMLP) neural network

If you do not find a relevant algorithm, you can create your own custom component using R
script within SAP Predictive Analytics and perform analysis on your acquired data.

Open Source R
R is an open-source programming language and run-time environment that is heavily used by
statisticians and mathematicians, and is particularly popular in the academic and research
communities. R is freely available via the Comprehensive R Archive Network (CRAN) at
http://CRAN.R-project.org/ under a general public license.
In addition to being freely available and open source, the main benefit of R is the flexibility it
provides: as it is a programming language, a skilled programmer can implement virtually any
algorithm in R. R was a natural choice for SAP to select as an engine for Predictive Analytics:
not only does it complement the in-memory HANA architecture, but also, as an open-source
programming language, R will never be acquired by a competitor, thus never cutting off SAP’s
access to the critical predictive engine. However, since R is free, SAP must add significant
value beyond the available R algorithms to justify the licensing cost of SAP Predictive
Analytics.
SAP Predictive Analytics uses R algorithms in each of the offline and HANA online modes, and
R algorithms are the sole source for most of the offline algorithms (e.g., association,
classification, clustering, and decision trees). The R algorithms are available in offline mode
once the user installs R on a local machine, including the required packages that SAP
Predictive Analytics uses. R algorithms are also intended to be used for online HANA
processing, for which R is installed on a separate host that interacts with the HANA server
directly. SAP Predictive Analytics is compatible with any version of R 2.11 or higher.

Predictive Analytics Repository

The SAP Predictive Analytics Repository contains fore different core items.

SAP Predictive Analytics Repository Contents

• List of supported components

Data reader, data preparation, algorithms, and data writer components

• Default folder
Predictive Analytics

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

• Image icons and .jar files

Required for starting SAP Predictive Analytics

• User created content

Analyses, folders, saved models, HANA connections

Using SAP Predictive analysis with SAP BW

A standard installation of SAP Lumira lets you acquire data from many different data source
types, and provides a wide variety of visualization types. But by installing extensions, you can
have an even broader choice.
SAP Lumira extensions are similar to the extensions, add-ons, and plug-ins that are available
for popular web browsers. Extensions can add new features or provide enhanced
connectivity.
Two types of extensions are available for SAP Lumira:

• Data access extensions let you acquire data from data sources that are not otherwise
supported by SAP Lumira.

• Visualization extensions let you design your own custom chart types.

Extensions can be either provided by SAP, or created by your own developers or third parties.
For example, your organization may be using a custom database type. Your developers can
create an extension that will allow SAP Lumira users to use your organization's data. You can
install the Universe extension or the BW extension to acquire data from SAP BW.
The Download data from SAP Business Warehouse extension, provided by SAP, lets you
directly connect to SAP Business Warehouse (BW) systems using Business Intelligence
Consumer Services (BICS) connectivity. This allows you to download a slice of BW data to
Lumira Desktop. This connectivity allows you to connect to SAP Business Explorer (BEx)
queries or InfoProviders.
Once the data is acquired in SAP Lumira, users can perform the following data discovery
activities:

• Interact with, manipulate, and experiment with the BW data

• Apply data transformations to the BW data

• Merge BW data with other data sources

• Build visualizations and compose stories

• Share data in a visual manner with other users in your organization

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

Columns and Attributes Organization

Figure 91: Charts in SAP Predictive Analytics

You can view the data acquired as columns or as facets. You can organize the data display to
make chart building easier by doing the following:

• Create filters and hide unneeded columns.

• Create measures, time hierarchies, and geography hierarchies.

• Clean and organize the data in columns using a range of manipulation tools.

• Create columns with formulas using a wide selection of available functions.

The Predict Tab

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

Once you have acquired the relevant data in the Prepare tab, the Predict tab allows you to
create an analysis to find patterns in the data and predict the future outcomes.
In the Predict tab, you can do the following:

• Create an analysis.

• Build predictive models.

• View analysis results.

• View model visualizations.

• Build charts.

Unit 9
Exercise 19

Create a Predictive Analysis on SAP BW Data

Business Example
You want to use the nearest neighbor algorithm to find out outlier customers from the rest of
the customers. This could be used in regression or classification.

1. Start Expert Analytics in SAP Predictive Analysis.

2. Create a new document using BW Connector, using P_SALES01 as the data source.

3. Edit the data source to include the following dimensions and measures.

• Sales Volume EUR

• Sold to party

4. Find the three outliers using Nearest Neighbor Outlier detection.

5. View the results as a chart.

Unit 9
Solution 19

Create a Predictive Analysis on SAP BW Data

Business Example
You want to use the nearest neighbor algorithm to find out outlier customers from the rest of
the customers. This could be used in regression or classification.

1. Start Expert Analytics in SAP Predictive Analysis.

a) Choose Start —>SAP Predictive Analysis.

b) Select Expert Analytics and click the link with the same name.

2. Create a new document using BW Connector, using P_SALES01 as the data source.
a) Choose File —>New.

b) Choose Download from SAP Business Warehouse.

c) Choose Next.

d) In the Connect To field, choose Local bw System.

e) In the Server field, choose r w b [s p a c e ] .

f) Enter your credentials and choose Connect.

g) On the next screen, choose Options —>Show Key and then search for P_SALES01.

h) Select P_SALES01 and choose Next.

3. Edit the data source to include the following dimensions and measures.

• Sales Volume EUR

• Sold to party

a) In the Select Measure and Dimensions from BW Dataset screen area, select a
dimension or measure and choose the Add button.

b) Choose Create.

4. Find the three outliers using Nearest Neighbor Outlier detection.

a) Choose Predict and then drag and drop the Nearest Neighbor Outlier detection from
the Algorithms on the right side panel onto the main canvas.

b) Move your pointer over the Nearest Neighbor Outlier icon on the canvas and then click
the Options button.

c) In the Nearest Neighbor Outlier dialog box, in the Output Mode field, choose Show
Outliers.

d) In the Number of Outliers field, enter 5.

Lesson: Forecasting in SAP Predictive Analysis

e) In the Feature field, choose Sales Revenue eur.

f) Choose Done.

g) Move your pointer over the Nearest Neighbor Outlier icon on the canvas and then click
the Options button.

h) Choose Run up to Here.

i) Choose OK to view the results.

5. View the results as a chart.

a) Choose Visualize.

b) In the Select Component field, choose Nearest Neighbour Outlier.

c) Next to OutliersDetected, choose the Options button and then Filter.

d) In the Filter dialog box, choose 1 and then Apply.

e) Drag Sales Revenue EUR to the X Axis and OutliersDetected to the Y Axis. Or choose
the Related Visualizations button to see related charts.
You have identified 5 outliers to your data using SAP BW.

Unit 9: SAP Lumira and Predictive Analytics

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Forecast in SAP Predictive Analytics

Unit 9

Learning Assessment

1. Which of the following are the use cases of SAP Lumira?

Choose the correct answers.

□ A Deliver insight using the self-service approach.

□ B Provide data discovery functions that are connected to existing data.

□ C Create advanced analysis workspaces.

□ D Bring together relational, dimensional, and unstructured sources, for consumption

and analysis in different visualization tools.

2. Which of the following are SAP Predictive Analytics components:

Choose the correct answers.

| A Universes

B Preprocessors

| C Algorithms

D Data writers

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 9

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Which of the following are the use cases of SAP Lumira?

Choose the correct answers.

0 A Deliver insight using the self-service approach.

0 B Provide data discovery functions that are connected to existing data.
□ C Create advanced analysis workspaces.
□ and
D Bring together relational, dimensional, and unstructured sources, for consumption
analysis in different visualization tools.

2. Which of the following are SAP Predictive Analytics components:

Choose the correct answers.

| A Universes

\x \ B Prep rocessors

|~xj C Algorithms
[~x| D Data writers

UNIT 10 SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

and SAP NetWeaver BW

Lesson 1
Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space 294

Lesson 2
Describing Data Connectivity between SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW 300
Exercise 20: Create an Information Space on top of SAP NetWeaver Business 305
Warehouse (BW) using a Relational Universe

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Create an information space

• Create SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

SAR4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 10
Lesson 1

Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

Information Space

LESSON OVERVIEW
This lesson provides an overview of Information Spaces.
Use SAP BusinessObjects Explorer to perform a search of your data. Find relevant datasets
and keep the datasets as Information Spaces.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create an information space

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer is a data discovery application that allows you to retrieve
answers to your business questions from corporate data quickly and directly. Through the
means of search, you can find relevant data that is held within consistent, meaningful
datasets known as Information Spaces.
To find your answers, you can filter and drill through Information Spaces and view only the
data you are interested in via advanced visualizations or charts. You are then able to perform
visual analysis to attain the information you are looking for quickly in the most appropriate
format.

Lesson: Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Overview

Quickly and easily explore your data using search.

Easily visualize your data.

Geographic and time awareness.

Build simple, interactive views (exploration views).

Mobile ready.

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Key Benefits

Empower casual users to experience self-serve data discovery.

Discover critical answers over the Web or on a device.

Improve adoption with intuitive behavior for date, time, and geographical dimensions.

Create user-defined dashboards more easily without dependency on IT or training.

Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

• Executives

• Managers

• Information consumers

Information Space Use Cases and Target Groups

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer users can be divided into three groups.

User Profiles for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

Space Explorer
Space explorers are users who search across information spaces, explore the data these
spaces contain, and sometimes export that data to other applications.

Space Creator
Space creators are users who create information spaces based on the data available from
SAP BusinessObjects universes. Note that these users require authorization to the
universes on which they build information spaces. Authorization to universes can be set up
by an SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise administrator.

Administrator
Administrators are IT specialists who set up and manage corporate deployments of SAP
BusinessObjects Explorer, including assigning security rights to end users and scheduling
information spaces for indexing, so that they can be searched by the SAP BusinessObjects
Explorer search engine.

Use Cases for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

Explore data intuitively

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

No data model or data knowledge is required and it is easy to search, filter, and order the
values.

• Perform visual analyses

The most relevant facets are displayed, charts are automatically proposed, response
times are fast, and you are given visual feedback.

• Share insights with others

Export, bookmark, and send links by e-mail.

H om e S e a rc h R e s u lts : flo w e r u E x p lo re : eF a sh io n -

B o o k m a rk E m a il £ E x p o rt t- s h ir t 2 0 03

M e a s u re s: SKU d e s c i! Year i T:
S a les re v e n u e (S U M ) 1 Pel* C ollar* d . $4 ,9 47 ,32 7 $ 1 0,83 1,7 84
Q u a n tity s o ld (S U M ) w K itky Donee... $4 2 9 ,7 9 0 2 0 02 $ 1 3,23 2,2 44
M a rg in (S U M ) $ 1 79 ,8 04 2001 $ 7 ,0 49 ,23 8
D is c o u n t (SU M ) lo o s e - F x 'in * ... $1 3 4 ,1 3 4
O c c u rre n c e s (C O U N T) Plover Patterned T -S h.rt

C kenllle Loot*.. $1 1 5 ,0 8 3
Violoo T -S K irt $9 9,29 9

3.03%

Figure 94: Explore and Find Answers

Information Spaces
An information space contains data that you can analyze. It is structured, consistent, and
optimized so you can easily find information and always get the right answer to your business
questions. The data that an information space contains share a contextual meaning, thus
providing information for a specific business area or activity. This information can be used to
understand a subject (such as product sales) from many different perspectives. For example,
you can use an information space to see product sales by region, by customer or by product
type.

Facets and Tabs

Facets are used for navigating through information spaces. Each facet contains a grouping of
labels that you can use with keywords. These keywords make the underlying data meaningful.
When exploring an information space, the facets are based on the context of the information
space. Exploration facets are subdivided into category facets, which are either selected facets
or suggested facets depending on what you have currently selected. The available measures
are listed in the Measure panel to the left of the facets. By default, there is always at least one
measure value selected. Separate operations are displayed on separate tab pages. For
example, if you perform a search on the Home tab page, the search results are displayed on
the Search results tab page.

Lesson: Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

Information Space Management

An information space is a collection of objects mapped to data for a specific business
operation or activity. For example, an information space designed to provide information on
regional retail outlets could contain objects mapped to data for Sales Revenue, Region, Store
Name, Year, and so on.
Only one data provider can be selected when you create an information space. However, you
can create multiple information spaces on a single data provider - each information space
can contain a subset of the total data available, so that analysts can focus easily on a specific
area of interest.
Note that power users with the space creator user profile create the information spaces on
top of corporate data providers, i.e. SAP BusinessObjects universes in .unx format.

Aggregated Values Use

When defining an information space you choose objects from a data provider (such as an SAP
BusinessObjects universe). You can maintain the measure objects and their values that have
been previously created for the data provider.
A measure object is often aggregated and has been created using aggregation methods
(None, Count, Sum, Min, Max, and Average) during design. The aggregation methods
determine how measure values are calculated and displayed.

Table 43: Aggregation Methods

The aggregation methods are as follows:
Method Description Example

None The measure is never aggre N/A

gated and therefore does not
appear in measure facets.
However, values are dis
played within the table view.
Count The measure is established Number of Employees: 25
upon the total number of re Departments: Sales, Market
cords that are based upon a ing, and Finance Count of
grouping. For example, the Employees in the Sales De
number of employees within partment: 10
a department.
Sum The measure is based upon Country: UK, Sales 2001:
the sum of records that 20000, Sales 2002: 45000.
match a grouping. For exam Sum = 65000
ple, the sales revenue for a
country over two years.
Min The measure is based upon Country: UK, Sales 2001:
the minimum value of a set of 20000, Sales 2002: 45000.
records that match a group Min = 20000
ing. For example, the mini
mum sales revenue for a
country over two years.

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Method Description Example

Max The measure is based upon Country: UK, Sales 2001:

the maximum value of a set 20000, Sales 2002: 45000.
of records that match a Max = 45000
grouping. For example, the
maximum sales revenue for a
country over two years.
Average The measure is based upon Country: UK, Sales 2001:
the average value of a set of 20000, Sales 2002: 45000.
records that match a group Average = 32500
ing. For example, the average
sales revenue for a country
over two years.

Scheduling
Scheduling is a way of synchronizing your information spaces by stating when you want
indexing to occur. Scheduling ensures that the data is refreshed regularly. Scheduling is
defined on the Manage Spaces tab. It allows you to index information spaces directly in the
information space list with the Index Now button.
All indexing runs as a background task but progress can be monitored via the list of
information spaces within the Manage Spaces tab. For example, within the Manage Spaces
tab, you can see if the space is fully indexed and ready for full exploring, or if the indexing
failed because of irretrievable data.

Table 44: Scheduling

The types of scheduling you can use are as follows:
Scheduling Type Description

Now The indexing runs as a background task im

mediately.
None There is no indexing: this setting is the de
fault for new information spaces.
Once The indexing runs once according to a date
and time you specify. It is set via a start time
value, and, when the value is in the past,
scheduling runs immediately.
Periodically You can define if the scheduling should run
on a by-minute, hourly, daily, or weekly basis.
Minutes The indexing runs on a by-minute basis
based upon the minutes value you define.
You state when you want the indexing to
start and when to end. The first index is cre
ated on the start time you have specified.

Lesson: Creating an SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

Scheduling Type Description

Hourly The indexing runs on an hourly basis based

upon the hour values you define. You state
when you want the indexing to start and
when to end. The first index is created on the
start time you have specified.
Daily The indexing runs once every N number of
days based upon a start time and an end
time. You state when you want the indexing
to start and when to end. The first index is
created on the start time you have specified.
Weekly The indexing runs on selected days based
upon a start time and an end time you have
defined. For example, you can index every
week on Monday, Thursday, and Sunday. The
first index is created on the start time you
have specified.

Information Spaces Indexing

Indexing is the method of updating, converting, and sorting information space data for easy
search and retrieval. Indexing is a background task, which means that you do not see it in
operation. However, you can see the progress of indexing via the Manage Spaces tab.

Additionally, indexing does not affect you while you are navigating through an information
space. For example, if the information space is being indexed during navigation, it does not
update until you close the Explore tab. If you are a new user of the information space, who is
beginning to explore an information space after indexing has finished, you can see index
updates. You can also see updates when someone else is exploring the old copy of the
information space. This handling prevents locking of information spaces and other users
blocking you from exploration.

Hint:
The latest available indexed information spaces are always displayed in Search
Results to ensure that you have access to the most accurate information. If you
perform a search before an information space is indexed, only the previously
indexed version appears in the results. Once the indexing of the information
space is complete, you see the new version when you search again.

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:•

• Create an information space

Unit 10
Lesson 2

Describing Data Connectivity between SAP

BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver
BW

LESSON OVERVIEW
Connect SAP BusinessObjects Explorer to SAP NetWeaver BW. Create an Information Space
on top of SAP NetWeaver BW by using a relational universe.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

Data Connectivity Overview for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer 4.x can consume data from the following different data
providers.

• BusinessObjects universes - .UNV and .UNX (relational)

• Excel spreadsheets

• SAPHANA

• SAP NetWeaver BW Accelerator

• SAP Lumira

Lesson: Describing Data Connectivity between SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Note that OLAP universes are not supported.

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer: Supported and Unsupported SAP NetWeaver BW

Elements

Table 45: NetWeaverBW Elements Support

This table summarizes SAP BusinessObjects Explorer's support for various NetWeaver BW
elements:
BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects SAP BusinessObjects SAP BusinessObjects
Explorer (Authored Explorer (BW Accel Explorer (BW with
UNX) erator) HANAasDB)

Characteristics Yes Yes Yes

Key Figures Yes Yes Yes
Free Characteristics Yes Yes Yes
Restricted Key Fig No Yes No
ures
Calculated Key Fig No Yes No
ures
Display Attributes No No Yes
Navigational A ttr i Yes Yes Yes
butes
Custom Key Figure No No No
Structure
Custom Characteris No No No
tic Structure

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

BEx Element SAP BusinessObjects SAP BusinessObjects SAP BusinessObjects

Explorer (Authored Explorer (BW Accel Explorer (BW with
UNX) erator) HANA as DB)

Compounded Char Yes Yes Yes

acteristics
Optional Variables N/A Yes N/A
Manadatory Varia N/A Yes N/A
bles
Characteristic Value N/A Yes N/A
Variables
Formula Variables N/A Yes N/A
Hierarchy Variables N/A No N/A
Hierarchy Node Vari N/A No N/A
ables
Hierarchy Version N/A No N/A
Variables
Key Date Variable N/A Yes N/A
Condition in Rows N/A Yes No
(from BEx Query)
Condition in Columns N/A Yes No
(from BEx Query)

Exceptions (from BEx N/A N/A N/A

Query)
Exception Aggrega No Yes Yes
tion
Zero Suppression No Yes N/A
Local Calculations N/A Yes N/A
(defined in BEx
Query)
Scaling Factor No Yes N/A
Number of Decimals No No N/A
Display Options for No Yes N/A
Characteristics (Key,
Key & Text, Text)
Result Rows (Show, No No N/A
Suppress)
Placement of Subto No No N/A
tal (above or below
nodes)

Lesson: Describing Data Connectivity between SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Note:
For a comprehensive list of supported and unsupported BW Elements, please
refer to SAP Note 1869560.

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Unit 10
Exercise 20

Create an Information Space on top of SAP

NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW) using a
Relational Universe

Business Example
Analysts need access to orders and sales data so that they can create their own reports and
exploration views containing charts and tables easily without deep product knowledge or
further support from the IT department.

Create an Information Space

1. Launch SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and create an information space for exploration
based on U##_BW_BusinessLayer.unx. Log on to SAP BusinessObjects Explorer using the
following credentials:
Field Name Value
System <your assigned system>
SAP System RWB
User name user##
Password <your password>
Authentication SAP

2. Enter the name U##_Orders for the new information space.

3. Add the following objects to the Facets folder:

Folder Name Dimension Name

Customer Country
Customer Region
Material Material
Material Material group
Sales area data Sales Organization
Sales area data Distribution Channel
Time Calendar year/month

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Folder Name Dimension Name

Time Calendar year

4. Add the following objects to the Measures folder:

. Net Value of Sales Volume EUR

• Cost of Incoming Orders

• Cost of Invoiced Sales

5. Choose the Index Now button.

When the indexing is complete, a check mark appears in the status column.

6. Choose the Home tab and search for the term Sales. Choose your new information
space.

7. Set the measure to Cost of Incoming Orders and the dimension to Calendaryear/month.
Note that months are displayed in the technical format YYYYMM.

8. Only display results from the calendar year 2006.

9. Change the visualization type to Trend and change the measure to include Net Values of
Sales Volume EUR.

10. Choose the values for the 12 months for the USA and use the selected values as filter
values.

11. Create an exploration view set and add an additional chart to your existing chart.

12. In the Measures dropdown menu, select the Net Value of Sales Volume EUR checkbox and
deselect the Occurrences checkbox.

13. In the Dimension dropdown menu, choose Material. Choose OK.

14. Change the chart type to pie chart and insert a tabular view next to the pie chart. The
tabular view should show Material, Cost of Incoming Orders and Cost of Invoiced Sales.

15. Add a filter view to the exploration view and choose Sales Organization.

16. Save the exploration view as u##_ExpiorationView.

17. Close the Exploration View tab and choose the Home tab.

18. Choose the Exploration View Sets button.

You can now use the Exploration View in the browser and on your mobile device.

Unit 10
Solution 20

Create an Information Space on top of SAP

NetWeaver Business Warehouse (BW) using a
Relational Universe

Create an Information Space

a) Choose Start —*■ Bl Launch pad <your assigned system>.

b) Choose Applications —> Explorer.

c) Choose Manage Spaces.

d) Expand Universes (*.unx) —> Training—> U##_BW_BusinessLayer.unx.

e) Choose New.

2. Enter the name U##_Orders for the new information space.

3. Add the following objects to the Facets folder:

Folder Name Dimension Name

Customer Country

SAR4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Folder Name Dimension Name

Customer Region
Material Material
Material Material group
Sales area data Sales Organization
Sales area data Distribution Channel
Time Calendar year/month
Time Calendar year

a) Choose the Objects tab.

b) Drag the above items from the Universe panel to the Facets, Measures and Filters
panel.

4. Add the following objects to the Measures folder:

. Net Value of Sales Volume EUR

• Cost of Incoming Orders

• Cost of Invoiced Sales

a) Choose Validate.

b) In the Prompts dialog box, choose Finish.

c) Choose OK.

5. Choose the Index Now button.

When the indexing is complete, a check mark appears in the status column.

6. Choose the Home tab and search for the term Sales. Choose your new information
space.
a) Choose the Home tab.

b) Choose Refresh list.

c) In the Search field, enter Sales.

d) Choose Search.

e) Choose U##_Orders.

7. Set the measure to Cost of Incoming Orders and the dimension to Calendar year/month.
Note that months are displayed in the technical format YYYYMM.
a) In the bottom panel, in the Displaying field, click the first field.

b) Select the Cost of Incoming Orders checkbox and deselect the Net Value of Sales
Volume EUR checkbox.

c) In the second field, select Calendar year/month and deselect Distribution channel.

d) Ensure that the Top 12 values are selected.

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Lesson: Describing Data Connectivity between SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

e) Choose OK.

8. Only display results from the calendar year 2006.

a) In the upper panel, in the Calendar year panel, double-click 2006.

9. Change the visualization type to Trend and change the measure to include Net Values of
Sales Volume EUR.
a) Choose the Trend button.

b) In the Displaying field, in the first field, select the Net Values of Sales Volume EUR
checkbox. Leave the Cost of Incoming Orders checkbox selected.

10. Choose the values for the 12 months for the USA and use the selected values as filter
values.
a) In the upper panel, in the Country panel, double-click US.

b) To choose the values, draw a box around the 24 values in the chart. You can also
choose the values in the table on the right hand side.

c) To use the selected values as filter values, in the bottom right of the chart, choose the
Filter the facet(s) with the chart selection button.

11. Create an exploration view set and add an additional chart to your existing chart.
a) At the top of the screen, in the menu bar, choose the Create View Set button.

b) From the Visual Elements panel, drag a chart item (the item on the left) and drop it on
top of the existing chart.

12. In the Measures dropdown menu, select the Net Value of Sales Volume EUR checkbox and
deselect the Occurrences checkbox.

13. In the Dimension dropdown menu, choose Material. Choose OK.

14. Change the chart type to pie chart and insert a tabular view next to the pie chart. The
tabular view should show Material, Cost of Incoming Orders and Cost of Invoiced Sales.
a) To change the chart type, choose the Change the Chart type button.

b) Choose Percentage —> Pie Chart.

c) From the Visual Elements panel, drag a tabular view (the item in the middle) to your
exploration view and place it next to the pie chart.

d) For the Dimension, in the second unnamed dropdown box, choose Material.

e) Choose OK.

f) For the Measure, in the first dropdown box, select the Cost of Incoming Orders and
Cost of Invoiced Sales checkboxes. Deselect the Occurrences checkbox.

15. Add a filter view to the exploration view and choose Sales Organization.
a) In the Visual Elements panel, the Filter View is the object on the right. Drag a Filter View
to the Exploration View and place it next to the table.

b) Choose Sales Organization.

c) Choose OK.

16. Save the exploration view as u##_ExpiorationView.

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

a) Choose Save as.

b) Enter the name u##_ExpiorationView.

c) Save in Public Folders —> Training —> User Area —> User##.

d) In the Save as dialog box, choose Finish.

17. Close the Exploration View tab and choose the Home tab.

18. Choose the Exploration View Sets button.

You can now use the Exploration View in the browser and on your mobile device.

Lesson: Describing Data Connectivity between SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Information Space

Unit 10: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP NetWeaver BW

Unit 10

Learning Assessment

1. Which component is not part of an information space?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Facet

B Measures

| C User group

D Filters

Unit 10

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Which component is not part of an information space?

Choose the correct answer.

| A Facet

B Measures

[~xj C User group

D Filters

UNIT 11 Information Distribution

(Optional)

Lesson 1
Reporting with Mobile Devices 316

Lesson 2
Creating Publications with SAP Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence 326

Lesson 3
Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal 328

Lesson 4
Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management 336

UNIT OBJECTIVES

• Describe how to make reports available on mobile devices

• Create a publication

• Describe the integration of Bl content with SAP NetWeaver Portal

• Describe the life cycle of a deployment

• Manage the life cycle of a deployment using the Life Cycle Management (LCM) tool

• Create a new job

• Manage job dependencies

• Schedule and roll back jobs

• Perform basic version management

• Identify factors that affect life cycle management

• Apply best practices for managing the life cycle of a deployment

Unit 11
Lesson 1

Reporting with Mobile Devices

LESSON OVERVIEW
Make your reports available on mobile devices. Use the SAP BusinessObjects Mobile Bl app or
the SAP BusinessObjects Explorer app for mobile reporting.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Describe how to make reports available on mobile devices

SAP Mobility

With billions of mobile devices and zettabytes (1 trillion gigabytes) of data in the world, the
challenge is targeting the right data to the right users when and wherever they want it.
This amount of data is increasing exponentially and the expectation of the users is changing
to demand access to this data.
SAP has a lot of experience in the mobile world and has developed SAP BusinessObjects
Mobile which leverages existing SAP BusinessObjects Bl tools to provide data to the mobile
world.
SAP is the market leader in mobility (Sybase), business analytics (SAP BusinessObjects), and
business applications (SAP Business Suite).

Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

Business Intelligence tools are the starting point for SAP BusinessObjects Mobile. SAP
Crystal Reports, SAP Design Studio, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, SAP
BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Office, and SAP Lumira are the only SAP
BusinessObjects Bl tools that SAP will invest and develop in the future. With the exception of
SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Office, the other SAP BusinessObjects Bl tools
provide good support for mobile deployment.

| Figure 98: A Day in the Life of SAP BusinessObjects Mobile

Mobile apps are the future of data consumption and analysis. Integrating your mobile device
into your analytical world is a natural progression

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

iOS and Android are supported and there is limited support for Blackberry. Specific mobile
platforms support different SAP Bl tools. We will look at this in more detail later.
For specific versions supported by each OS, refer to the Mobile PAM.

SAP BusinessObjects Mobile is the only app you need for high quality reporting.
Mobile reporting provides the following benefits:

• Access to your business data anywhere, anytime

• Connect to live business data and make smarter decisions

• Interactive experience for business users and executives

• Intuitively access, navigate and analyze data

• Smart search for relevant information

SAP BusinessObjects Mobile Architecture

The SAP BusinessObjects Mobile solution allows mobile users to access the SAP
BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) content and data visualizations to make faster and
more informed decisions; on the move.
This solution contains three mandatory components:

• SAP BusinessObjects Mobile client (SAP Bl app)

• SAP BusinessObjects Mobile server

• SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) platform server

The following optional elements for enhanced security in your landscape are also available:

• A reverse proxy server

• A Sybase Unwired Platform server (along with a relay server)

The figure, SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (Bl) Platform 4.2 Architecture, defines
the following Bl tool groupings: Discovery and Analysis, Dashboarding and Apps.and
reporting. These groupings are important because different groupings are supported by
different operating systems for the mobile device. Only iOS supports all of these groupings.

Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

SAP BusinessObjects Explorer and SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards are listed in the figure
but are tools that SAP is not currently investing in.

Table 46: SAP Business Objects Business Intelligence Mobile: Platform / Content
Compatibility Bl 4.2
This table show the groupings that each platforms supports._________________
Client Supported Bl Platform Ver Support Bl Content Types
sions

• XI 3.1
Apple All Bl content types
• Bl 4.x

• Dashboard and apps

Android • Bl 4.x
• Reporting content types

• XI 3.1
Blackberry Reporting content types
• Bl 4.0

Table 47: Bl Content Type Matrix for Mobile Devices

Bl Content Type iPad iPhone Android Tablet Android Phone

Web Intellignece Y Y Y Y

Crystal Reports Y Y N N
Dashboards(De Y N Y N
sign Studio
documents)
Analysis applica Y Y Y Y
tions
Explorer Infor Y Y N N
mation spaces/
exploration
views
Lumira artifacts Y N N N
Hyperlinks Y Y Y Y

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Document Settings for Mobile Access

Figure 101: SAP BusinessObjects Server Installation

The first technical step in deploying a mobile environment is to deploy the Bl Server in your
landscape.

Installation Requirements:
• Minimum supported version is XI 3.1 SP4 for basic content functionality

• Full range of content and security features is supported from Bl 4.0 onwards

• Server can be either Windows or Unix-based

• Check SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Product Availability Matrix (PAM) for
details: http://help.sap.com/bobip

Special mobile property settings are needed to control the accessibility to the Bl inbox on
your mobile device. The settings here are related to documents sent to the Bl inbox only.

Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

Access to documents in folders in the Bl launch pad are controlled with additional category
settings. For more information, see https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ae46Br5S-rY.

Categories to Enable Documents to be Visible on Mobile Devices

Various categories control the look or behavior of the report on the mobile device. In addition
the mobile category allows access to the reports via the Bl mobile platform. This is to allow
you to control access to sensitive reports in a mobile environment over and above normal
access to the folder in the Bl launch pad.

• Add categories in Launchpad or CMC to control which content is visible on the device

- Mobile category is mandatory

- Additional categories are optional:

■ Confidential (for documents that must not be stored on the device)

■ MobileDesigned (for Webl documents that must follow a specific layout)

• Mobile category can be one of the following:

- Corporate category - visible to all mobile users

Personal category - visible only to one specific user

Web Intelligence-Specifc Settings for SAP BusinessObjects Mobile

Some tools in the SAP BusinessObjects suite have special properties and settings associated
with rendering on mobile devices.

Some tools in the SAP BusinessObject suite have special properties and settings associated
with rendering on mobile devices
As you add more elements and reports into a Web Intelligence document, you need to be
consider how they render on a mobile device. There are two options that are triggered based
on the assignment of different categories to the Web Intelligence document.
For any document, including Web Intelligence documents, to appear on a mobile device, the
document must be added to the Mobile category (corporate or personal).

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

In the Card layout model, a single device screen can accommodate a maximum of four report
elements. You can view these screens by sliding your finger across the screen. If a Web
Intelligence report has more than two report elements on a single horizontal line, the report
after the first two report elements are moved to the next line on the device screen. If a Web
Intelligence report has more than two report elements on a single vertical line, the report
elements after the first two report elements are moved to the next screen of the device. The
layout of the initial two report elements is maintained on the device screen.
If the Web Intelligence report has only two report elements next to or below each other, their
layout is not maintained on the device screen. This is an exceptional case.
A free-standing cell report element is not displayed separately in the Card layout. For the free
standing cell to appear in a layout, it has to be tied to a report table cell. The various scenarios
for the Card layout are displayed in the following table. The scenarios are for sample portrait
and landscape views on a device for a Web Intelligence report with one to four report
elements. The number of layout scenarios increases along with the number of elements in a
Web Intelligence report. In the Card layout, it is not possible to accurately predict the
appearance of the elements. However, the advantage of the Card layout is that any Web
Intelligence document can be viewed on a mobile device without requiring you to redesign the
reports.

Note:
A report element with sections will not appear properly in the Card layout. We
recommend you use the Page layout in this situation.

Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

If you use the page layout, all report elements (charts, tables, free-standing cells) on one page
of a Web Intelligence report are displayed on a single device screen. SAP BusinessObjects
Mobile scales the size of the report element for an optimal fit on the device screen. In some
scenarios, there can be disruption to the layout of report elements appearing on device.
Restriction The iPhone does not support documents designed in the Page layout model. If a Bl
document assigned to the MobileDesigned category on the Bl platform is viewed on an
iPhone, it does not display the report elements based on the page layout designed on the
platform. On the iPhone, each application page (single screen) accommodates one report
element.
If a report contains blank cells, the Card layout model displays the report on the device screen
in the same way. Report elements in subsequent pages of the Web Intelligence report are
displayed in further screens, indicated by pagination dots, on the device.
If a report element spans multiple pages in the Web Intelligence report, the element belongs
to the page where it originates. For example, in the Web Intelligence report, there is a long
vertical table in the first page with five pages. On a mobile device, the table can be displayed
only on the first page and you scroll vertically to see further data. If the height or width of a
table on a single page of the Web intelligence report does not fit the device screen, you can
scroll vertically or horizontally to display the full table. The records of the table are not
truncated.
In a Web Intelligence report, objects on a single page in landscape format are shown on a
single page on a mobile device. Below is an example of a report with six report elements. The
layout of the report as seen in the Web Intelligence Quick Display view mode is displayed
above.

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

This is what a Crystal Reports document looks like on Bl Mobile. Other supported documents,
like Design Studio, are not affected by the Designed For Mobile category.

Design Studio-Specific Settings

SAP Design Studio applications must be designed with the idea that some Analysis
Applications created in SAP Design Studio will be deployed on tablets and some on phones,
and still more on desktops. In general, you need to think about and avoid enabling complex
applications to be visible on mobile devices and only allow those simpler applications with
summarized data to be deployed to a mobile workforce.

t New Application UT°M

Application N m t

folder

| PubKc foMtn/DesignStudioSamples | [irowse...

Template O SAPWS •# SAPUIS m

New vnth Desagn Studio

Create* an enpt, analysis application,

using the UlS man control set Only the
Basic Layout themes Blue Crystal and High Contrast
Black are supported

Standard
Name BLANK
Created by. SAP S£
Based on: SAPUIS m

Blank Bas< Layout

Figure 107: SAPUI5m

When you start to create a new application with the Design Studio desktop tool, SAP Ul 5 and
SAP Ul 5 m templates or blank layouts.

Lesson: Reporting with Mobile Devices

When designing design studio applications, you should use radio button SAPUI5m as the
design elements in accessible to the designer with this option selected are better optimized
for mobile. They are also work just fine for non-mobile applications, so all new Design Studio
Applications should be created with this option selected.
Initially the “ m" in SAPUI5 m meant mobile now, “ m” means main. Choosing SAP UI5 m
means you get application components with the Fiori look and feel and this is the direction
SAP is choosing going forward for consistency across GUIs. Therefore, even if you creating a
desktop app, but especially for mobile apps choose this option.
To find out more about design studio designing for mobile see: http://scn.sap.com /
community/businessobjects-design-studio/blog/2015/12/01/design-studio-innovation-
series-topic-8-introducing-the-new-m-mode-for-rendering-fiori-stvle-apps-in-design-
studio-16

Design Studio Summary

• M Mode rendering is a very welcome new feature in Design Studio 1.6

• Brings us significantly more capability for easily building of Fiori-style Bl apps

• Has different look and feel of components with more future development focus

• Has a new application property: Compact Form Factor

"Compact" style which is optimized for desktop and the "Cozy”( Compact = false” style)
which is optimized for touch devices.

Mobile Bl Resources

SCN page/Customer Forum

http://scn.sap.com/community/mobile/businessobjects

Android Simulator Used for exercise simulation

http://www.bluestacks.com/about-us/app-player.html

Documentation
http://help.sap.com

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:•

• Describe how to make reports available on mobile devices

Unit 11
Lesson 2

Creating Publications with SAP Crystal

Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Web
Intelligence

LESSON OVERVIEW
Schedule the delivery of reports to specific users or user groups with a publication.
Schedule the publication of a report object from SAP Crystal Reports or from SAP
BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. Configure the publication with server side trust so that
passwords are not required by your users to view the report.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Create a publication

Publications
A publication allows you to schedule an object for a large set of user groups or a set of users
and define specific rules about the output format and delivery to each of the recipients. In
combination with the server-side trust, you can use a publication to schedule SAP Crystal
Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence object by keeping the data-level security
from your SAP NetWeaver without the need to replicate it.
The SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise system can act on behalf of the SAP users in a
password-free way and thus schedule the report of each SAP user (multipass bursting). The
figure Publications shows the corresponding screen of the application.

New Public a t ion

General Properties
S oiree Documents Avaflable S elected
Enterprise Recipients
Dynamic Recpients
Search title • i p N <Oofl > M
Personalization M <h lo f 1 ► N ID * lu ll Name
Formats
D estnatons f ID ‘ FuN Name No ite m to display
P rint Settngs Group List c A dm nistrator
Delivery Rules
Merged POF Options £ Guest
Database Logon e Q aawsServletPrincpal
Parameters
PubIcation Extensor
Recurrence
Notification
Events Excluded
Scheduling Server Group
Advanced ■* <[Oofl * *
|Q * lu ll Name

No ite m te display

Figure 108: Publications

Lesson: Creating Publications with SAP Crystal Reports and SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

Workflow for Publication with Server Side Trust

The figure Publication and Scheduling Workflow with SNC and Impersonation outlines the
workflow of publication and the scheduling process resulting out of the publication leveraging
the granted server side trust to achieve impersonation.

Start
Publication is configured for a report object
User A, User B and User Group 1 is part of the publication

Step 1 Step 2 Step 3

Scheduling process User Group 1 is Processing is executed for each user
starts resolved resulting in configured for the publication
User C and User D Scheduling is executed based on configured
trust without the use of passwords
Prerequisite
Processing tier has access to BOE Prerequisite
PSE file via operating system
credentials SNC is configured for SAP BW and
BusinessObjects Enterprise
Certificates have been exchanged between
SAP and BusinessObjects Enterprise
BusinessObjects Enterprise

/\ Figure 109: Publication and Scheduling Workflow with SNC and Impersonation*•

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Create a publication

Unit 11
Lesson 3

Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver

Enterprise Portal

LESSON OVERVIEW
Users have a single point of access to applications, services, and data with the SAP
NetWeaver Enterprise Portal. Give users and user groups roles and levels of access to your
data.
Integrate SAP BusinessObjects Bl content with the SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal to
deliver your Bl content to your users through the portal.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Describe the integration of Bl content with SAP NetWeaver Portal

SAP Enterprise Portal

Q l » |7http:ftVK>bnt2282.«*dhs«.cofp:50000Anfeartai — E *> ip •
Fiem yew Ftvootw loots He*
U <£f S’Urevertel Wortt* •S*> Netwe*.*r Pcrtd £«• • j Is * • ”
EmS Search Q. • Logcrtl

* Be* Forward » History Fevotle* Perscretoe Vew hefci rWcone. NU.LPH.

U? I © 13 0 0
►tone
^ Oreriww
Reportra, Antoyss endPtonnro Corteri Aden jlratom User Adtnrrseaton SystemAdnrrslrecien 1
Ful Screen Cptore » 1

U niversal W orklisl H3

Figure 110: SAP Enterprise Portal

In addition, the portal offers business users the capability to easily create and manage portal
pages and to generate their own portal content.

Lesson: Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal

SAP Netweaver Portal Desktop

A portal desktop defines the structural layout and design of the portal workspace displayed
on the screen. It is a structured collection of iViews, pages, themes, and layouts, which can be
personalized at runtime.

Figure 111: SAP Netweaver Portal desktop

In the design time environment, a portal desktop is a collection of framework pages and portal
themes, which is defined and customized by content and system administrators, and
ultimately assigned to portal users through portal display rules.
A framework page defines the layout of navigational and structural elements in the portal
desktop. A portal desktop may contain more than one framework page. The administrator
responsible for configuring the portal desktop object sets the active framework page.
A portal theme Defines the overall look-and-feel of user interface elements in a portal
desktop, such as color, contrast, and font usage. A portal desktop may contain more than one
portal theme. The administrator responsible for configuring the portal desktop object sets the
default portal theme.

System Landscape Directory

The System Landscape Overview appears when you navigate to System
Administration —>System Configuration .

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

=i»i
.Mdf.Up-Cttp SOOOQftttwUJ i - r p•
W 0* S ’ S?*«*nUrrfstap*- NWWMwei PorUl • Q • Utl * \^P«Oe • j)Toob *

Figure 112: System Landscape Directory

It is a multipurpose system management tool encompassing three primary purposes:

• Displaying all the systems comprising the system landscape.

• Associating systems with system aliases to provide back-end connectivity.

• Providing alternative access to the system editors and utilities available from the Portal
Catalog context menu.

Portal Content Administration

The content administrator is responsible for all tasks that are relevant to the creation and
management of content objects in the portal.
Portal users can gain access to portal content that resides in document repositories, internal
and external services, reports and analytics, and business transactions in enterprise
applications. Content should be developed in a way that enables members of the organization
to connect to their information repositories from the portal, retrieve data, and interact with
this data through a usable interface.
Portal Content Objects
Portal content consists primarily of iViews. Each iView brings specified data to the portal
desktop from an information resource such as a relational database, ERP system, CRM
system, enterprise application, collaboration tool, e-mail exchange system, intranet, or the
Internet. iViews return up-to-the-minute information each time they are launched.
You can import ready-made iViews into your portal environment from the Portal Content
Portfolio on the SAP Developer Network, you can create them from templates provided with
the portal, or you can develop custom-made versios using the content-creation tools in the
portal or other content development kits.

Lesson: Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal

iViews are generally displayed through portal pages. You can import predefined pages or you
can create your own pages. The page definition includes a list of associated iViews and layout
specifications. Also available for import from the Portal Content Portfolio on SAP Developer
Network are worksets and business packages. Worksets bundle related pages, iViews, and
roles, while business packages are generally groups of related worksets.
User access to content is determined by role definitions. A portal role is a collection of task-
oriented content. While portal content is developed to enable access to information relevant
to the organization in which the portal is deployed, roles define the subset of content available
to each function within the organization. Users are assigned to the role or roles that provide
content relevant to them. A user has access to the content that has been assigned to all of his
or her roles.
Role definition determines the navigation structure within the portal. The navigation structure
consists of the top-level navigation bar, and the detailed navigation tree. A user navigates
portal content by choosing tabs in the top-level navigation and detailed navigation.
Portal Content Studio
The Portal Content Studio is the content administrator's main environment for developing
and managing portal content. The range of functionality that you have in managing portal
content depends on the configuration of your portal.

Integration of SAP BusinessObjects with SAP Enterprise Portal

The Integration Kit is part of the Business Intelligence installation and does not need to be
installed separately. The latest information on integration can be found at h ttp ://
wiki.sdn.sap.com/wiki/displav/BOBJ/BI4+lntegration+into+the+SAP+Entreprise+Portal
+7.0.X

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

3 ♦» x | .>• p •

:| *1 "Iv* * * ' land* at* hr* .. |S ' JtaJrt - *□ - m • •p*9* * & Took * *

ET Sewdt [^ » Log on

« Ok * * i * nnorv F«m r io t rv o < « / » h *> Wefcome HtLLPH.

e> e> © o u?
rtv»» Parting, AMyto armB r m j
u«i» Coftfl»j(bcn Ti h i i m H Montana
Carta* M m nttnoer
PanMMni
IH w M n n a o m
S fito o Lta ^ o t F M M M to M
>
AiMarafrtfic*
Succart CorlwISUMd
I
SoucvfctFacfcagerte* * 0®rt Sw" «

F k MHyPocu— > w. t UBfcorf

• Tranopcr! Thanes
• XM. Cvtart and AcMra
This overview shows you
par port*..cortertican s
the objects included in the
• Carter! Mronng
• O w o *F (C iw h (C (r^«l Bus*«3>C*»eels_Svsteni_Te*T|iB#e
pcdpcrtH c vtirU tn ia p a k w y LagBmnwsCMmftnrw
pcaporta.carte'Ucan uppatvay.iaEteiaresiCtpasMieM
“com.sap.businessobjects
p«tniM .co 1ittan.sosia .iViews.templates.epa”
pcaprai.cMeiUan MppcWvay.uMrfliismjCtitai
file.

BGEEEB
CcrtsrtlohaO^ernntirr [ * • 3
ItHW
M1

Figure 114: Integration of SAP BusinessObjects withSAP Enterprise Portal.

To integrate SAP Bl Platform Objects, follow these steps:

1. Install the portal integration kit files which you can find in the installation directory of the
SAP Bl platform installation. Install the com.sap.businessobjects.iviews.par file first, via
the JSPM or NWDI (NetWeaver Developer Infrastructure). Then transport the
com.sap.businessobjects.iviews.templates.epa files.

2. Configure the source system in the SLD.

3. Create your role with the corresponding pages and iViews that reference the objects in the
BOE repository.

Document Viewer
There are two main iView templates - the SAP BO Document Viewer template and the SAP BO
Document List template. The former is the simplest type of portal component you can create.
It displays a single report selected by the portal administrator at the time they deploy it. Users
will see the report when the iView portal page is displayed. They can navigate within the report
normally, but cannot navigate to any other reports unless the default report contains linked
reports. The portal page designer or administrator configures the content that is displayed in
the iView.

Lesson: Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal

Figure 115: Document Viewer

Document List
The SAP BO Document List Template is used for visualizing single BO Reporting objects in the
Enterprise Portal. It can use either CUIDs (Unique character String) or IDs (unique numeric
value) to identify an object and provides users with many of the same features that Bl launch
pad provides.

flM_Mew_Oocufnent_Llal

Detailed Navigation
sap BMMWMOktacta AtPkMtnt* _
►□ Content A
►□ Uttf Admn*ar$t>0«

1 V*w * New * Ogarwe '■ Send • More Actions * Delate 0#1 ► ► ■r Trafnfng_Formatted Rej
*D UyC a Board.Rote * * [iI
* C3 OTG_Buer«MObfecta_XO_and_8M 1My Documents Title Received On * From Type
►CJ Sy*l#m Aomr BOB) Owns: R31~WO,ei4_EP_SO
^ M My Poverties » J CrystalReportVicwcr: 6291 Hay 9, 2011 10.48 AH Dfb Crystal Report;
* Co S j t m t aitMganeo
» - ■ ■ In m o g formatted Report for D Kay 9, 2011 10:49 AH Wt> Web In trllxjr.J demor«tia*e*aw*t-
*OM_Rote ~Vieblnte»gence
» .J Training Working with Hyperbnk Hay 9, 2011 103*9 AM OKI Web InteOagem formatted report that
^Intoo* « ready tor 3-1
W_Mtw_pocun«rH_V*>*m
■£*My A.efts
DRt.1 r to work
toed Alert*
'“ ■A Person* CMtgore*

J 0
Figure 116: Document List

Users can navigate all reports they have permissions to view, view personal folders, and
browse categories. They can also edit reports, schedule report refreshes or manually refresh
reports, search Bl content, and set user preferences (if they have appropriate permissions).

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Introduction to iViews
An iView (integrated view) is a logical portal content building block representing a visual
application or part thereof.
iViews let you extend the reach of your portal to any available information resource,
regardless of where it may be stored. The underlying architecture of iViews enables them to
return up-to-the-minute information each time they are launched, from data sources as
varied as:

• relational databases

• ERP systems

• CRM systems

• rnterprise applications

• collaboration tools

• Intranets

• the World Wide Web

• e-mail exchange systems

A portal is like a personalized newspaper. iViews are the "articles" that make up that
newspaper. But iViews are not merely static links that retrieve words and numbers. iViews
allow you to dig deeper by asking questions and searching for related information in real time.
For example, rather than just showing you open sales orders from your ERP system, iViews
allow you to pursue the matter until you know why an order is late and what you can do to ship
it faster. And since iViews seamlessly integrate with other systems, you can immediately pull
up contact information of those customers in your CRM system without leaving the
Enterprise Portal environment, to inform them of the late delivery.

Note:
Certain iViews do not necessarily exist as fixed content objects in a portal desktop.
They may be used to facilitate other means of information retrieval and
navigation.

Integration
iViews are generally based on portal components, which are the pieces of code that provide
the iView its functionality and ability to retrieve and display content. Each iView comprises a
set of properties, which are used at runtime to parameterize the portal component on which
the iView is based. Different iViews can implement the same application, or different
applications.
For iViews based on the same portal component, it is the properties that provide each one its
unique personalized behavior. Alternatively, an iView can be based on another iView, using it
as a template, thereby inheriting certain properties and overwriting others, recursively.
According to the portal content object model (Content Object Model), a delta link chain of
dependent iViews always resolves to a portal component, the code running the application.
At design time, iViews are selectively distributed to end users through portal roles in the
following manner:

0For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Lesson: Integrating Bl Content with SAP NetWeaver Enterprise Portal

• An iView is assigned to a portal page. The page is then assigned to any number of user
roles or worksets. A user then has access to all iViews contained in the pages to which his
or her roles have been granted access.

• An iView is assigned directly to a user role or workset, not through a portal page. iViews
assigned directly to roles, are sometimes referred to as full-page application iViews.

To be able to fully run iViews in a portal runtime environment, end users must have the
appropriate access permissions on the level of the iView, in addition to the system and
application on which the iView may be based.

Features
A wide variety of iView templates, tools, and wizards are shipped with the portal, enabling you
to create a wide variety of iViews without any programming knowledge. The Portal Content
Portfolio on the SAP Developer Network also provides a large selection of business packages
that cover a wide scope of business scenarios. You can also develop your own iViews in Java
or JSP using the API of the Java iView Runtime.
The Client Framework is a mechanism that enables iViews to communicate with one another
locally, reducing the load on the portal server, and establishing a connection between iViews.
You use this connection to create a more complex application out of individual iViews.
SAP Enterprise Portal (SAP EP) uses iViews as the fundamental building blocks to create
portal content. EP comes with many predefined iViews (templates) so portal content
administrators can easily create content.
SAP BusinessObjects delivers an iView template for integration of Crystal Reports into the
Enterprise Portal. For other BOE content like SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence you can
use the URL iview template which is an EP standard template.

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:•

• Describe the integration of Bl content with SAP NetWeaver Portal

Unit 11
Lesson 4

Describing the Transport Mechanism using

Promotion Management

LESSON OVERVIEW
Transport all BusinessObjects content to a QA or Production System using the Promotion
Management feature in SAP BusinessObjects.

LESSON OBJECTIVES
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:

• Describe the life cycle of a deployment

• Manage the life cycle of a deployment using the Life Cycle Management (LCM) tool

• Create a new job

• Manage job dependencies

• Schedule and roll back jobs

• Perform basic version management

• Identify factors that affect life cycle management

• Apply best practices for managing the life cycle of a deployment

Lifecycle Management Process

Lifecycle Management Definition

• Lifecycle management refers to the entire process of designing, developing, and

maintaining an application solution.

• Lifecycle management also encompasses the effort to optimize the solution with ongoing
improvements.

• The phases of a lifecycle can occur at the same site or at different geographical locations.

• Resources are transferred from one repository to another repository. Their dependencies
add complexity to the move process.

For SAP products, lifecycle management refers to the complete process surrounding an
application including gathering the initial requirements, designing the solution, building and
testing the solution, deploying the solution, the ongoing operation of that solution, and
optimizing the solution to improve it over time. Ongoing improvements can lead to further
requirements that are rolled into a subsequent iteration. Lifecycle management also
describes the change management, administration, auditing, monitoring, and troubleshooting
of an application.

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Lifecycle management refers to the set of processes involved in managing information related
to a product’s life cycle and establishes procedures for governing the entire product life cycle.
These phases can occur at the same site or at different geographical locations.
The Bl resources that are present in the development repository must be transferred to the
testing repository for testing deployment. The time required to transfer resources from one
repository to another repository must be minimal to obtain a high-quality and competitive
product. These resources also have dependencies that have to be moved from one repository
to another. The dependencies add complexity to the movement of resources because the
resources have to move with their dependents.

Figure 117: Lifecycle Management Process

The Lifecycle Management Console for SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
4.1 is now integrated into CMC as the Promotion Management tool, which enables you to
move Bl resources from one system to another without affecting the dependencies of the
resources. It also enables you to manage different versions of Bl resources, manage
dependencies of Bl resources, and roll back a promoted resource to restore the destination
system to its previous state.

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Run promotion
Bl platform Bl platform
management
4.1 SP1 tool* 4.1 SP1

Deployment Option
Create an LCMBIAR file to
transfer business intelligence
data to a remote deployment
before using the PMT.

* The PMT must be the highest of the

two versions if the source and target
CMS are different minor releases.
Figure 118: Bl Resources Moved to Another System

Importance of Lifecycle Management

Industry regulations (such as the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and HIPPA) require new levels of rigor
when moving content between environments. Lifecycle management of business intelligence
content can help you maintain these requirements with the following features:

Lifecycle Management Requirements and Regulations

Internal controls are required to manage how changes are made, who can access
production systems, and synchronizing changes across complex system landscapes.

Reports need to be correct and on time with minimal downtime.

Changes to systems, data, and processes must be thoroughly tested.

Sensitive data must be protected.

Business intelligence has become mission critical.

Costs can be reduced by avoiding errors, rework, and system downtime.

Security can be increased by enabling recovery from errors and malicious acts and by
safeguarding information.

Lifecycle Management (LCM) Console Overview

Overview of the Lifecycle Management Console

The Promotion Management tool is also know as the Lifecycle Management Console, and
has the following uses:

- It is used only for managing the ongoing lifecycle for Bl content.

- With this tool, administrators can package Bl content and promote efficiently it through
multiple environments.

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

- Administrators can also manage multiple versions of the same Bl resources.

- The tool is integrated with the Central Management Console (CMC).

The Promotion Management tool, also known as the Lifecycle Management Console, for SAP
BusinessObjects Bl 4.x is used only for the Bl content lifecycle. Bl content lifecycle
management services focus on managing the ongoing lifecycle for Bl content. This tool allows
Bl administrators and operations teams to package Bl content and associated dependencies
and to promote that content in an efficient, reliable, and repeatable fashion through multiple
environments. Bl content lifecycle management is a subset of this larger topic, primarily in the
test and deploy phases.
The promotion management tool allows moving Bl resources from one repository to another,
manages dependencies of the resources, and rolls back promoted resources at the
destination system, if required. It also supports the management of different versions of the
same Bl resource.
The promotion management tool is integrated with the Central Management Console. You
can only promote a business intelligence resource from one system to another if the same
version of the Bl platform is installed on both the source and destination systems.
Many Bl deployments contain different stages such as development, testing, and production.
Reports and other Bl objects often require modification or enhancement due to changing
information and business requirements. Administrators must control how objects are
promoted through these stages, whether the objects are completely new, or the objects have
the rights to overwrite or update the objects that already exist in the destination environment.*•

Development Test Production

Develop content Validate content Verify changes

(reports, universes, Test security
etc.) Test software (support
packs, patches, etc.)

Figure 119: Promotion of Multiple Environments

LCM Functions
Features of th e Prom otion M anagem ent Tool

• Bl content promotion

• Dependencies management

• Job scheduling

• Security rights promotion

• Promotion testing

• Restoration (roll-back) to a previous state

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

• Event monitoring in the auditing database

• Configuration of tool parameters

• Version management

• Promotion override

The Promotion Management tool supports the following features:

• Promotion - This feature enables you to perform the following tasks:

- Create and update infoobjects in the destination system.

- Create a new job.

- Copy an existing job.

- Edit a job.

- Schedule a job promotion.

- View the history of a job.

• Managing Dependencies - This feature enables you to select, filter, and manage
dependents of infoobjects in the job that you want to promote.

• Scheduling - This feature enables you to specify a time for job promotion rather than
promote a job as soon as it is created. You can schedule the time for a job promotion by
hour, day, week, or month.

• Security - This feature enables you to promote infoobjects with their associated security
rights. You can also use this feature to promote infoobjects associated with application
rights.

• Test Promotion - This feature enables you to check or test the promotion to ensure that all
the preventive measures are taken before the actual promotion of the infoobjects.

• Rollback - This feature enables you to restore the destination system to its previous state
after a job is promoted. You can roll back an entire job or a part of the job.

• Auditing - The events generated by the Promotion Management tool are stored in the audit
database. The Auditing feature enables you to monitor the events that are logged in the
audit database.

• Administration options - This feature enables the administrator to configure the

parameters of the Promotion Management tool..

• Version Management - This feature enables you to manage different versions of the same
document. It also enables you to track the changes in the directory. This is now a separate
area under the Manage Section within Bl 4.1 CMC.•

• Promoting Overrides - This feature enables you to promote the overrides through a job
promotion.

Overview of Promotion and Version Management Workflows

• The promotion and version management workflow is not designed for the following:

- Backup

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Disaster recovery

- Archiving

The promotion and version management workflow is not able to do these tasks, because it is
specifically designed for promotion workflows and optimized for 100 objects for each
promotion.
However, it might form part of a recovery strategy, because promotion and version
management is able to complete the following tasks:

Promotion and Version Management as Part of a Recovery Strategy

Content can be re-promoted, thereby restoring lost or corrupted content

Previously checked-in content can be checked out from version management, thereby
restoring lost or corrupted content.

Selected content, typically ad-hoc content, can be promoted from production to another
environment, such as development.

Basic Promotion Management Workflow

You want to promote finished content from the development environment into the test
environment and validate the work. After the acceptance testing, you want to push it through
to the production environment. The following describes the basic promotion management
workflow steps:

1. You create a promotion job with Promotion Management, which contains the following:

. A name and source system definition

. A definition of a target system (if not LCMBIAR)

. A list of objects based on the source

2. You run the promotion job, so that the content is promoted from the development
environment into the test environment.

3. You test that content in the test environment.

4. If the test of the content is successful, you can then re-run the same promotion job but
change the target to the production environment (which is consistent with SAP TMS /
CTS+).

Note:
Promoting content from the test environment to the production environment does
not follow this principle and so it is considered poor practice.

Basic Version Management Workflows

Check-in
Creates a new revision of an object (like a document or a universe) every time you check it
in.

Check-out

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Overwrites the version in the BusinessObjects Repository with the revision you select.

Administration Options of LCM

The administration options enable you to configure settings before promoting infoobjects
from one SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform deployment to another SAP
BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform deployment and SAP deployment. This
section describes how to use the administration options.

Administration Options

Manage Systems
This option enables you to add and remove the host systems.
Override Settings
This option enables you to override the properties of infoobjects within the job that were
promoted to the destination system. It overrides the properties of infoobjects that were
promoted from the source system.
Rollback Settings
This option enables you to configure the rollback process at the system level.
Job Settings
This option enables you to specify the number of job instances that can exist in lifecycle
management console system at any instance of time. If the number of jobs exceeds the
specified number, they are automatically deleted. It also enables the user to specify the
number of days for a job, after which the job must be deleted from the lifecycle
management console.
VMS Settings
This option enables you to configure version management systems.

Additional Information about Managing the Lifecycle of a Deployment Using the

LCM Tool
Topic Online location

Promotion Management Bl 4 Administrator Guide is available in the

SAP Service Marketplace
Promotion Management Architecture htto://wiki.sen.saD.com/wiki/disolav/
BOBJ/Promotion+Management+Architec-
ture+%3A+orocesses+at+olav+in+a
+BI4+landscaoe

New Job Creation

Interface Elements Used to Create a New Job with the Promotion Management Tool

• Name

• Description

• Keywords

• Save Job in

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

• Source System

• Destination System

• User name

• Password

• Authentication

You can create a new job using the Promotion Management tool. The following table
discusses the elements and fields in the tool interface that you can use to create a new job:

Table 48: GUI Elements and Fields to Create a New Job

Item Description

Name Name of the job that you want to create.

Description Description of the job you want to create.
Keywords The keywords for the contents of the job you want to create
Save Job in You must browse and select a folder to create a job.
Source System The name of the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
system from which you want to promote a job.
Destination System The name of the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform
system to which you want to promote a job.
User name The login ID that you must use to log into the source or Destination
system.
Password The password that you must use to log into the source or destination
system.
Authentication The authentication type that is used to connect to the source or desti
nation system.

Job Dependencies Management

Management of Dependencies During Promotion

• Infoobjects are dependent on other infoobjects

• During promotion, you can promote all dependencies or select only the ones you want
promoted.

• To select and filter dependents for promotion, you must use the Manage Dependencies
option.

In an SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform environment, infoobjects are

dependent on other infoobjects. For example, a Web Analysis document is dependent on the
underlying Universe for its structure, content, and so on. While promoting an object, you can
select and filter the dependents that you want to promote or permit the promotion of all the
dependents to another SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform system. To
select and filter the dependents you want to promote along with the infoobject, you must use
the Manage Dependencies option.

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

If you do not use this option, the dependents are not promoted along with the job.

Options Used to Manage Dependents

Universe for selected reports

Selected universes, Universe restriction set

Access levels set on selected objects

Connections used by selected Universes

Business Views for selected reports

Events, calendars, and profiles used by selected publication

The following table discusses options that you can use to manage the dependents:

Table 49: Dependency Management Options

Types of Dependency Objects Description

Universe for selected reports The universe upon which the selected infoobject
is dependent is promoted.
Selected universes. Universe restriction Universes that are dependent on another Uni
set verse restriction set are promoted.
Access levels set on selected objects Access levels that are used on the selected in-
foobjects are promoted.
Connections used by selected Universes Universe connection objects that are used by the
selected infoobjects are promoted.
Business Views for selected reports Business Views, business elements, the data
foundation, the data connections, and List of Val
ues (LoVs) that the selected infoobjects depend
on are promoted..
Events, calendars, and profiles used by Event, calendar, and user-profile objects that are
selected publication used by a selected publication are promoted.

• Dependent objects are computed automatically by the lifecycle management

console tool. These dependents are computed based either on the infoobject
relationships or infoobject properties.

• If you select a folder for promotion, then the contents in the selected folder are
considered as primary resources.

• On the Manage Dependencies screen, when you place the cursor on the
scheduled infoobject, a tool tip appears describing the file name, file path,
created date and time, last modified date and time, next run, expiry, owner, and
recurrence of the schedule.

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Job Scheduling
The Promotion Management enables you to specify when a job must be promoted, rather
than promote it as soon as it is created. It also enables you to schedule job promotion at fixed
intervals. This feature is useful for promoting large jobs when the load on the server is at its
minimum. To schedule a job promotion, you must specify a time in the future or select a
recurrence pattern, and you must specify additional parameters.
Testing and scheduling include the following benefits:

Testing and Scheduling Benefits

• Testing before promoting

- You can view the results of a promotion without affecting production systems.

- You are informed if new objects are added, if there are name or CUID conflicts, or if
dependencies are not promoted.

• Test considerations

No checks are performed to determine if the user promoting has rights on the folders in
the destination.

• Scheduling a promotion

Promotion jobs can be scheduled when load is at its minimum.

• Scheduling considerations

- Content is selected when the job runs, not when the promotion job is created or
scheduled.

Job Rollback
The Rollback option enables you to restore the destination system to its previous state after a
job is promoted. The following information about rollbacks is important:

Rolling Back Information

• The purpose of a roll back is to restore a destination system to its previous state.

• Use a roll back in the following scenarios:

- There are production issues.

- The changes must be reversed quickly.

- The scope of changes to be rolled back is large.

• When using CTS+ integration, roll back is only possible for the Bl content.

Considerations When Rolling Back Information

• The following considerations apply to rollbacks:

Enable rollback only for critical systems.

Enable rollback only when absolutely necessary.

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Avoid rolling back more than one version.

Enable a full roll back when security changes need to be rolled back.

Version Management
Version Management Overview

Version Management enables you to manage versions of Bl resources that exist in the SAP
BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform repository.

It supports both Subversion and ClearCase version management systems.

Version Management can be launched from CMC —>Manage Area.

When the CMS is reinitialized, all application settings are erased and default Version
Management system settings are used..

Default Version Management System Settings

Table 50: Version Management System Settings

Parameter Value
Server Name localhost
Server Port 3690
User Name LCM
Password Entered during installation.
Installation Path
• On Windows: <INSTALLDIR> —►SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise
XI 4.0 —►Subversion

• On Unix: <INSTALLDIR> —>sap_bobj —>enterprise_xi40 —►sub

version —>bin

Repository Name
• On Windows: svn_repository

• On Unix: LCM_repository

Workspace Directory • On Windows:

<INSTALLDIR> —>SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI
4.0 —>Checkout

• On Unix:
<INSTALLDIR> —>sap_bobj —>enterprise_xi40 —>Checkout

Protocol SVN

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Additional Information about Basic Version Management

Title Online Location
SAP Note 1759284: How to: Step-by-Step On the SAP Service Marketplace, choose
LCM Override Settings via LCMBiAR file SAP Support Portal —►Help & Sup
port —►Search for SAP Notes and KBAs, then
search for the SAP Note number: 1759284.
(https://websmpl30.sap-ag.de/
sap(bDllbiZjPTAwMQ==)/bc/bsp/sno/
ui_entry/entry.htm?par-
am=69765F6D6F64653D3030312669765F7
361706E6F7465735F6E756D6265723D3137
353932383426).

High-Level Architecture
The figure High-Level Recommendation Architecture shows a recommended setup for a
connected system with no air gap or firewall.

( ------------------- ;--------------- 'i

Version
Management

Development

Version
Management

Promotion
Management

Dedicated Promotion
Management System
Figure 120: High-Level Recommendation Architecture

Recom m ended High-Level A rchitecture

• Three Bl platform environments are installed: Development, Test, and Production.

• A separate, dedicated Bl platform is installed for promotion management.

• Users cannot perform version control on the Production environment.

There are three Bl plaform environments: Development, Test, and Production. A separate,
dedicated installation of the Bl platform is used just for promotion management. This helps

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

with the version management workflows. The reason for this separation is to assist with
version management of a promotion job. That is, you have a promotion job and you want to
check in that promotion job. Having a separate environment for promotion management
prevents users from performing version control with their own content in the Production
environment.

Version
Management

Development Test Firewall Production

Optional Dedicated
Version Promotion
Management LCM Management
System
BIAR file
Dedicated Promotion Promotion
Promotion
Management System Management
Management

Transferred over the

“airgap”

Figure 121: Two Dedicated Promotion Management Systems

The figure Two Dedicated Promotion Management Systems shows a recommended setup for
a non-connected system with no air gap (for example, no firewall). A non-connected system is
one where there is an air gap or a firewall preventing access between systems.

Two D edicated Prom otion M anagem ent System s

• The first system is used to create promotion jobs that are run against the Test
environment.

• The system creates an LCMBIAR file that contains the contents of the promotion job.

• Another promotion job is created on the second promotion management system, which
promotes the LCMBIAR file to the Production environment.

In this architecture, there are two dedicated Promotion Management systems. The first
system is used to create promotion jobs. The promotion jobs are then run against Test.
However, because there is an air-gap surrounding production, the dedicated promotion
management system cannot connect directly to Production. The system creates an LCMBIAR
file that contains the contents of the promotion job. The LCMBIAR file is used as the basis to
create another promotion job on the second promotion management system on the right.
This LCMBIAR file is then promoted into production.
The use of this second dedicated promotion management system is optional and typically not
used.

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Benefits of a Dedicated System

Promotion Management is really a “ production” system.

A dedicated system stores rollback content from a production environment.

It enables versions of Bl content to be re-promoted or old content recovered.

It allows for “decoupling” of software releases between Promotion Management and other
environments.

Promotion Management is really a "production" system. The system needs to be backed up.
The rollback content is stored as instances in the output File Repository Server. The
versioning of content is stored in Version Management, so you must also back up the version
management database.
A dedicated system stores rollback content from a production environment, which could be
critical if a rollback is required in your Production system.
Together with the Version Management System, it contains the versioning and an audit trail of
your Bl content, allowing that content to be re-promoted or old content recovered. It could be
critical to meet compliance regulations. A dedicated system avoids potential issues when
promoting content to which the "Promotion job owner” does not have access. It allows for a
refresh of Development and Test from Production without losing any Promotion
Management-specific data.
It allows for "decoupling” of software releases between Promotion Management and other
environments. You can patch Promotion Management without affecting Production. It allows
the Promotion Management Server to be upgraded without necessarily upgrading
Production. For example, you might want to upgrade Test before Production, but to be
supported, you also need to upgrade the Promotion Management Server.

Mappings and Overrides

Connection Overrides

Connection overrides occur when a connection is promoted from one environment to the
other and the data source connection needs to be updated accordingly.

Connection overrides provide the following connections:

- Universe connections

- Query as Web Service connections

- Crystal Reports direct-to-data connections

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

Promotion
Management
System

Figure 122: Mappings and Overrides

Validation Check Services

Validation check services need to have an Adaptive Job Server and an Adaptive Processing
Server containing the services shown. Only one active Lifecycle Management Service is
supported in each cluster, because this service uses a file-based database for holding over
ride connections. Only one service can access the file-based database at any time.

Table 51: Adaptive Job Server Services

Service Function

Visual Difference Scheduling service Scheduling of comparisons

Lifecycle Management Scheduling service Promotion of Jobs, whether scheduled or not

Table 52: Adaptive Processing Server Services

Service Function

Lifecycle Management service (maximum of • Scanning, managing, and promotion of

1) overrides

• Used for almost all Version Management

workflows

Visual Difference service Comparing workflows with Version Manage

ment (limited to Promotion Jobs)

Lesson: Describing the Transport Mechanism using Promotion Management

Service Function

Lifecycle Management ClearCase service Needed for both ClearCase and locking and
unlocking items in Subversion

The location of the file-based database is specified in CMC Applications Promotion

Management in LCM Override Settings.

Additional Information about Factors that Affect Life cycle Management

Title Online Location

Lifecycle Manager Overrides in BI4 In the SAP Community Network, search for
the title.
Promotion Management Architecture: Proc In the SAP Community Network, search for
esses at Play in a BI4 Landscape the title.

Best Practices for Life cycle Management

Lifecycle Management Best Practices

Observe the following best practices for Lifecycle Management:

- Create folders to organize promotion jobs.

- Use consistent naming convention for promotion jobs.

- Create promotion job templates.

Enable and run CMS and FRS in the source system when creating a promotion job.

Run the APS containing the Data Federation Service in both the Source and Destination
while promoting Multi-Source Universe.

Non-Supported LCM Scenarios

• The following scenarios are not supported by LCM:

LCM is not designed for a large object. Optimal performance is 100 objects at a time.

LCM promotion jobs are not designed for backups of entire repository.

Promotion jobs cannot include instances, in-boxes and documents in Favorites folder.

Additional Information about Best Practices for Managing the Life cycle of a
Deployment
Title Online Location

BI4 Upgrade and Promotion Management On the SAP Community Network, search for
KBAs the title.
SAP Enterprise Support Academy On the SAP Support Portal, choose Support
Programs & Services —►SAP Enterprise Sup
port —*• SAP Enterprise Support Academy.

Unit 11: Information Distribution (Optional)

LESSON SUMMARY
You should now be able to:

• Describe the life cycle of a deployment

• Manage the life cycle of a deployment using the Life Cycle Management (LCM) tool

• Create a new job

• Manage job dependencies

• Schedule and roll back jobs

• Perform basic version management

• Identify factors that affect life cycle management

• Apply best practices for managing the life cycle of a deployment

Unit 11

Learning Assessment

1. Publications allow you to:

Choose the correct answer.

I A Create unique dashboards for each user

B Create specific folders for users based on their role

| C Distribute reports to a large set of users and user groups

D Generate alerts based on data thresholds

2. Which of the following is important when displaying components in SAP NetWeaver

Portal?
Choose the correct answer.

| A Central Management Console

B BW Publisher

I C RFC connection

D iView

3. The Promotion Management Tool has to be installed separately in Bl 4.1 because it is not
integrated with Bl 4.1.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

4. Lifecycle management refers to the entire process of designing, developing, and

maintaining an application solution.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

SAR4
0
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com
For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

Unit 11: Learning Assessment

5. Which of the following is not an LCM function.

Choose the correct answer.

| A Bl Content Promotion

B Version Management

C Auditing

D Security Rights Promotion

6. Job creation is required only for promoting Bl content from one environment to another,
not for exporting to LCMBIAR.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

7. You cannot check the security rights with the Manage Job Dependencies function.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

8. When scheduling a job, which statements are accurate?

Choose the correct answers.

A To schedule a job promotion, you must specify a time in the future or select a
recurrence pattern and you must specify additional parameters.

B Promotion jobs can be scheduled only when load is greater than 30 percent.

C Content is selected when the promotion job is created or scheduled.

D You perform job scheduling with the Promotion Management tool.

9. Version Management supports both Subversion and ClearCase version management

systems.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

Unit 11: Learning Assessment

10. Which of the following are Bl platform environments?

Choose the correct answers.

| A Development

B Production

I C Promotion

D Test

11. Expert Guided Implementation combines training, live configuration, and on-demand
expertise.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

False

Unit 11

Learning Assessment - Answers

1. Publications allow you to:

Choose the correct answer.

□ A Create unique dashboards for each user

□ B Create specific folders for users based on their role
0 C Distribute reports to a large set of users and user groups

□ D Generate alerts based on data thresholds

2. Which of the following is important when displaying components in SAP NetWeaver
Portal?
Choose the correct answer.

| A Central Management Console

B BW Publisher

C RFC connection

\x \ D iView

3. The Promotion Management Tool has to be installed separately in Bl 4.1 because it is not
integrated with Bl 4.1.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

\x \ False

4. Lifecycle management refers to the entire process of designing, developing, and

maintaining an application solution.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

[x ] True

False

Unit 11: Learning Assessment - Answers

5. Which of the following is not an LCM function.

Choose the correct answer.

| A Bl Content Promotion

B Version Management

\x \ C Auditing

D Security Rights Promotion

6. Job creation is required only for promoting Bl content from one environment to another,
not for exporting to LCMBIAR.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

| True

\x \ False

7. You cannot check the security rights with the Manage Job Dependencies function.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

[x ] True

False

8. When scheduling a job, which statements are accurate?

Choose the correct answers.

|~xj A To schedule a job promotion, you must specify a time in the future or select a
recurrence pattern and you must specify additional parameters.

B Promotion jobs can be scheduled only when load is greater than 30 percent.

I C Content is selected when the promotion job is created or scheduled.

|~x] D You perform job scheduling with the Promotion Management tool.

9. Version Management supports both Subversion and ClearCase version management

systems.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

0 True

False

Unit 11: Learning Assessment - Answers

10. Which of the following are Bl platform environments?

Choose the correct answers.

[~xj A Development

|~xj B Production

C Promotion

\x \ D Test

11. Expert Guided Implementation combines training, live configuration, and on-demand
expertise.
Determine whether this statement is true or false.

[x ] True

False

For Any SAP / IBM / Oracle - Materials Purchase Visit : www.erpexams.com OR Contact Via Email Directly At : sapmaterials4u@gmail.com

BR235 - EN - Col18 SAP Convergent Charging
No ratings yet
BR235 - EN - Col18 SAP Convergent Charging
195 pages
Valorant Nfa To Fa
No ratings yet
Valorant Nfa To Fa
2 pages
Sap La S4D400 en 24 Ex
No ratings yet
Sap La S4D400 en 24 Ex
126 pages
THR80 2211 En-Us
100% (1)
THR80 2211 En-Us
453 pages
Curso SAP FSM 100 22 FSM100.24.EN-US
100% (1)
Curso SAP FSM 100 22 FSM100.24.EN-US
327 pages
SCM381 - EN - Col11 Advanced SAP MII (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence)
No ratings yet
SCM381 - EN - Col11 Advanced SAP MII (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence)
81 pages
Image in Mail Body in ABAP - SAP Blogs
No ratings yet
Image in Mail Body in ABAP - SAP Blogs
54 pages
This Documentation As PDF - SAP HANA Cloud PDF
100% (1)
This Documentation As PDF - SAP HANA Cloud PDF
1,472 pages
ADM325 EN Col20
No ratings yet
ADM325 EN Col20
353 pages
SCM745 - EN - Col01 SAP Processes in Manufacturing Execution
100% (1)
SCM745 - EN - Col01 SAP Processes in Manufacturing Execution
140 pages
SECIAG
No ratings yet
SECIAG
351 pages
Variant Configuration (With AVC) in Sap S/4Hana: Participant Handbook
No ratings yet
Variant Configuration (With AVC) in Sap S/4Hana: Participant Handbook
548 pages
Learning Journey - S4 Hana Sales Upskilling - 1809
0% (1)
Learning Journey - S4 Hana Sales Upskilling - 1809
6 pages
S4F02 Col14
No ratings yet
S4F02 Col14
307 pages
S4128 EN Col14-FB
No ratings yet
S4128 EN Col14-FB
148 pages
HR842 2405 En-Us
100% (2)
HR842 2405 En-Us
193 pages
Certification Sap MDG 2 Book
No ratings yet
Certification Sap MDG 2 Book
186 pages
S4F23 en 20 Ex
No ratings yet
S4F23 en 20 Ex
236 pages
Sap La Cld200 en 22 Ex
No ratings yet
Sap La Cld200 en 22 Ex
105 pages
BOD410 - EN - Col17 SAP Lumira Designer - Basic
No ratings yet
BOD410 - EN - Col17 SAP Lumira Designer - Basic
121 pages
SAP HANA Smart Data Integration: Transform and Replicate Data With Ease
No ratings yet
SAP HANA Smart Data Integration: Transform and Replicate Data With Ease
73 pages
Act100 23 En-Us
No ratings yet
Act100 23 En-Us
261 pages
SAP Build Code Overview
No ratings yet
SAP Build Code Overview
30 pages
SAP BR240 - EN - Col22 Financial Contract Accounting - Exercises
No ratings yet
SAP BR240 - EN - Col22 Financial Contract Accounting - Exercises
191 pages
THR96 2211 En-Us
No ratings yet
THR96 2211 En-Us
267 pages
S4EA1
100% (1)
S4EA1
103 pages
E2E220 en Col20 Test Management
No ratings yet
E2E220 en Col20 Test Management
246 pages
D75aw en Col22
100% (1)
D75aw en Col22
146 pages
Additional Financial Accounting Configuration in SAP S/4HANA
No ratings yet
Additional Financial Accounting Configuration in SAP S/4HANA
20 pages
S4LG1 EN Col09 ILT FV Show
No ratings yet
S4LG1 EN Col09 ILT FV Show
246 pages
SAP BR245 - EN - Col22 SAP Convergent Invoicing - Exercises
No ratings yet
SAP BR245 - EN - Col22 SAP Convergent Invoicing - Exercises
145 pages
S4125 en Col14 Part A4 Extract 1
No ratings yet
S4125 en Col14 Part A4 Extract 1
50 pages
TADM12 1 EN Col23 EX LTR
100% (1)
TADM12 1 EN Col23 EX LTR
98 pages
Ha300 en Col16 Ilt FV Show
No ratings yet
Ha300 en Col16 Ilt FV Show
405 pages
Assessment Knowledge Badge Assessment Getting Started With Support From SAP
No ratings yet
Assessment Knowledge Badge Assessment Getting Started With Support From SAP
8 pages
SAP S4HANA Fundamentals Keynotes
No ratings yet
SAP S4HANA Fundamentals Keynotes
361 pages
Act1cl en Col11
No ratings yet
Act1cl en Col11
197 pages
THR93 2311 En-Us
No ratings yet
THR93 2311 En-Us
253 pages
BC420 - 46C - 005principles of Standard Data Transfer
No ratings yet
BC420 - 46C - 005principles of Standard Data Transfer
14 pages
Financial Closing in SAP S/4HANA
No ratings yet
Financial Closing in SAP S/4HANA
20 pages
SAP Course Listing
100% (1)
SAP Course Listing
35 pages
SMTP Technical Architecture (Outbound E-Mail) Mi
No ratings yet
SMTP Technical Architecture (Outbound E-Mail) Mi
2 pages
Bank Communication Management in SAP S4HANA (2020) (2) 1
No ratings yet
Bank Communication Management in SAP S4HANA (2020) (2) 1
230 pages
DEV211 - Core Data Services: Next On Sap Hana: Generation Data Definition and Access
No ratings yet
DEV211 - Core Data Services: Next On Sap Hana: Generation Data Definition and Access
66 pages
Adm - Idm 920
No ratings yet
Adm - Idm 920
200 pages
Short Overview - SAP S4HANA Integration With JIRA
No ratings yet
Short Overview - SAP S4HANA Integration With JIRA
15 pages
S4LG1 1
No ratings yet
S4LG1 1
139 pages
SAP Joule Manual 1
No ratings yet
SAP Joule Manual 1
32 pages
Sap La F12T0 en 05 Ex
100% (1)
Sap La F12T0 en 05 Ex
191 pages
FSD - OP2023 - Latest Feature Scope Desription
No ratings yet
FSD - OP2023 - Latest Feature Scope Desription
778 pages
SAP Fiori Applications Using ABAP RESTful On SAP BTP 1727082251
No ratings yet
SAP Fiori Applications Using ABAP RESTful On SAP BTP 1727082251
12 pages
CL 201
No ratings yet
CL 201
126 pages
HA201 EN Col18 CO A4
No ratings yet
HA201 EN Col18 CO A4
17 pages
Itdumpsfree: Get Free Valid Exam Dumps and Pass Your Exam Test With Confidence
No ratings yet
Itdumpsfree: Get Free Valid Exam Dumps and Pass Your Exam Test With Confidence
5 pages
SAP PM Overview
No ratings yet
SAP PM Overview
62 pages
Embedded Consolidation 20160524
100% (2)
Embedded Consolidation 20160524
29 pages
BYD30 - EN - Col92 Supply Chain Management With SAP Business ByDesign
100% (1)
BYD30 - EN - Col92 Supply Chain Management With SAP Business ByDesign
111 pages
TSEC10 2 EN Col11
No ratings yet
TSEC10 2 EN Col11
245 pages
Br235 en Col20 CC
No ratings yet
Br235 en Col20 CC
222 pages
Programming With BAPIs in Visual Basic
No ratings yet
Programming With BAPIs in Visual Basic
37 pages
UI5 User Guide: How to develop responsive data-centric client web applications
From Everand
UI5 User Guide: How to develop responsive data-centric client web applications
Carsten Heinrigs
No ratings yet
SAP XI Exchange Infrastructure
From Everand
SAP XI Exchange Infrastructure
equitypress
1/5 (3)
Kaspersky Anti-Virus 5.5 For Proxy Server: Administrator Guide
No ratings yet
Kaspersky Anti-Virus 5.5 For Proxy Server: Administrator Guide
59 pages
Web Miining: Summary: Sonia Gupta, Neha Singh
No ratings yet
Web Miining: Summary: Sonia Gupta, Neha Singh
6 pages
Ch20
No ratings yet
Ch20
41 pages
Web Development 1 2
No ratings yet
Web Development 1 2
12 pages
Switch Developer Guide
No ratings yet
Switch Developer Guide
14 pages
Digital Marketing Syllabus
No ratings yet
Digital Marketing Syllabus
6 pages
Joshi Kōsei Rich Thots 2 378994 Doujin - Edoujin
78% (41)
Joshi Kōsei Rich Thots 2 378994 Doujin - Edoujin
38 pages
Geographical Information System (Gis) For Water Resources Management
No ratings yet
Geographical Information System (Gis) For Water Resources Management
6 pages
It 003 - Prelims
No ratings yet
It 003 - Prelims
19 pages
ToR 2074 06 23 Final
100% (1)
ToR 2074 06 23 Final
11 pages
EmpTech - Q1 - Mod1 - Current State of ICT
No ratings yet
EmpTech - Q1 - Mod1 - Current State of ICT
10 pages
Assignment 2 Digital Business
No ratings yet
Assignment 2 Digital Business
2 pages
Complete SEO Tools List For Website
100% (2)
Complete SEO Tools List For Website
31 pages
SP3368 M
No ratings yet
SP3368 M
33 pages
Mechanics of Materials: Hibeler Mecanica de Materiales
No ratings yet
Mechanics of Materials: Hibeler Mecanica de Materiales
3 pages
Student User Manual: Online Re-Registration System
No ratings yet
Student User Manual: Online Re-Registration System
17 pages
E-Learning Website For Learning of HTML and CSS
No ratings yet
E-Learning Website For Learning of HTML and CSS
4 pages
Electrical Foundation
No ratings yet
Electrical Foundation
2 pages
I Love My Room - There Is - There Are - Interactive Worksheet
No ratings yet
I Love My Room - There Is - There Are - Interactive Worksheet
4 pages
Audemat Control Silver Man en v2.1.x
No ratings yet
Audemat Control Silver Man en v2.1.x
50 pages
Survey Monkey Pricing
No ratings yet
Survey Monkey Pricing
2 pages
Blockchain Based Document Verification System
No ratings yet
Blockchain Based Document Verification System
22 pages
Lucene Search Syntax Guide
No ratings yet
Lucene Search Syntax Guide
18 pages
Dfootprint Health Balance
No ratings yet
Dfootprint Health Balance
12 pages
Sukruthi WT Week5
No ratings yet
Sukruthi WT Week5
15 pages
Competitors of Upgrad: What'S The Difference in Simplilearn and Upgrad'S Website?
No ratings yet
Competitors of Upgrad: What'S The Difference in Simplilearn and Upgrad'S Website?
3 pages
CH 9 Computer Networks
No ratings yet
CH 9 Computer Networks
84 pages
Copy Table Content Between Two Systems - SAP Blogs
No ratings yet
Copy Table Content Between Two Systems - SAP Blogs
13 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.